JP7344563B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In the gaming machine, a game is performed in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player. ,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is such that when the gaming state is the second gaming state, the second gaming state ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching a first specified value. The display is a display suggesting a transition to the first gaming state, and is an effect of displaying first result information representing the result of a jackpot game during a series of matches;
The first result information display includes average time information representing the average time until winning a jackpot during consecutive games,
The second display performance is a performance that performs a state suggestion display that suggests the second gaming state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is an explanatory diagram of fluctuation pattern judgment table T6 in a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory diagram of the big prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a preliminary determination information storage area. It is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is an explanatory diagram of a basic performance pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance up performance pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of processing during a fluctuation performance. It is a flowchart of display control processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining a confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance A. It is a diagram for explaining the confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area change effect A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a variable display area change effect B; It is a diagram for explaining a variable display area change effect C. It is a figure for explaining variable display area duplication effect A. It is a figure for explaining variable display area duplication effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a variable display area overlapping effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect A. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern sudden fixed stop production B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance C. It is a diagram for explaining role-linked performance A. It is a figure for explaining role object interlocking performance B. It is a diagram for explaining role-linked effect C. It is a diagram for explaining scroll effect A. It is a diagram for explaining scroll effect B. It is a diagram for explaining scroll effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern special variation effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern special variation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern special variation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern loss performance A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern loss performance B. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern loss performance C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production A; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production B; It is a diagram for explaining a ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image display effect A; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image display performance B; It is a figure for explaining mode suggestion image display effect C. It is a figure for explaining mode suggestion image continuation effect A. It is a figure for explaining mode suggestion image continuation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image continuation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a multiple section display effect A. It is a figure for explaining the multiple section display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a multiple section display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining functional timer display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining function-based timer display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a functional timer display effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect A; 7 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption effect A. 7 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption effect B. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption effect C. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining character string decomposition effect A. It is a figure for explaining character string decomposition effect B. It is a diagram for explaining character string decomposition effect C. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot game count display performance A. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot game count display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot game count display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining double timer display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining double timer display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining double timer display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining final screen display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining final screen display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining final screen display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining promotion suspension continuous effect A. It is a diagram for explaining promotion pending continuous performance B. It is a diagram for explaining promotion suspension continuous effect C. It is a diagram for explaining operation instruction display performance A. It is a figure for explaining operation instruction display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining operation instruction display performance C. It is a diagram for explaining button special display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining button special display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining button special display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining effect button valid/invalid display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining effect button valid/invalid display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining operation automation performance A. It is a diagram for explaining operation automation performance B. It is a diagram for explaining operation automation performance C. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the first movable accessory and the frame movable accessory. It is a diagram for explaining double role performance A. It is a diagram for explaining double role performance B. It is a figure for explaining movable member contact effect A. It is a figure for explaining movable member contact effect B. It is a diagram for explaining movable member contact effect C.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, the production button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, A frame movable body 69 is provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A movable frame body 69 (also referred to as a movable frame accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided on the right and left sides of the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members disposed on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that its main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69 are normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) where they are distant from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, and move toward the handle 60 from the retracted positions so as to approach each other (advance). ) and can come to rest at the position where it touches the handle 60. When the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up and down and left and right depending on the performance and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged at paired positions on the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (belly button) 19. , a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first grand prize device (first attacker) 31, a second grand prize device (second attacker) 36, and a grand prize opening opening. It includes a starting opening 17, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and display devices 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the shape and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed. area, and a pending digested image display area (the pending display area) in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digested image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply called a hold icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss, such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Furthermore, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance displaying the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "variable performance of performance symbols", "fluctuation performance of decorative symbols", or simply "fluctuation performance" and "fluctuation display". It should be noted that the variation performance of this decorative pattern is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B, which displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holding displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digesting image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the pending digesting image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the first special symbol is displayed. 2. It is possible to clearly display to the player that the reserved special drawings are extinguished ("extinguishment of reserved special drawings" to be described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member is movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advanced position in front of the vehicle. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position.

A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the image display device 7. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 includes an inlet section through which game balls flow in and an outlet section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flowed in through the inlet section to flow out to the stage section 11 through the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located at a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains constant. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is made. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , a V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening/closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 30 can pass inside the first grand prize winning device 31. . The first big winning hole sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of a game ball into the first big winning hole 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotating state) in which it distributes to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in the second state (stopping state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes game balls to the non-V area 70. . In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state). In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity for transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. In other words, the V area 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a variable probability operation opening. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged at the upper right of the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35 It is equipped with The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second large prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The grand prize opening starting hole 17 is arranged above the first grand prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the first grand prize opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not need to include the big winning opening opening opening 17.

The general winning hole 27 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning hole 29 is located in the lower right part of the gaming area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first big winning hole 30.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information). , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopping symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping mode, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are 4 pieces. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol may be adopted. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) acquired for the passage is stored as a normal symbol in the normal symbol retention storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of general figure reservations that can be stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings will be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of a predetermined number of symbols as an upper limit. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The common picture reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting up the LEDs for the number of common pictures pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, and the first starting opening sensor 21a. Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a is provided inside the big winning opening starting opening 17, and detects the game ball that has entered the big winning opening starting opening 17. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The normal winning hole sensor 29a detects the game ball that has passed into the normal winning hole 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects contact with the handle 60 using the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 using the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols. etc. (including performance patterns), background images, and other image data are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the production control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and a frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and performs the operations according to the motion pattern data. The operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are controlled. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button detection switch 63a and a selection button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the production button detection switch 63a, and can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the production button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Additionally, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a fluctuation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 86 stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. In addition, in the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information do not change their status even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Furthermore, as the initial state of the counters, the ceiling counter is set to "500" and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a basic performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). It is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a fluctuation before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, fixed change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight presentation counter is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the evening performance counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the gaming machine 1, and is set to 0 as an initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 and the other counters are set to 0 as the initial state of the counters.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7(A) shows the random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7(B) shows the random number obtained by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "fluctuation pattern random number," and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at timings described later. It is configured as follows. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255. The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-read performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at timings to be described later. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the fluctuating performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the regular symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

In the jackpot determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the obtained jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to for determination. In FIG. 8(A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number value is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65,535 )”, it is shown that it is determined to be a “lose”. In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it will be judged as a "jackpot". It is shown that this is determined to be a "loss". Details of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time saving state, more no-reach loses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby increasing the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

The normal symbol winning determination table T3 indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 255)", it is determined that the result is a "loss". In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is shown that it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. In FIG. 8(D), when in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and when in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". It has been shown that

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is composed of "jackpot type" and "special symbol This is a table that is referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special pattern stop pattern data" corresponding to the special pattern stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game can be determined. "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not planning jackpot" This will be explained later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, a player enters the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines that he has lost, the reach determination table T2 determines that he has a reach, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is between "0 and 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in the time saving state, it is determined as a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined as a "jackpot due to pass through 16 RV" in the jackpot type determination table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different variation times are set. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12" in the "time saving state". It has been shown that FIG. 12(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T8. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9), in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21". ”, and when the special pattern stop symbol data is “14H”, “15H”, or “22H”, the release pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special pattern stop pattern data is “13H”, the release pattern is It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23." FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is performed once, The second big prize opening 35 is opened for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th R, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in the 16th R, open the second grand prize opening 35 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and the special figure stopping symbol data is determined to be "opening pattern 33". It is shown that when it is "15H" or "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and the second prize is won. When this happens, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. .
Open the port.

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of jackpot drawings (special symbol drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When you win a jackpot, the jackpot game opens the jackpot (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-not-passing planned jackpot." "V passing planned jackpot" operates the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 (V passing scheduled opening pattern) during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpot where the special pattern stop symbol data is 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the "V passing expected jackpot (probable variable jackpot)". The combinations of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33) ) or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. "V non-passing expected jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (opening pattern not expected to pass V) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, This is a jackpot that activates the V opening/closing member 71. Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing expected jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area is 39 becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. The actual total number of rounds in the "16 RV expected jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass V", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: Opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" and the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is scheduled to pass V" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, in the case of "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass V" and "16R (actually 13R) jackpot scheduled to pass V", the time-saving game (100 times in this example) will be performed after the jackpot game ends. It has become. In other words, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass" and a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass", and the gaming state after the jackpot is uncertain. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-saving state (low-accuracy/high-base state) or the high-accuracy/time-saving state (high-accuracy/high-base state) will occur. In addition, after the end of the time-saving game, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) for "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass V", and the gaming state becomes "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass V". appears to be in a normal high-accuracy-low base state. That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state will be as follows. Being in a high probability low base state but with a high probability becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state), and this latent probability variable state is difficult for the player to discern. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability (high base state) and the high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game of "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot", and the time saving end of "16R (actually 13R) V not planned jackpot" The subsequent low-probability, low-base state and the high-probability, low-base state after the end of the time saving of "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V and 60/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V not. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass through V, and 45/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass through V. 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)", and the probability fluctuation An uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. A high probability state is achieved by making a jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the variation pattern used. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control simultaneously with respect to the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability fluctuation control by creating a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (where the number of normal symbol random numbers (random winning numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8(C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and control for extending the opening time and increasing number of openings for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning the V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the player passes to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." Specifically, jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a high-probability, high-base state are of the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot.” "16RV jackpot expected to pass" and "16R (actually 15R) V pass planned jackpot" are in a high probability high base state, after playing a jackpot game, winning the next jackpot (next jackpot) and executing that jackpot game. Ends with. "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is a high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), and a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning a jackpot scheduled to not pass V will be a normal probability state (non-high probability (that is, a state of low probability), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state." Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability-high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low-probability-high base state means that after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as a non-time-saving state)." Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the validity determining means (FIG. 23) and the preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial values of the flags are "1", that is, "ON" for the ceiling flag, and the initial values of the other flags are "0", that is, "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial values of the counters are "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal symbol random number value) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting opening sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and hold ball detection processing. The numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-H), and stores the obtained random value in the first to Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbols reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: Value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-AS value), -TRND-RC value) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for special figure 2 advance determination processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 advance determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for special figure 1 advance determination processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: Step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Refer to this to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "649", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, a preliminary determination table T1 different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the preliminary jackpot determination is "lose" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number is any one of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance that it is a "16RV passing planned jackpot". In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later; however, in other embodiments, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot type determination table T5 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a fluctuating pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by the special drawing 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And obtain the reach random value. Next, since the time-saving state is here (the time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state, and determines the jackpot preliminary determination result in step S304. A fluctuation pattern is identified from the preliminary judgment result of reach/absence obtained from the reach random value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches are selected. For example, if a loss with a reach is determined in advance from the jackpot preliminary determination result and the preliminary determination result of the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, the variation pattern “P64” is selected, and the number of reserved pitches is “3 to 4”, the variation pattern “P68” is selected. Note that in this embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later; however, as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 may be used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 advance determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401: NO). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. ”) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot in advance. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "164", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". Note that the preliminary jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special drawing 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", in step S203 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol is "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is extinguished and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes “0” immediately. This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of pending special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first inputs the normal symbol random number value ( Read out the winning random value). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in a non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be a "lose". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)) . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start variable display of the normal symbols (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "loss", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and determines the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 using the gaming state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. Select. Here, in the non-time-saving state, "open pattern 11" is selected, and in the time-saving state, "open pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 6 pieces), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 is reached. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (occlusions) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are respectively on the left side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side where they are read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) are respectively on the right side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation is a jackpot that provides a greater profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation (V-passing expected jackpot) It has become easier to win.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is made with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second reserved special figure) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") of the jackpot judgment table T1. Determine whether or not.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special figure 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special figure 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the jackpot determination result is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). A determination as to whether or not the time saving state is established is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process moves to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is the special drawing 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type will definitely be a V-passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state among the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3” (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is “P21” to “P23”) are referenced (addresses are set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" for special drawing 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, a variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, we will use the portions ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ) is referred to. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607: YES), that is, when there is a reach and there is a loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time saving state, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P14" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Since the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, a shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold. In other words, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More and more short fluctuation patterns are being selected. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

If the reach random value is not a reach established random value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-reach loss (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state no reach loss, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The "P16" part (in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so the shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 that is referenced is different from. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. is referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63". From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" for special drawing 2 is selected. For example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44 ” to “P46”) are referenced. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: Step S108). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saving times, and the details will be described later. After the gaming state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the jackpot and the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning hole. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. Together with the setting of the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V opening/closing member, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the won jackpot. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, the round counter is set to "16" (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag (returning them to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the present process ends.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability change counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of changes in special symbols executed during the time saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time saving state, the time saving counter is set to "100". As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command includes information regarding the current game state that has been set (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not it is in a variable probability state, the variable probability counter value, whether it is in a time saving state or not, the time saving counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the specified rotation speed. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the counter value has become "0" (step S2012). In other words, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has elapsed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched on (step S2013), and "700" is set in the time saving counter as the number of time saving times (number of times of granting). Then, the ceiling flag is turned off (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: Step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in a low base state during a non-time saving state, it is in a low base state while a jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: Step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big prize opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, it is operated according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. When a game ball of a predetermined number wins, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the grand prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the grand prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the big winning hole may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big winning hole that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. This includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning hole (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning hole opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) depending on the type of jackpot. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the opening of the big winning opening during one round. It is also possible to determine whether it is the first opening or not, and to set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the grand prize opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since closing the big prize opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" is "16R (actually 13R) V-not-passing planned jackpot". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass into the V area 39 in "Jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 with a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass through V" will occur to the player. ”, it can be recognized that no game ball has passed into the V area 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V area 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed and the present process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter values are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in this round.

If it is an opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball won in the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process moves to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first big prize opening 30 in this round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V opening/closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed when the first ball wins, regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to allow the short circuit to be opened (in this case, for 0.1 seconds) at the same time. In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, for 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and while the V opening/closing member 71 is open. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when a jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (described later in the V area sensor detection processing (see Figure 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball that enters the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned ON when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is assumed that it will not be turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). This prevents the V flag from being turned on and set to a high probability state based on V passing due to fraudulent activity. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first grand prize opening 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process moves to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process moves to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process moves to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long when the second ball wins (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (29.5 seconds maximum opening time of the grand prize opening + 2 seconds interval closing time), generally speaking, the second ball will win the prize. The time from the end of the round to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, in the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S2550). As mentioned above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the big prize opening. Make a judgment.

If the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after several seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period starts. Make the settings and finish this process.

If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short-circuit opening, the condition for closing the V opening/closing member 71 may include that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and the present processing ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: Step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned OFF (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets the time saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy, high-base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of revolutions until b time saving (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after a jackpot game, when the probability change flag is OFF, when the game is hit 500 times, the game enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the set gaming state (time saving flag, time saving counter, variable probability flag, variable probability counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. be done. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Held pitch count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending pitch count process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of regular symbol reserved balls. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows an interrupt for the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable performance (step S4305). The process during variable performance is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance, and the details will be described later. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading effect. The details of the pre-read effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. Note that if the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub-RAM 94 information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data that is included in the opening command and is set at the time of jackpot winning determination. Then, the opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is selected in the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94 by selecting the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, an ending performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the production control microcomputer 91 inputs information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag). , ceiling counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving effect counter, probability-changing effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) in time saving is set in a time saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations in probability changing is set in a probability variable performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in a ceiling performance counter. Thereby, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to hold information about passing the V when receiving the V passing command. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Ahead production decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs advance determination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot preliminary judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type preliminary judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, the advance judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that the jackpot judgment information “Lose” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third pieces as the preliminary judgment results corresponding to the first to third pieces of special drawing 2 pending. A state is shown in which the data is stored in a storage area, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that from the state of FIG. 39(A), special drawing 2 has won, and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is added to the fourth special drawing 2 pending. A state in which the data is stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, jackpot judgment information "jackpot", jackpot type information "21H", and fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as preliminary judgment information. In addition, "Pattern A" is added as pre-reading performance pattern information to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawings 2 pending and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. " is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to this area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. 4. Pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: Step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, if the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-read effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with reach" (step S4603). Whether it is a "big hit" or "a hit with reach" can be determined based on, for example, the preliminary determination result of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach loss" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "Jackpot" or "Lose with reach" (step S4603: YES), a pre-read performance execution determination that determines whether or not to execute the pre-read performance; Then, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Jackpot" and the pre-read effect random number is "0 to 55", the pre-read effect is "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "56 to 67", the pre-read effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. In addition, if the pre-judgment result is "Less with reach" and the pre-reading effect random number is "0-107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", the pre-reading effect will be When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-reading effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-reading effect. Note that the type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-read effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-judgment command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area are stored. A prefetch effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Set "Pattern A" to "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effects that are executed before the variable effects corresponding to the fourth storage area (variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). . Note that whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing to execute the pre-read effect has already passed, the pre-read effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-read effect, it will be executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current gaming status, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the winning determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs basic performance pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic performance pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display of predetermined characters and their movements, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67) , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up production and look-ahead production on top of this basic production. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the basic performance pattern by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic performance patterns are set that perform no-reach performance. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic performance pattern for performing the SP1 performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs a no-reach performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and the chance up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 includes a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". You may or may not be prepared.

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " 4-NO,” “4-SP1,” “4-SP2,” “4-SP3,” and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a count performance pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count performance pattern determination process includes the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the probability change, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time saving, the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations and the like on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability variations on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation production counter at the time of probability variation. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability changes based on the value of the time-saving performance counter when time is shortened.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the number of changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight effect counter records the number of changes since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter each time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2 (for example, TH2=200) when the value of the evening effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1=10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. Thereby, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the ram has not been cleared. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 may erase the display and chance image representing the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the evening performance counter is TH4 (for example, TH4=100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The production control microcomputer 91 may decide whether or not to display the value of the ceiling production counter based on the value of the evening production counter as described above, or may decide based on the value of the ceiling production counter. Good too. For example, the production control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH6 (for example, TH6=100), and displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH7 (for example, TH7=70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be erased, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count performance pattern determination process, the combination of performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined by referring to the performance control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized. Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the variable effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a variable production timer (step S5030), and ends this process. A variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", the variation effect timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation performance (FIG. 36: Step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer has reached zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of variation in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from which the production control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 etc. that it is a specific timing during the variation production, and when the image control board 100 receives the variation before end command. According to the information included in the before-variation-end command, the content of the presentation is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc.

If it is not the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-read effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command that does not include pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variable effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect that displays a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect to fade the preview image.

9. Operation of the movable body and display effect of the sub-display screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effect of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during game performance (display performance), initial operation when power is turned on, etc. will be carried out. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during a game performance (display performance) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, and has an upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and a lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the center is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored so that the remaining part is visible, or may be completely stored and difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to be able to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction in front of the display screen 7a. Moreover, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be set arbitrarily. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed in at least a portion thereof, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode) . In this second aspect, the decoration part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stop there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is constituted by a pair of flat members arranged on both the left and right sides of the handle 60, and is configured to be movable in the left and right directions, respectively. The two members are made of flexible members and are configured such that one main surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) far from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively (first mode) . As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 each move (advance) from the retracted position in a direction approaching the handle 60, that is, move close to each other, and each move toward the handle 60. It can stand still at the position where it is touched (second mode). When the movable frame accessory 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60. The frame movable accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two members are separated from each other so that the second mode changes to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display images. Further, it is possible to perform effects linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and examples of aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, preliminary determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. Further, in some display presentation examples, a hold display (hold icon) may be omitted.

The fixed stop symbol remaining display performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 51 to 53. This fixed stop symbol remaining display performance is executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A. The fixed stop pattern remaining display effect is a effect in which when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after being displayed in a variable manner, a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern change is displayed while the display of the stopped and displayed decorative pattern is maintained. It is. In the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. An icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where they are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped at "789", indicating the previous special drawing lottery results. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first area DA1, and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in that case, they may be displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. , may be displayed on the back side.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed vertically on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "234". The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that are stopped and displayed do not overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. The lowest pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 51(C), when the next special symbol variation is started, decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8f, a middle decorative pattern 8s, and a right decorative pattern 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are maintained in a stopped display state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is located below the second area DA2, and is a different area that does not overlap with the second area DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Note that the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may be displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and in that case, they may be displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. , may be displayed on the back side.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "567". The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed do not overlap with the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Of the three pending icons 9A lined up, the lowest pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 51(E), when the next special symbol variation is started, decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are stopped and displayed. The display is maintained in the same state. Here, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z has the same variation mode as the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. It has become. These decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner so that the left, middle, and right patterns move from the top to the bottom, respectively.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is located below the third area DA3, and is a different area that does not overlap with the third area DA3. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3. Note that the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed partially overlapping with the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, and in that case, they may be displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. , may be displayed on the back side.

As shown in FIG. 51(F), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, they are stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The display of 8f, 8s, and 8t disappears.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "735". No decorative designs are displayed in the first area DA1, second area DA2, and third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were stopped and displayed at "735" in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a disappear, and the decorative patterns are displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be in a state where it is not. The lowermost hold icon 9A of the two lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the change icon display area where the change icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure change is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(I), decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "135", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started.

[Confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect B. The fixed stop pattern remaining display effect is a effect in which when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern change is displayed while the display of the stopped and displayed decorative pattern is maintained. It is. Confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance B is different from confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance A in that multiple decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap with each other, and a specific image is displayed that covers some of the decorative symbols. etc. are the main differences. In the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. An icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where they are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped at "789", indicating the previous special drawing lottery result. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed partially overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, or may entirely overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed vertically on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "234". Parts of the stationary displayed decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r overlap the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the overlapping portions are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. The lowest pending icon 9A among the four pending icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 52(C), when the next special symbol variation is started, decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode. The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8f, a middle decorative pattern 8s, and a right decorative pattern 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are maintained in a stopped display state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the second area DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 is displayed partially overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Here, the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3 are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Note that the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may be displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, or may entirely overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, the third area DA3 may partially overlap with the first area DA1, and in this case, the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t may partially overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. .

As shown in FIG. 52(D), the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that had been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "567". The decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed partially overlap the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the overlapping portions are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Of the three pending icons 9A lined up, the lowest pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), when the next special symbol variation starts, decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are stopped and displayed. The display is maintained in the same state. Here, the variation display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is different from the variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. . The variation mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, 8t is such that each of the left, middle, and right patterns moves from the top to the bottom, respectively. It is displayed as follows. On the other hand, the manner in which the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are varied is displayed in such a way that the left, middle, and right symbols are horizontally rotated with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the third area DA3. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 is displayed partially overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3. Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4 are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3. Note that the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t, or may entirely overlap with the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t. Further, the fourth area DA4 may partially overlap the second area DA2 and the first area DA1, and in this case, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z partially overlap the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r. It may also overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 52(F) and 52(G), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, A specific image TG appears. The specific image TG is a shutter-like image, and the specific image TG displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that are stopped and displayed in the display screen 7a and the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a are covered and disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, since the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z of the fourth area DA4, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the front side of the specific image TG, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen. Even if the entire area 7a is covered, the display is maintained. That is, the specific image TG is the back side of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the fourth area DA4, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1, the decorative patterns 8l in the second area DA2, 8c, 8r, and are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8f, 8s, and 8t in the third area DA3.

Here, since the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number, an effect in which the specific image TG appears is executed. Note that the timing at which the specific image TG appears can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the pending icon 9A that has changed in advance has become the variable icon 9C, or the specific image TG may appear when the pending icon 9A that has changed in advance has appeared. Further, the specific image TG may appear when switching from the special figure 1 variation to the special figure 2 variation, or the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) is reached.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being variably displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "678". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1, second area DA2, and third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern on the back side of the specific image TG is not displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. The lowermost hold icon 9A of the two lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area, and the next special figure change is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(I), decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. When switching from the static display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 52(H) to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 52(I), the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continues. Alternatively, the static display of decorative symbols may disappear once, and a variable display of decorative symbols may be newly displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(J), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a variable manner in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "767", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started.

[Confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect C. The fixed stop pattern remaining display effect is a effect in which when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after being displayed in a variable manner, a variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special pattern change is displayed while the display of the stopped and displayed decorative pattern is maintained. It is. Confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance C is different from confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance A in that multiple decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap with each other, and a specific image is displayed that covers some of the decorative symbols. etc. are the main differences. In the fixed stop symbol remaining display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. has been done.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation).

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "234". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Here, an example is shown in which one pending icon 9A is added due to winning.

As shown in FIG. 53(C), when the next special symbol variation is started, decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variation display mode. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a right decorative pattern 8z displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained in a stopped display state.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z may be displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Here, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is different from the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a manner of variation. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively. On the other hand, the manner in which the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are varied is displayed in a manner that the left, middle, and right symbols are horizontally rotated with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

As shown in FIGS. 53(D) and 53(E), while the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a variable manner in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, from the left side to the right side of the display screen 7a, A specific image TG appears. The specific image TG is a shutter-like image, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a are covered by the specific image TG, and the display is removed from the display screen 7a. disappear. On the other hand, since the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z of the second area DA2, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the front side of the specific image TG, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen. Even if the entire area 7a is covered, the display is maintained. That is, the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2, and on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1.

Here, since the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number, an effect in which the specific image TG appears is executed. Note that the timing at which the specific image TG appears can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the pending icon 9A that has changed in advance has become the variable icon 9C, or the specific image TG may appear when the pending icon 9A that has changed in advance has appeared. Further, the specific image TG may appear when switching from the special figure 1 variation to the special figure 2 variation, or the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) is reached.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being variably displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern on the back side of the specific image TG is not displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. The rightmost hold icon 9A of the two lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area, and the next special figure change is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. When switching from the static display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 53(F) to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in FIG. 53(G), the display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continues. Alternatively, the stationary display of decorative symbols may disappear once, and a variable display of decorative symbols may be newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(H), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being displayed in a variable manner in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "678", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. The remaining pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started. When the next special figure variation starts, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the specific image TG disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first area DA1, and in the second area DA2. Decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z correspond to the same special symbol variation.

Here, since the pending icon 9A in the pre-read changed state has become the variable icon 9C, an effect is performed in which the specific image TG disappears. Note that the timing at which the specific image TG disappears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image TG may disappear when the variation is executed a predetermined number of times after the specific image TG appears, or when the specific image TG appears at the time of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation starts. The specific image TG may also disappear. Alternatively, the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) is reached, and the specific image TG may disappear when the special figure 2 variation starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were variably displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a and the decorations that were variably displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are all stopped and displayed at "678".

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(C) to 51(E), a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that are variably displayed in response to the first special symbol variation are stopped and displayed. After the first performance, the display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that was stopped and displayed is maintained, and the second special after the first special symbol variation is performed. A second performance in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the figure variation can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(E) and 51(F), after the second performance, a set of decorative symbols 8x, which are variably displayed in response to the second special symbol variation, While maintaining the display of 8y and 8z, a third effect is executed in which the display of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t, which were displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped, disappears. can do. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(G) to (I), after the third performance, a set of decorative symbols 8x are displayed in a variable manner in response to the second special symbol variation. , 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are not displayed, and the second special pattern variation is followed by the third special pattern variation. A fourth performance in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved by an unprecedented and novel performance in which the previous stopped symbol is switched from a performance in which it remains to a performance in which it does not remain. . The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. , 8z, and the specific image TG is displayed on the front side of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that are displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped. By being covered with the specific image TG, the display of a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t, which were displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special symbol variation and then stopped, disappears. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 53.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52(D) and (E), in the second performance, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z corresponding to the second special symbol variation is displayed in a variable manner. is displayed overlapping the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 53.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(E), a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t corresponding to the first special figure variation are displayed in a variable manner, and a second special figure variation is displayed in a variable manner. The variation display of the corresponding set of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is different from each other in the variation mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 53.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the confirmed stop symbol remaining display performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 51(I) of ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance A, decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in a variable display mode in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a. However, the decorative pattern may be newly displayed in a variable display mode in an area other than the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a.
In addition, in FIGS. 52(H) and (I) of the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect B, after the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed, and then the decoration patterns corresponding to the next special pattern change are displayed. It is assumed that the variable display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is started. However, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special figure variation may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.
In addition, in FIGS. 53(F) and 53(G) of the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect C, after the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z correspond to the next special pattern variation. It is assumed that the variable display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is started. However, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the next special figure variation may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether the image is correct or not;
a first performance in which the set of decorative symbols that are variably displayed in response to the first special symbol variation are stopped and displayed;
After the first performance, while maintaining the display of the stopped display of the set of decorative symbols, the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special pattern variation that follows the first special pattern variation is displayed. A second production in which a fluctuating display of decorative patterns is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
After the second performance, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols that were fluctuated and displayed in response to the second special symbol fluctuation, the display is fluctuated in response to the first special symbol fluctuation. is capable of executing a third effect in which the display of the set of decorative patterns that has been stopped and displayed disappears after being displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
After the third performance, the set of decorative symbols that were variably displayed in response to the second special symbol variation are stopped and displayed, and the set of decorative symbols that were stopped and displayed are not displayed. state, a fourth effect can be executed in which a variable display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to a third special figure variation following the second special figure variation is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2 or aspect A1-3,
In the third performance, on the back side of the set of decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner in response to the second special figure variation, and in response to the first special figure variation, A specific image is displayed on the front side of the set of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed after being displayed, and by being covered with the specific image, the display is stopped and displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first special symbol variation. the display of the set of decorative patterns that has been displayed disappears;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
In the second performance, the variable display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol variation is displayed overlapping the set of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
The variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special figure variation and the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special figure variation have different variation modes. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display area change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 54 to 56. This fluctuating display area change performance is executed during the fluctuating display of decorative patterns. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a variable display area change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Fluctuating display area change effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change effect A. The variable display area change effect is a effect in which the display area in which the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special figure 1 changes and the special figure 2 changes. The special symbol 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41a, and the special symbol 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol on the 2 special symbol display 41b. In the variable display area change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 54(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "234". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Here, an example is shown in which one pending icon 9A is added due to winning. In addition, here, due to the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) reaches 500, and the gaming state changes to the time saving state (normal (probability state, time-saving state, and high-base state).

When the gaming state is switched to the time saving state and the next special figure 1 variation is started, a variation display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(C). The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in the vertically elongated area TA of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner such that the upper, middle, and lower symbols move from the left side to the right side. The area TA of the display screen 7a is a vertically elongated area that partially overlaps the area YA, and has approximately the same area area. A character image in "vertical mode" is displayed in accordance with the fluctuating display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. In other words, a state in which the decorative patterns are arranged vertically is notified. When switching from FIG. 54(B) to FIG. 54(C), that is, when switching from displaying decorative patterns horizontally to displaying them vertically, the background image also switches. You can.

As shown in FIG. 54(D), in a state where the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a fluctuating manner in the area TA of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. , and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 54(D), the same background image as in FIG. 54(C) is displayed, while the display of the "portrait mode" character image disappears.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "789". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the first special figure reservation, so the two reservation icons 9A that are lined up remain as they are, and the reservation icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The gaming state remains in the time saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(F), decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in area TA of display screen 7a. Here, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. When switching from FIG. 54(E) to FIG. 54(F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image may be switched at the same time.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 54(G), the same background image as in FIG. 54(F) is displayed. Here, the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the first special figure reservation, so the two reservation icons 9A that are lined up remain as they are, and the reservation icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The gaming state remains in the time saving state.

When the next special figure variation is started, a variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(H). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the same manner as in FIG. 54(A), and include a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. . The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively. When switching from FIG. 54(G) to FIG. 54(H), that is, when switching from displaying decorative patterns vertically to displaying them horizontally, the background image also switches. You can.

Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols changes to the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the area TA depending on the elapsed time from the next variation (FIG. 54(C)) reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)). The display switches to decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in area YA. Note that the timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern changes can be arbitrarily set. For example, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B in a pre-reading changed state may be switched to the fluctuation icon 9C, or may be switched when the fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, it may be switched when the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) is reached and returned when the play time ends.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "735". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 54(I), the same background image as in FIG. 54(H) is displayed. The rightmost hold icon 9A of the two lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area, and the next special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) is started. Here, the gaming state remains in the time saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, a variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(J).

[Fluctuating display area change effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change effect B. The variable display area change effect is a effect in which the display area in which the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special figure 1 changes and the special figure 2 changes. The special symbol 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41a, and the special symbol 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol on the 2 special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect B differs from the variable display area change effect A mainly in the manner in which the display area of the decorative pattern changes. In the variable display area change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 1 background image HK1 is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The first background image HK1 is an oval image and is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "234". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Here, due to the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) reaches 500, and the gaming state changes to the time saving state (normal probability state). and a time-saving state and a high base state).

When the gaming state is switched to the time saving state and the next special figure 1 variation is started, a variation display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is displayed as shown in FIG. 55(C). The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in a relatively small horizontally long area YB of the display screen 7a, A variable display of a special symbol (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by a variable display of a set of symbols, and a special symbol lottery result is notified by a static display of a set of symbols. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively. Region YB of display screen 7a is a horizontally elongated region below region YA that does not overlap region YA, and has a smaller area than region YA. A first mode image MG1 including a character image of "Small display mode" is displayed in accordance with the variable display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. In other words, a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed relatively small is notified. When switching from FIG. 55(B) to FIG. 55(C), that is, when the position and size of the decorative pattern display area change, the background image switches from the first background image HK1 to the first mode image MG1.

As shown in FIG. 55(D), in a state where the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a fluctuating manner in the area YB of the display screen 7a, here, it is assumed that the game ball enters the second starting port 21. , and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 55(D), the first mode image MG1 continues to be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being variably displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation, the reservation icon 9A remains as it is, and the reservation icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The gaming state remains in the time saving state, and the first mode image MG1 continues to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(F), decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in area YB of the display screen 7a. Here, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. A second mode image MG2 including a character image of "continuous small display mode" is displayed in accordance with the variable display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. In other words, it is notified that the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed relatively small will continue. When switching from FIG. 55(E) to FIG. 55(F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image switches from the first mode image MG1 to the second mode image MG2. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "789". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 55(G), the second mode image MG2 continues to be displayed. Here, since the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation, the two reservation icons 9A that are lined up remain as they are, and the reservation icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The gaming state remains in the time saving state.

When the next special figure variation is started, a variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 55(H). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the same manner as in FIG. 55(A), and include a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. . The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively. Here, a game ball enters the second starting port 21, and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

A second background image HK2 having a gourd shape is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The second background image HK2 is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. When switching from FIG. 55(G) to FIG. 55(H), that is, when the size of the decorative pattern changes from a small state to a large state, the background image also switches from the second mode image MG2 to the second background image HK2. .

Here, the display mode of the decorative patterns changes to the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z in area YB according to the elapsed time from the next variation (FIG. 55(C)) reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)). The display switches to decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in area YA. Note that the timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern changes can be arbitrarily set. For example, the pending icon 9A or 9B in the pre-reading changed state may be switched to the variable icon 9C, or may be switched when the variable has been executed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, it may be switched when the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) is reached and returned when the play time ends.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "735". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 55(I), the second background image HK2 continues to be displayed. Here, since the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation, the retention icon 9A remains as it is, and the retention icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The gaming state remains in the time saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, a variation display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 55(J).

[Fluctuating display area change effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area change effect C. The variable display area change effect is a effect in which the display area in which the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special figure 1 changes and the special figure 2 changes. The special symbol 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41a, and the special symbol 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol on the 2 special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect C differs from the variable display area change effect A mainly in the manner in which the display area of the decorative pattern changes. In the variable display area change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. Image WK is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed inside the frame image WK, and are a variable display of a set of patterns. represents the variable display of the special symbols (special symbol variation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stopped display of a set of symbols. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The frame image WK is a horizontally long rectangular image, and is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "234". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted. Here, due to the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) reaches 500, and the gaming state changes to the time saving state (normal probability state). and a short time state and a high base state).

When the gaming state switches to the time saving state and the next special figure 1 variation starts, a shutter that moves from the top to the bottom appears inside the frame image WK, and the shutter By closing, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become invisible.

When the shutter is completely closed, a variable display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z is displayed on the shutter, as shown in FIG. 56(D). The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of patterns including an upper decorative pattern 8x, a middle decorative pattern 8y, and a lower decorative pattern 8z displayed in a relatively small horizontally long area SA of the display screen 7a, A variable display of a special symbol (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by a variable display of a set of symbols, and a special symbol lottery result is notified by a static display of a set of symbols. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively. The area SA of the display screen 7a is a horizontally elongated area that is inside the frame image WK and overlaps with the shutter image, and has a smaller area than the frame image WK. The background image may be switched between FIG. 56(B) and FIG. 56(D), that is, when the position and size of the decorative pattern display area change.

As shown in FIG. 56(D), in a state where the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z continue to be displayed in a fluctuating manner in the area SA of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. , and a hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were being variably displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation, the reservation icon 9A remains as it is, and the reservation icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started. The gaming state remains in the time saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner in the area SA of the display screen 7a. When switching from FIG. 56(E) to FIG. 56(F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image may be switched.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variably displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "789". Along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Here, since the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation, the two reservation icons 9A that are lined up remain as they are, and the reservation icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) starts. The gaming state remains in the time saving state.

When the next special figure variation starts, the shutter moves upward inside the frame image WK and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are opened as shown in FIG. 56(H). It gradually becomes visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as "789", which is the same as the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z.

When the shutter is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 56(I), the stop display of "789" of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z disappears, and the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the same manner as in FIG. 56(A), and include a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed inside the frame image WK. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively. The background image may be switched between FIG. 56(G) and FIG. 56(I), that is, when the position and size of the decorative pattern display area change.

Here, the display mode of the decorative patterns changes to the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z in the area SA according to the elapsed time from the next variation (FIG. 56(C)) reaching the ceiling (b time saving (play time)). The display switches to decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R inside the frame image WK. Note that the timing at which the display mode of the decorative pattern changes can be arbitrarily set. For example, the pending icon 9A or 9B in the pre-reading changed state may be switched to the variable icon 9C, or may be switched when the variable has been executed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, it may be switched (the shutter is lowered) when the ceiling (b time saving (play time)) is reached, and returned (the shutter is raised) when the play time ends.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner inside the frame image WK are stopped and displayed at "735". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. In FIG. 56(J), the same background image as in FIG. 56(I) is displayed. The pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variation icon display area, and the next special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) is started. Here, the gaming state remains in the time saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, variation displays of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display area change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54(C) to 54(G), in the area TA of the display screen 7a, a set of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z corresponding to the special figure 1 variation changes. In the first performance in which the display is displayed, and in the special pattern variation following the special pattern variation executed in the first production, a set of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z corresponding to the special pattern 2 variation is displayed in a variable manner. is displayed in the area TA. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54(A) and 54(B), in the special figure variation before the special figure 1 variation executed in the first production, the special figure 1 variation corresponds to the special figure 1 variation. It is possible to execute a third effect in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in an area YA of the display screen 7a that is different from the area TA. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54(C) to (H), in the special figure variation after the special figure 2 variation executed in the second performance, the special figure 2 variation corresponds to the special figure 2 variation. A fourth effect can be executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in variable display in area YA. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. ) and the second performance (time saving state) have the same gaming state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the first effect and the third effect have different background images, and the first effect and the second effect are different. , the background image is different. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the area YA and the area TA partially overlap. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in the second modification, in the first effect and the second effect, a set of decorations is provided in a third area of the display screen 7a that is different from the first area and the second area. A fluctuating display of symbols is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the variable display area change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area change effect A, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in the area YA and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z in the area TA may be performed in one variation. That is, during one variation, the display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in area YA may be switched to the display of decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z in area TA. The variable display of the symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z may be switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R1 in the area YA. The same applies to the variable display area change effects B and C.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display area change effect A, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the area YA, and when the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in the area TA, what is the area YA and the area TA? Decorative patterns different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, 8z may be displayed in different areas of the display screen 7a. The same applies to the variable display area change effects B and C.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display area change effects A to C, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be reversed. That is, in the variation display area change effects A to C, the part described as special figure 1 variation may be executed as special figure 2 variation, and the part described as special figure 2 variation may be executed as special figure 1 variation. .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether the image is correct or not;
a first effect in which a variable display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to one of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation is displayed in a first area of the display means;
In the special figure variation following the special figure variation executed in the first production, a variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the other special figure variation of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation is performed. a second effect displayed in the first area;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the special figure variation before the special figure variation executed in the first production, a variable display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the one of the special figure variation of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation. is capable of executing a third effect displayed in a second area of the display means different from the first area,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
In the special pattern variation after the special pattern variation executed in the second performance, a variable display of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the other special pattern variation of the special pattern 1 variation and the special pattern 2 variation. is capable of executing a fourth effect displayed in the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2 or aspect A2-3,
The first performance and the third performance have different gaming states, and the first performance and the second performance have the same gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-2 to A2-4,
The first effect and the third effect have different background images, and the first effect and the second effect have different background images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-2 to A2-5,
The first region and the second region partially overlap,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-6,
In the first performance and the second performance, a variable display of the set of decorative symbols is displayed in a third area of the display means that is different from the first area and the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable display area overlapping effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 57 to 59. This fluctuating display area overlapping performance is executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the variable display area overlap effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Fluctuating display area overlap effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlapping effect A. In the fluctuating display area overlap effect, while the display of the decorative pattern is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a, a new decorative pattern in the same state as the decorative pattern in the first area is displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a. This is the performance that will be displayed. In the variable display area overlap effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol fluctuation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 57(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed at "234". In conjunction with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a manner in which "234" is stopped and displayed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when they stop, and correspond to the same special symbol fluctuation. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a synchronized state with each other. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may have the same pattern switching mode (variation mode) during variable display, or may be different from each other. Here, the manner in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r fluctuate is such that the left, middle, and right patterns move from the top to the bottom, similar to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed in a variable manner such that, for example, the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

When the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped display mode, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained in a stopped display state. Here, it is assumed that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped display almost simultaneously with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. After a while (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after being displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be newly displayed in a stopped display mode. Also, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are still being displayed in a variable manner before they stop, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been in the variable display state are newly displayed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are It may also be stopped at the same time as the stop.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first area DA1, and is a different area that does not overlap with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is not displayed overlapping the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed at least partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in that case, they may be displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. However, it may also be displayed on the back side.

In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 57(C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed at "567". Note that the fluctuation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be shifted from each other. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 57(E), when the next special figure variation starts, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and the decorations are displayed in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were previously displayed are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed at "789". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 57(G), when the next special symbol variation starts, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner. While the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are being displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed in a variable manner in the first area DA1, as shown in FIG. 57(H). That is, here, an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r. The timing at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear is after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r was displayed. Note that the timing at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear may be at the same time as when the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed at "735". Note that the stop display timings of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be shifted from each other. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the pending icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57(J), when the next special figure variation starts, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, which were stopped and displayed in the second area DA2, disappears, and the decoration patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were previously displayed are displayed in a variable manner. The state shown in FIG. 57(J) is the same as that shown in FIG. 57(A), and then becomes the state shown in FIG. 57(B).

[Fluctuating display area overlap effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlap effect B. In the fluctuating display area overlap effect, while the display of the decorative pattern is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a, a new decorative pattern in the same state as the decorative pattern in the first area is displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a. This is the performance that will be displayed. The variable display area overlapping effect B differs from the variable display area overlapping effect A mainly in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are displayed overlapping each other. In the variable display area overlap effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a pending icon 9A, and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 58(B), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variable manner. That is, an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when they stop, and correspond to the same special symbol fluctuation. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a synchronized state with each other. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may have the same pattern switching mode (variation mode) during variable display, or may be different from each other. Here, the manner in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r fluctuate is such that the left, middle, and right patterns move from the top to the bottom, similar to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed in a variable manner such that, for example, the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

The timing at which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r appear is after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Note that the timing at which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r appear may be at the same time as when the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed partially overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, or may entirely overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as shown in FIG. 234" is stopped and displayed. Note that the stop display timings of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be shifted from each other. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 58(D), when the next special figure variation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that were stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 disappears, and the decorations are displayed in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were previously displayed are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(E), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variable manner. That is, similarly to FIG. 58(B), an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as shown in FIG. 789” is stopped and displayed. Note that, similarly to FIG. 58(C), the fluctuation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be shifted. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 58(G), when the next special figure variation is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that had been stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 is changed as in FIG. 58(D). The display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 is then displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variable manner. That is, similarly to FIGS. 58(B) and 58(E), an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as shown in FIG. 735” is stopped and displayed. Note that, similar to FIGS. 58(C) and 58(F), the fluctuation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be shifted. After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed, an effect is performed in which the front side and the back side are switched. Here, the stop display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed on the front side of the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and then is switched to the back side of the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. is carried out. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner with the front side and the back side switched. This effect of switching between the front side and the back side continues over multiple changes. The timing at which this replacement effect starts can be set arbitrarily. For example, the process may be executed at the time of a change corresponding to the change icon 9C in a look-ahead state, or may be executed when the ceiling is reached.

[Fluctuating display area overlap effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlapping effect C. In the fluctuating display area overlap effect, while the display of the decorative pattern is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a, a new decorative pattern in the same state as the decorative pattern in the first area is displayed in the second area of the display screen 7a. This is the performance that will be displayed. The variable display area overlapping effect C differs from the variable display area overlapping effect A mainly in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are displayed overlapping each other. In the variable display area overlapping effect C, first, as shown in FIG. Image IMG is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability low base state).

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol represents a variable display (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and correspond to the current special pattern variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The specific image IMG is an elliptical image, and is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), the display of the specific image IMG disappears while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner. The specific image IMG may disappear by reducing its size, may be moved out of frame, or may be faded out. Also, it may be divided into multiple pieces and disappear. The timing at which the specific image IMG disappears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image IMG may appear or disappear randomly for each variation pattern, or the specific image IMG may appear or disappear when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value.

When the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were hidden by the specific image IMG are displayed. That is, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and an effect that becomes visible when the specific image IMG disappears is executed.

The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a fluctuating manner. That is, an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when they stop, and correspond to the same special symbol fluctuation. That is, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a synchronized state with each other. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may have the same pattern switching mode (variation mode) during variable display, or may be different from each other. Here, the manner in which the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r fluctuate is such that the left, middle, and right patterns move from the top to the bottom, similar to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. Note that the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may be displayed in a variable manner such that, for example, the left, middle, and right patterns rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

The timing at which the specific image IMG disappears and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r appear is after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. There is.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2 is displayed overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first area DA1 are displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r in the second area DA2. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the back sides of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed simultaneously as shown in FIG. 234" is stopped and displayed. Note that the stop display timings of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be shifted from each other. In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), when the next special figure variation starts, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped and displayed in the first area DA1, disappears, and the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were previously displayed are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed at "567". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the lined up hold icons 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A are shifted.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), while the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are being displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are newly displayed in a variable manner. The timing at which the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is newly displayed may be after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r started to fluctuate. Alternatively, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be newly displayed at the same time as the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r start varying.

As shown in FIG. 59(G), the specific image IMG is newly displayed while the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner. The timing at which the specific image IMG appears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image IMG may appear or disappear randomly for each variation pattern, or the specific image IMG may appear or disappear when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value.

The specific image IMG is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r, and on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Therefore, when the specific image IMG is displayed, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are covered with the specific image IMG and disappear from display, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in front of the specific image IMG. The specific image IMG may appear by frame-in or fade-in. It may also appear enlarged.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "735". While the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the specific image IMG disappears again, as shown in FIG. 59(I). The method by which the specific image IMG disappears may be the same as that in FIG. 59(B), or may be different. When the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were hidden by the specific image IMG are displayed. That is, decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and an effect that becomes visible when the specific image IMG disappears is executed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a stopped display state. That is, an effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), when the next special figure variation starts, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and they are moved to the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that were displayed in a static manner are displayed in a variable manner. The state shown in FIG. 59(J) is the same as that shown in FIG. 59(D), and then becomes the state shown in FIG. 59(E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display area overlapping effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(A), 57(B), 57(G), and 57(H), in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary. A first effect in which a display is displayed, and a display different from that in the first area DA1 with the display of the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R maintained in the first area DA1 after the first effect. In the second area DA2 of the screen 7a, another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c are in the same fluctuation or stop state as the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1. , and a second effect in which 8r is newly displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(A), 57(B), 57(G) to 57(I), in the second performance, a set of decorative symbols 8L displayed in the first area DA1 , 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variable display state in the second area DA2, and after the second effect, A third set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both stopped and displayed. Able to perform a performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed again in a variable manner, while a fourth effect is executed in which the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappear without being displayed in a variable manner. can do. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 59.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(A) to 57(C), in the second effect, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 stop. If displayed, the other set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in a stopped display state in the second area DA2, and after the second effect, they are displayed in the first area DA1. executing a fifth effect in which the set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the display and the other set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 start variable display; I can do it. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 53.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(C) and 57(D), after the fifth performance, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1, Another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are all stopped and displayed in a sixth effect, and after the sixth effect, they are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2. The other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in a variable manner again, while the other set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappear without being displayed in a variable manner. 7 performances can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 59.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first area DA1 are displayed in a variable manner, and others are displayed in the second area DA2. The fluctuation display of the set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r differs from each other in the manner of fluctuation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. The other set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a partially overlapping manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, in the first effect, the specific image IMG is displayed in the second area DA2, and in the second effect, the specific image IMG disappears, and the specific image Another set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in the area where IMG has disappeared. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the variable display area overlapping effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area overlapping effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same pattern switching mode (variation mode) during variable display, or may be different from each other. You can leave it there. Moreover, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r may at least partially overlap.

[Modification 2]
The variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be combined as appropriate, or some of them may be deleted. Further, the variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be executed continuously, or each effect may be repeatedly executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether the image is correct or not;
a first effect in which a variable display of the set of decorative patterns is displayed in a first area of the display means;
After the first effect, while the display of the set of decorative patterns is maintained in the first area, the display is performed in the first area in a second area of the display means that is different from the first area. a second performance in which another set of decorative symbols is newly displayed in the same fluctuating or halting state as the fluctuating or halting state of the set of decorative symbols;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the second performance, when the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area are displayed in a variable manner, the other set of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in the second area. will be newly displayed in
After the second performance, a third display in which both the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area are stopped and displayed. It is possible to perform the production of
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2,
After the third performance, the other set of decorative patterns that were stopped and displayed in the second area are again displayed in a variable manner, while the set of decorative patterns that were stopped and displayed in the first area are displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to perform a fourth effect in which the display disappears without changing the display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the second performance, when the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area are displayed in a stopped state, the other set of decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state in the second area. will be newly displayed in
After the second performance, the first set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area start varying display. 5 can be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
After the fifth effect, the set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area are both stopped and displayed. Direction and
After the sixth performance, the other set of decorative patterns that have been stopped and displayed in the second area are again displayed in a variable manner, while the set of decorative patterns that have been stopped and displayed in the first area are It is possible to execute the seventh effect where the display disappears without changing the display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
The variable display of the one set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the variable display of the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area have different modes of variation. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-6,
The variable display of the one set of decorative patterns displayed in the first area and the variable display of the other set of decorative patterns displayed in the second area are displayed partially overlapping. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-7,
In the first effect, a specific image is displayed in the second area,
In the second effect, the specific image disappears, and the other set of decorative patterns are displayed in the area where the specific image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern stop position indefinite effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 60 to 62. In FIGS. 60 to 62, various movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance can be executed when the game is shifted to the special game mode. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A will be explained, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C will be explained in order.

[Decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A]
The decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A. Decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance A is performed when the game mode is shifted to the special game mode, and here, the case where the game mode is shifted from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be explained below. .

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular area as a variable display area for three decorative patterns (also referred to as a "decorative pattern variable area"). Three areas (that is, areas obtained by equally dividing the display screen 7a into three lines) are provided. The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are decorative patterns due to the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a. A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of (design: numbers "1" to "9") is started. Specifically, the variation presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L rotate from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, The fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols starts in a display mode in which the medium decorative symbols 8C rotate from the upper side of the medium variable display area 8Cr to the lower side of the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R A variable presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and furthermore, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, The lateral distance of the middle variable display area 8Cr and the lateral distance of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same lateral distance.

In the variable display (variable display) of each decorative pattern, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is provided in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

Among the numbers "1" to "9", except for the number "7", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" have bright red color, and even numbers The symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' have a bright blue color, and the number ``7'' has a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the sizes of numbers "1" to "9" are such that the vertical distance is approximately one-third of the vertical distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). They each have a normal size with a lateral distance dimension that is about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). . The numbers ``1'' to ``9'' are special typefaces (independently created) that are different from existing typefaces (commonly distributed typefaces) such as regular typefaces, Gothic typefaces, and Mincho typefaces. It is formed by a special font).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols starts, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed change from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. The display mode changes rapidly. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner ( A sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided (variable display). The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but it is arranged so that the sub variable area KSZ is the closest side. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is It is placed behind the sub-variation area KSZ, so that the sub-variation area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is not easily visible due to the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It is designed not to be hindered.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern, and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is different from the font of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-fluctuation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when fluctuation is started, it does not become translucent and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and is the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable display (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small The variable performance (fluctuating display) with the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are Although it overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation area of the medium decoration pattern 8C, the medium decoration pattern 8C is placed behind the said fluctuation display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and is a medium decoration pattern. 8C does not block the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image will be placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if another effect image is placed in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad, the other effect images will block the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are the same as the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L allows the left decorative symbol 8L to move from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. 4 pending display position 9Ad is not obstructed. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Although the 4th hold display position 9Ad is not blocked, if other effect images are placed in front of the 2nd hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position will be blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, among the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first pending display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the second pending display Since the positions 9Ad to 4th pending display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first pending display position 9Ad to 4th pending display position 9Ad are arranged. A holding display area as the first special figure holding is arranged astride the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are four pending icons that have not been consumed and have been stocked. In addition, in the following explanation, during the fluctuating production (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols, a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and there are three or four pending icons (that is, the number of pending icons is 3 or 4). It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 even though the number of reservations is 4). Furthermore, as the number of reservations increases, the time (fluctuation time) from the start of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) to the end thereof becomes shorter. For example, in this embodiment, when the number of reservations is 3 or 4, the fluctuation time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in a no-reach loss.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-fluctuation area KSZ (lining up on the same horizontal line), there is a first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. and a second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are provided with a reservation number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the number of reservations (numbers) is displayed. The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ are , have the same lateral distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reservation number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same.

The background image of the pending number display area HS is different from the background image of the sub variable area KSZ, and is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the pending number display area HS is the closest to the front. By arranging it so that it is on the side, the left decorative pattern 8L is placed behind the reserved number display area HS, the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the reserved number display area HS, and other effect images do not appear. Even if the number display area HS is held, other performance images are arranged behind the number display area HS of the reservation, and the number display area HS of the reservation number is not obstructed by the other performance images.

The number of 1st special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) and the number of 2nd special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) are in a font (for example, Gothic) that is different from the font of the small decorative pattern. The background image of the reserved number display area HS is set to another single color that has a high contrast to the single color of the background image, and does not change to another color. The number of first special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) and the number on second special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of holding display area HS and are always opaque. Therefore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is displayed in blue numbers. The number of second special drawings reserved based on the number is always displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reserved number display area HS so as to be spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by other effect images. In addition, the blue color indicating the number of the first special drawings reserved is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' (same color). Although it is not a color, it is a similar color. The red color of the number on hold for the second special drawing is different from the bright red of the odd numbers except for the number 7, such as number 1, number 3, number 5, and number 9. Although they are not the same color, they are similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high chance of winning)).

In the game mode in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Thereafter, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side in the right variable display area 8Rr, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, and becomes a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction. Thereafter, a medium decorative pattern 8C, which is displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, and becomes a display mode that slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, in the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of background images for the normal game are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed (determined display) at the center of their respective variable display areas, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line and are stopped and displayed (determined display). Along with this, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9A placed at the first pending display position 9Ad, when the user starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, When the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, as will be described later. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A-mode exclusive background image, and a large display is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MSG "entering A mode", which will be described later, is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, decorative symbol stop position indefinite rendering A is started, which is a display mode different from the decorative symbol fluctuating rendering (fluctuating display) in the game mode in the normal gaming state of FIGS. 60(A) and (B) described above. .

The A mode exclusive background image is a background image different from the normal game background image used as a background image in the game mode in the normal gaming state, and is a background image used exclusively in the A mode. Only one background image exclusively for A mode may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In this embodiment, the conditions for the occurrence of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A include, for example, the number of times variable effects (fluctuating displays) are performed without a hit occurring in a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). , the normal state). Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, a variable presentation (variable display) is performed a predetermined number of times. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the number of normal probability states (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A is started, a medium-sized left decorative pattern and a medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium-sized decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. , a second sub-variable area CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided in which a medium-sized right decorative pattern is variablely produced (variably displayed). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is The lateral distance dimension is approximately five times larger than that of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar to that of the region KSZ.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern that are variablely produced (variably displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are variablely produced (variably displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ. Although they are larger than the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern (approximately 5 times larger), they are larger than the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It's small. Also, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern are different from the small-sized left decorative pattern, small-sized medium decorative pattern, and small-sized right decorative pattern, and the left decorative pattern 8L and medium-sized decorative pattern 8C , have a smaller shape than the right decorative pattern 8R, have similar shapes, and have the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

The background image of the second sub-variation area CSZ, unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variable area CSZ is arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but in this embodiment, the second sub-variable area CSZ During the period when the sub variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R have disappeared from the display screen 7a, so the left decorative pattern 8L The fluctuation area KSZ is not obstructed. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variable area CSZ to be the closest side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, and other The second sub-variation area CSZ is not obstructed by the effect image. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the second sub-variation area CSZ is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (fluctuating display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and at the same display position, for example, A fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is performed from the left edge of the decorative pattern toward the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, just like a coin is rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, will stop displaying at the same timing when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) starts at the same timing. Ru.

In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in which a maximum of 115 variable effects (fluctuating displays) is started, a variable effect (fluctuating display) using medium-sized decorative symbols starts in the second sub-variable area CSZ. The process is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the variable performance (fluctuating display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (fluctuating display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and when the second variable effect (fluctuating display) is being performed, the "A mode enters" having a gold color (gold color) is started. ” message image MSG is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this embodiment) and then disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the message image "A mode" appears on the telop TP1 (for example, see FIG. 60(D)). ) is repeatedly displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the display mode of a telop during the period when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A is performed.

The telop TP1, which is a message image "A mode", has the same color (gold color) as the message image MSG "entering A mode". The area where the subtitle TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is about four times the vertical distance of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the number of reservations display area HS). It has size. Although the area where the caption TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are arranged so as to be the closest to the front as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are not obstructed by the telop TP1. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by the telop TP1.

As described above, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed in a moving manner is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is a left fluctuation display area that is a fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. It overlaps with the upper area in area 8Lr, overlaps with the upper area in medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, which is the fluctuation area of medium decorative pattern 8C, and overlaps with the upper area in medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, which is the fluctuation area of right decorative pattern 8R. It overlaps with the upper area in the variable display area 8Rr. In this embodiment, the area where the telop TP1 is displayed in a moving manner is arranged behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, nor does it become particles and gradually disappear. The telop TP1 is displayed moving at a constant speed for the telop TP1.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A is performed and the predetermined number of times (10th) variable effect (fluctuating display) is started as a variable effect (fluctuating display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variable area CSZ, Immediately before this fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) ends, a counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 60(D). The counter image CNT is arranged in front of a counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of the counter image background image having a semitransparent horizontally long rectangular shape is as follows. The horizontal distance dimension of the counter image background image, which has a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape and is about three times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub fluctuation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), is It has a size approximately six times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the variable area KSZ (or the reservation number display area HS).

Although this background image for a counter image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is a fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the background image for a counter image is placed closest to the front side. , the medium decorative pattern 8C is placed behind the counter image background image, and the counter image CNT, which is placed in front of the counter image background image, is not obstructed by the medium decorative pattern 8C. Even when a performance image appears, another performance image is placed behind the background image for counter image, and the counter image CNT placed in front of the background image for counter image is not blocked by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT placed in front of the counter image background image is not obstructed by the medium decorative pattern 8C or other effect images. Note that since the counter image background image is semi-transparent, the area where the counter image CNT is not placed in the counter image background image (that is, the area that does not correspond to the counter image CNT in the counter image background image) is semi-transparent. The medium decorative pattern 8C and other performance images (the background images of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) are visible through the transparent counter image background image.

Additionally, when the counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, (slightly after the start of display of the counter image CNT), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right The decorative pattern 8R appears again and is stopped and displayed. At this time, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that reappeared are the same as before disappearing, that is, the left decorative pattern in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60(A) and (B). Although the sizes are the same as those of 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the positions where the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that have appeared again are temporarily stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60(A) and (B) are different from the temporary stop display and stop display positions.

Specifically, the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the game mode of FIG. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A shown in FIG. It is located on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1".

The position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed in the game mode of FIG. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A of (D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the right decorative pattern 8R is not the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but the right fluctuation display. It is on the upper left side of area 8Rr. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2".

In the game mode of FIG. 60(B), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the medium decorative symbol 8C is at the center of the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, whereas in FIG. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A of (D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C is not the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, which is the fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, but the medium fluctuation display. It is on the lower right side of area 8Cr. At this time, when the medium-sized medium decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is placed at the frontmost side, a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th) variation production (variation display) is performed as a variation production (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variation area CSZ, and this variation production (variation display) ) ends, a counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear again and are stopped. However, when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A is started and a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the counter image CNT is displayed, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may appear again just before the time for the right decorative pattern 8R to be stopped and displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) of fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) are completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays) are started, and a medium-sized left decorative pattern, When the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started so that the coin rotates at the same timing as the medium-sized medium decorative pattern and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, the second sub-variable area CSZ appears as shown in FIG. 60(E). disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr and medium variable display area. 8Cr, in the right variable display area 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "104 remaining". In other words, for the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern is started at the same timing. . Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is the left decorative pattern in the game mode shown in FIGS. The display mode is different from the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In the variable presentation (variable display) of each decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60(A) and (B), as described above, the number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → The reels rotate in the order of number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... In contrast to the variable display (variable display) in the display mode, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite display A, when the variable display (fluctuating display) of each decorative symbol stopped and displayed starts, each decorative symbol After emitting light, each decorative pattern is moved toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern, or each decorative pattern is moved toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern while emitting light, and then stopped and displayed. The number immediately following each decorative pattern does not appear, and a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and is stopped and displayed. This is caused by the second sub-variation area CSZ disappearing from the display screen 7a and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappearing from the display screen 7a, and as a result, as if a random number appears after the next number of each decorative pattern. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears in an opaque state and is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(D) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "2" that follows the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(D), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(E) is not on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr but on the lower left side of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(D) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(D). The number "3" that follows the number "2" in the right decorative pattern 8R appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 60 (E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(D), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(E) is not on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the right side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(D) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(D). However, the number "4" following the number "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 60 (E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(D), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed is on the lower right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started. Therefore, in FIG. 60(E), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the left side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr.

In the second sub-variable area CSZ, when a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variable display (fluctuating display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started, "It continues... A plurality of (in this case, three telops TP2) message images are displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side of the display screen 7a in a telop display mode so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. . The telop TP2 is white, and other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow colors) have a higher chance of winning than white (for example, white has the lowest chance of winning). , blue, red, and rainbow colors). The vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as that of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image, and the area where the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated is the left side. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so that it is the closest side, even if the telop TP2 straddles the right variation display area 8Rr, the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the left variation display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is the right decoration. The telop TP2 is arranged in front of the pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-retention display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-retention display area HS.

Note that the telop TP2 is different from the above-mentioned telop TP1 in that the telop TP2 is repeatedly moved and displayed in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telops TP2 may be set to have different moving speeds, or may be set to the same speed, and the timing at which the plurality of telops TP2 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a is different, Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, others cross the next fluctuation and reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, and some cross over the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations) and disappear. Some of them reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear.

Furthermore, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle, or it may become particles and gradually disappear. In some cases, image information may be missing, resulting in a display format that is difficult to read (for example, a display format in which the image is divided into small blocks and is not arranged regularly, resulting in an irregular arrangement, resulting in an unclear image). When the above-mentioned telop TP1 is displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, and it does not become particles. They are different in that they do not gradually disappear and do not display in a manner in which image information is missing.

In addition, the telop TP2 may be displayed moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1), or may be displayed at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). It may be displayed moving, or it may be displayed moving at a constant speed that is slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Furthermore, the speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when it is being displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side, and when it is being displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side. The speed may be decelerated, and the speed may be accelerated or decelerated while being displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. This point also differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Furthermore, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may decelerate and stop. . When the telop TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may turn into a blackout (pitch black screen), which will be described later, and then the winning or losing results may be displayed. This point also differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the font may change midway (for example, all characters or one character of the telop TP2 may be displayed). The font of the characters in the subtitles section changes, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to bold, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to fine font, all of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to The characters or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to italics, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 is changed significantly, or the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 is changed to a smaller size. In some cases, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may be underlined), or the content may change to other content. This point also differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is approximately twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). However, if the vertical distance dimension of sub-variable area KSZ (or reserved number display area HS) is approximately twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of sub-variable area KSZ (or reserved number display area HS), and it is moved and displayed. In addition, there are cases where the vertical distance of the telop TP2 is less than twice the vertical distance of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the telop TP2 is moved and displayed. In addition, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed with the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 being more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), It may also be red or rainbow colored. This point also differs from the telop TP1 described above.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, and the player can select and set them by operating the effect button 63. The content of the telop TP2 may be, for example, the content of a comment by the selected character selected from among a plurality of characters representing the world view of the gaming machine, or the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A. The content may include a part of the lyrics of the music being played, or the content may be the content of comments by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A. Of course, displaying or non-displaying of the telop TP2 can also be selectively set. Such selection settings may be made by the player in a setting mode while playing, or may be made in a setting mode while waiting for a customer (player waiting state). .

In decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, so it is not possible to change the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C to notify the expectation level of jackpot for the fluctuation. , it is not possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode of the pending icon 9A with the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A, the expected degree of winning can be suggested by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 is for informing that the game is in "A mode" and does not convey any other information to the player. For this reason, while the telop TP2, which can indicate the player's expectation of winning, is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, it is called "A mode". A telop TP1 that does not convey any other information to the player is placed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, in the decoration pattern stop position indefinite effect A, an A mode exclusive background image is displayed as a background image. Therefore, if a plurality of types of A-mode-specific background images are prepared, the A-mode-specific background image corresponding to the expected degree of winning may be displayed.

In this way, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has a wide variety of presentations, and is effective in suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play in response to the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, which is a variation presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols. I am now able to contribute.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + the first (that is, the 11th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + the second (that is, the 12th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "103 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(E) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and ), the number "5" that follows the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "6" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is on the lower left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(F) is not at the lower left side of the left variable display area 8Lr but at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(E) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(E). The number "6" that follows the number "5" in the right decorative pattern 8R appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 60 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed is on the right side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(F) is not on the right side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but rather on the upper left side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(E) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(E). However, the number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 60 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(E), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the left side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. , the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. The medium decorative pattern 8C jumps over the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuated toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr) The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, as a front and back relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is placed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8". The middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8".

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + the second (that is, the 12th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + the third (that is, the 13th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "102 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(F) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "7" that follows the number "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "1" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 60 (G). ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed is at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but when the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 60(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, since the left variable display area 8Lr is placed closest to you, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" It will be in a state covered by the pending number display area HS.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(F) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(F). The number "9" following the number "8" in the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 60 (G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. 60(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is not in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but slightly to the upper left, but on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr. .

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(F) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(F). However, the number "9" following the number "8" in the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 60 (G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(F), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is on the right side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. , the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 7'' medium decorative pattern 8C jumps over the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is placed at the frontmost side, a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" is displayed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started, the telop TP2, which is the message image "From now on...", is displayed parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. It is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen in the display mode of a subtitle. The telop TP2 is white.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, the 13th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 4th (that is, the 14th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "101 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(G) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 60(H), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" that is stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr but on the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(G) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(G). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 60 (H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. 60(H), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The right decorative symbol 8R of "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(G) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(G). However, the number "8" following the number "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 60 (H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(G), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is stopped and displayed is closer to the lower right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. As a result, in FIG. 60(H), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" (the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuated toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr) The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is placed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" as a front-rear relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4". The right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" partially covers the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3".

The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (i.e., 64th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (i.e., 65th) When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started, as shown in FIG. 60(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R light up, respectively, and the corresponding left fluctuating display area 8Lr, middle In the variable display area 8Cr and right variable display area 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "50 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and at the 64th time (not shown) The number "3" that follows the number "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 60 (I), but a random number "4" is displayed. It appears opaque and stops displaying. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started and the figure In 60(I), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the right decorative pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) starts. The number "4" following the number "3" of the decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60 (I), and the random number "1" appears opaque. Stop display. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the left side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but when the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 60(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not on the left side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is placed closest to you, a part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" is part of the sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and the medium decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) starts. The number "7" following the number "6" of the decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 60 (I), and the random number "5" appears opaque. Stop display. Furthermore, the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, but when the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, In FIG. 60(I), the position of the medium decoration pattern 8C of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, but on the lower left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the position of the medium decoration pattern 8C of the number "5" is closer to the lower left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. The medium decorative pattern 8C jumps over the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" (the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated toward the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr) The direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, as a front and back relationship between the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4", the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is placed in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4". The middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4".

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, the 65th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th (that is, the 66th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "49 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(I) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "5" that follows the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(I), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is at the slightly lower right side of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is After the start, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" jumps over the left variable display area 8Lr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(I) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(I). The number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 60 (J), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "7" which is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(J) is not on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr but at the lower center of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" which is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 60(I) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60(I). However, the number "6" following the number "5" in the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 60 (J), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, in FIG. 60(I), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed is near the lower left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started. Therefore, in FIG. 60(J), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is not on the lower left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" (the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated toward the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr) The direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" as the front-back relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2". The left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8".

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th (that is, 66th) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) starts, a message image saying "It's about to happen?" and a message saying "Ah, it's endless..." The image telop TP2, which is a message image saying "Ah, I wonder if it's not yet...", is moved and displayed in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2, which is the message image "Is it about to happen?", is blue, and the message image ``Ah, endless...'' and the message image ``Ah, I wonder if it's not yet...'' are in blue. is white.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) progresses, and when the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 105th (that is, the 115th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, the A mode ends, and the decorative symbol stop position is indefinite. 60 (A) and (B), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are used to display variable effects (fluctuating display). will be held.

In addition, in the decoration pattern stop position indefinite effect A, the effects shown in FIGS. 60(C) to 60(J) are for the case of "no reach loss", but when it is the "reach for loss" In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up on the same horizontal line and are temporarily stopped, and the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a completely black screen) and turns white toward the center of the display screen 7a. Shining light rays converge and then disappear, creating a display style similar to when the power to an analog TV's cathode ray tube has been turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. That is, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern continues. This state is maintained until the time comes to notify the winning or losing results. Then, when the time to notify the winning or losing result (loss) is reached, as shown in FIGS. 60(C) to 60(J), the fluctuation effects of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R ( In the fluctuating display, as described above, random numbers appear as opaque numbers following each decorative pattern and are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

On the other hand, even in the case of a win, the display screen 7a first blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and the white shining light rays converge towards the center of the display screen 7a, and then the light rays disappear. The display looks as if the power to the cathode ray tube of an analog television had been turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. That is, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern continues. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, as a number "7" and are identical to each other. After temporarily stopping in line with the horizontal line, the winning/losing result is displayed as a confirmed win, and then the winning game is started. When a win is announced as a winning result, the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern are also stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same number (number pattern, here the number "7") as the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. .

In decorative symbol stop position indefinite production A, the longer the period in which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period in which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of winning becomes. Although the screen is monotonous with a blackout (pitch black screen), it can heighten the expectations of the players.

In this manner, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped every time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. The position can change randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one decorative pattern and another one of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in an overlapping manner, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern In the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 60(F) are displayed in an overlapping manner, By placing the middle decorative pattern 8C on the front side of the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R, whereas in FIG. 60(H) When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed overlapping each other, the right decorative pattern 8R is placed in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C, so that the right decorative pattern 8R covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The display mode is to cover the screen. For example, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, in the positional relationship between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern in FIG. 8C is displayed in an overlapping manner, the middle decorative pattern 8C is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the left decorative pattern 8L. On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. The display mode is such that 8L covers a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are fixed every time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. In addition to changing randomly (irregularly), the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C Since the patterns also change randomly (irregularly), it is possible to increase the variations in the variation effects (fluctuating displays) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. . This can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A.

In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A, the left decorative pattern 8L did not jump out from the left variable display area 8Lr where the variable presentation (fluctuating display) is performed from the upper side, left side, and lower side of the display screen 7a, but it does jump out. The display mode may be like this. In this case, the part where the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes is difficult to see. Further, although the medium decorative pattern 8C did not jump out from the upper and lower sides of the display screen 7a from the medium variable display area 8Cr in which the medium decorative pattern is displayed (variably displayed), it may be displayed in such a manner that it pops out. In this case, the part where the medium decorative pattern 8C protrudes is difficult to see. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R does not jump out from the upper, right, and lower sides of the display screen 7a from the right variable display area 8Rr in which the right variable display area 8Rr is displayed in a variable manner (variably displayed), but may be displayed in such a manner that it pops out. In this case, the part where the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes is difficult to see.

[Decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B]
Next, decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B. Decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B is performed when the game mode is shifted to the special game mode, and here, the case when the game mode is shifted from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be explained below. .

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular area as a variable display area of three decorative patterns (also referred to as a "decorative pattern variable area"). Three areas (that is, areas obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal parts in a row) are provided. The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are decorative patterns due to the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a. A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of (design: numbers "1" to "9") is started. Specifically, the variation presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L rotate from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, The fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the medium decorative symbols 8C are rotated from the upper side of the medium variable display area 8Cr to the lower side of the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R is A variable presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and furthermore, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, The lateral distance of the middle variable display area 8Cr and the lateral distance of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same lateral distance.

In the variable display (variable display) of each decorative pattern, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is provided in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

Among the numbers "1" to "9", except for the number "7", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" have bright red color, and even numbers The symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' have a bright blue color, and the number ``7'' has a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the sizes of the numbers "1" to "9" are such that the vertical distance is approximately one-third of the vertical distance of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). They each have a normal size with a lateral distance dimension that is about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). . The numbers ``1'' to ``9'' are special typefaces (originally created) that are different from existing typefaces (commonly distributed typefaces) such as block fonts, Gothic fonts, and Mincho fonts. It is formed by a special font).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols starts, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed change from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. The display mode changes rapidly. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner ( A sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided (variable display). The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but it is arranged so that the sub variable area KSZ is the closest side. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is It is placed behind the sub-variation area KSZ, so that the sub-variation area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is not easily visible due to the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It is designed not to be hindered.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern, and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is different from the font of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-fluctuation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when fluctuation is started, it does not become translucent and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and is the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable display (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small The variable performance (fluctuating display) with the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are Although it overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation area of the medium decoration pattern 8C, the medium decoration pattern 8C is placed behind the said fluctuation display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and is a medium decoration pattern. 8C does not block the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image will be placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if another effect image is placed in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad, the other effect images will block the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are the same as the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L allows the left decorative symbol 8L to move from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. 4 pending display position 9Ad is not obstructed. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Although the 4th hold display position 9Ad is not blocked, if other effect images are placed in front of the 2nd hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position will be blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, among the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first pending display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the second pending display Since the positions 9Ad to 4th pending display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first pending display position 9Ad to 4th pending display position 9Ad are arranged. A holding display area as the first special figure holding is arranged astride the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are four pending icons that have not been consumed and have been stocked. In addition, in the following explanation, during the fluctuating production (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols, a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and there are three or four pending icons (that is, the number of pending icons is 3 or 4). It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 even though the number of reservations is 4). Furthermore, as the number of reservations increases, the time (fluctuation time) from the start of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) to the end thereof becomes shorter. For example, in this embodiment, when the number of reservations is 3 or 4, the fluctuation time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in a no-reach loss.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-fluctuation area KSZ (lining up on the same horizontal line), there is a first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. and a second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are provided with a reservation number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the number of reservations (numbers) is displayed. The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ are , have the same lateral distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reservation number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same.

The background image of the pending number display area HS is different from the background image of the sub variable area KSZ, and is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the pending number display area HS is the closest to the front. By arranging it so that it is on the side, the left decorative pattern 8L is placed behind the reserved number display area HS, the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the reserved number display area HS, and other effect images do not appear. Even if the number display area HS is held, other performance images are arranged behind the number display area HS of the reservation, and the number display area HS of the reservation number is not obstructed by the other performance images.

The number of 1st special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) and the number of 2nd special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) are in a font (for example, Gothic) that is different from the font of the small decorative pattern. The background image of the reserved number display area HS is set to another single color that has a high contrast to the single color of the background image, and does not change to another color. The number of first special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) and the number on second special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of holding display area HS and are always opaque. Therefore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is displayed in blue numbers. The number of second special drawings reserved based on the number is always displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reserved number display area HS so as to be spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by other effect images. In addition, the blue color indicating the number of the first special drawings reserved is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' (same color). Although it is not a color, it is a similar color. The red color of the number on hold for the second special drawing is different from the bright red of the odd numbers except for the number 7, such as number 1, number 3, number 5, and number 9. Although they are not the same color, they are similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high chance of winning)).

In the game mode in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Thereafter, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side in the right variable display area 8Rr, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, and becomes a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction. Thereafter, a medium decorative pattern 8C, which is displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, and becomes a display mode that slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, in the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of background images for the normal game are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed (determined display) at the center of their respective variable display areas, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line and are stopped and displayed (determined display). Along with this, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9A placed at the first pending display position 9Ad, when it starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, When the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the corresponding variable display position 9Cd, the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9ad, the corresponding variable icon 9C, and all pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it will be described later. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A-mode exclusive background image, and a large display is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MSG "entering A mode", which will be described later, is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, decorative symbol stop position indefinite rendering B is started, which is a display mode different from the decorative symbol fluctuating rendering (fluctuating display) in the game mode in the normal gaming state of FIGS. 61(A) and (B) described above. .

The A mode exclusive background image is a background image different from the normal game background image used as a background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image used exclusively in the A mode. Only one background image exclusively for A mode may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In this embodiment, the conditions for the occurrence of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B include, for example, the number of times the variable effect (fluctuating display) is performed without a hit occurring in the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). , the normal state). In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, a variable presentation (variable display) is performed a predetermined number of times. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the number of normal probability states (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B is started, a medium-sized left decorative pattern and a medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium-sized decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. , a second sub-variable area CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided in which a medium-sized right decorative pattern is variablely produced (variably displayed). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is The lateral distance dimension is approximately five times larger than that of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar to that of the region KSZ.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern that are variable-presented (variably displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are variable-produced (variably displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ. Although they are larger than the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern (approximately 5 times larger), they are larger than the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It's small. Also, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern are different from the small-sized left decorative pattern, small-sized medium decorative pattern, and small-sized right decorative pattern, and the left decorative pattern 8L and medium-sized decorative pattern 8C , have a smaller shape than the right decorative pattern 8R, have similar shapes, and have the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

The background image of the second sub-variation area CSZ, unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variable area CSZ is arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but in this embodiment, the second sub-variable area CSZ During the period when the sub variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R have disappeared from the display screen 7a, so the left decorative pattern 8L The fluctuation area KSZ is not obstructed. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variable area CSZ to be the closest side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, and other The second sub-variation area CSZ is not obstructed by the effect image. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the second sub-variation area CSZ is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (fluctuating display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and at the same display position, for example, A fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is performed from the left end of the decorative pattern toward the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern as if it were rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, will stop displaying at the same timing when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) starts at the same timing. Ru.

In this embodiment, when decorative symbol stop position indefinite rendering B in which a maximum of 115 fluctuating renderings (fluctuation displays) are started, fluctuating renderings (fluctuating displays) using medium-sized decorative symbols start in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ. The process is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the variable performance (fluctuating display) using medium-sized decorative patterns is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (fluctuating display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and when the second variable effect (fluctuating display) is being performed, the "A mode enters" having a gold color (gold color) is started. ” message image MSG is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this embodiment) and then disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the message image "A mode" appears on the telop TP1 (for example, see FIG. 61(D)). ) is repeatedly displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the display mode of a telop during the period when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B is performed.

The telop TP1, which is the message image "A mode", has the same color (gold color) as the message image MSG "entering A mode". The area where the subtitle TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is about four times the vertical distance of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). It has size. Although the area where the caption TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are arranged so as to be the closest to the front as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are not obstructed by the telop TP1. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by the telop TP1.

As described above, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed in a moving manner is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is a left fluctuation display area that is a fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. It overlaps with the upper area in the area 8Lr, overlaps with the upper area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and overlaps with the upper area in the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative pattern 8R. It overlaps with the upper area in the variable display area 8Rr. In this embodiment, the area where the telop TP1 is displayed in a moving manner is arranged behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, nor does it become particles and gradually disappear. The telop TP1 is displayed moving at a constant speed for the telop TP1.

When the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B is performed and the predetermined number of times (10th) variable effect (fluctuating display) is started as a variable effect (fluctuating display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variable area CSZ, Immediately before this fluctuating performance (fluctuation display) ends, a counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 61(D). The counter image CNT is arranged in front of a counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of the counter image background image having a semitransparent horizontally long rectangular shape is as follows. The horizontal distance dimension of the counter image background image, which has a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape and is about three times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub fluctuation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), is It has a size approximately six times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the variable area KSZ (or the reservation number display area HS).

Although this background image for a counter image having a translucent horizontal rectangular shape overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, which is a fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the background image for a counter image is placed closest to the front side. , the medium decorative pattern 8C is placed behind the counter image background image, and the counter image CNT placed in front of the counter image background image is not obstructed by the medium decorative pattern 8C. Even when a performance image appears, another performance image is placed behind the background image for counter image, and the counter image CNT placed in front of the background image for counter image is not blocked by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT placed in front of the counter image background image is not obstructed by the medium decorative pattern 8C or other performance images. Note that since the counter image background image is semi-transparent, the area where the counter image CNT is not placed in the counter image background image (that is, the area that does not correspond to the counter image CNT in the counter image background image) is semi-transparent. The medium decorative pattern 8C and other performance images (background images of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) are visible through the transparent background image for the counter image.

In addition, when the counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a, (slightly after the start of display of the counter image CNT), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right The decorative pattern 8R appears again and is stopped and displayed. At this time, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that reappeared are the same as before disappearing, that is, the left decorative pattern in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61(A) and (B). 61(A) and (B). Some of the left decorative symbols 8L, middle decorative symbols 8C, and right decorative symbols 8R have different orientations in the game mode shown, and the left decorative symbols 8L, middle decorative symbols 8C, and right decorative symbols 8R that appear again are temporarily stopped. The positions where the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed and stopped in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61(A) and 61(B) are different from the positions where they are temporarily stopped and displayed. There is.

Specifically, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. It is larger than the normal size of the displayed left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed is at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B of FIG. 61(D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the left decorative pattern 8L is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but on the left side. It is on the upper right side of the variable display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of the left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of FIG. In contrast, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B of FIG. 61(D) is parallel to the vertical direction of the left decorative pattern. The vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of 8L are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted slightly to the left. ing. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1".

The size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B of FIG. 61(D) is the right decoration displayed temporarily and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 61(B) Although it is slightly larger than the normal size of the pattern 8R, it is smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Moreover, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed is the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B of FIG. 61(D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the right decorative pattern 8R is not in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but on the right side. It is on the upper left side of the variable display area 8Rr, and a part of the upper side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is placed closest to you, a part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" is part of the sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped is not tilted (the vertical line passing through the midpoint of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R indicates that the reel is rotating). 61(D), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped is parallel to the right decorative pattern The vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of 8R are slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted slightly to the right. There is. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2".

The size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B of FIG. It is considerably larger than the normal size of the pattern 8C, and larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the position where the medium decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed is the center of the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61(D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the medium decorative pattern 8C is not the center of the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, but the center of the medium variable display area 8Cr. It is located below the variable display area 8Cr. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 61(B), the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped is not tilted (the vertical line passing through the midpoint of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R indicates that the reel is rotating). 61(D), the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped is parallel to the right decorative pattern 8R. The vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the medium decorative pattern 8C is not tilted. At this time, when the medium-sized medium decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is placed at the frontmost side, a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th) variation production (variation display) is performed as a variation production (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variation area CSZ, and this variation production (variation display) ) is finished, a counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear again and are stopped. However, when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B is started and a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the counter image CNT is displayed, and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may appear again just before the time when the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub variable area CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative pattern, When the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started so that the coin rotates at the same timing as the medium-sized medium decorative pattern and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, the second sub-variable area CSZ appears as shown in FIG. 61(E). disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr and medium variable display area. 8Cr, in the right variable display area 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "104 remaining". In other words, for the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern is started at the same timing. . Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is the left decorative pattern in the game mode shown in FIGS. The display mode is different from the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In the variable presentation (variable display) of each decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61(A) and 61(B), as described above, the number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → The reels rotate in the order of number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... In contrast to the variable presentation (fluctuating display) in the display mode, in decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of each decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed starts, each decorative pattern After emitting light, each decorative pattern is moved toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern, or each decorative pattern is moved toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern while emitting light, and then stopped and displayed. The number immediately following each decorative pattern does not appear, and a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and is stopped and displayed. This is caused by the second sub-variation area CSZ disappearing from the display screen 7a and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappearing from the display screen 7a, and as a result, as if a random number appears after the next number of each decorative pattern. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears in an opaque state and is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "2" that follows the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "4" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D). It has become. Further, in FIG. 61(D), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E) is not on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr but on the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L was slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, the left decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(E) The inclination of the symbols 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbols 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(D) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(D). The number "3" that follows the number "2" in the right decorative pattern 8R appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 61 (E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(D). It is larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(D), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. A part of the upper side and a part of the right side of 8R protrude from the upper side and the right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas the right decorative pattern displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(E) The inclination of 8R is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R is largely tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted to the left. It is tilted in a large direction.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(D) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(D). However, the number "4" following the number "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 61 (E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is considerably smaller than the original size, and it is also considerably smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(D), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed is below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. In FIG. 61(E), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but slightly to the left of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(D), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C corresponds to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. The line is tilted slightly counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the medium decorative pattern 8C is tilted slightly to the left.

In the second sub-variable area CSZ, when a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variable display (fluctuating display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started, "It continues... A plurality of (in this case, three telops TP2) message images are displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side of the display screen 7a in a telop display mode so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. . The telop TP2 is white, and other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow colors) have a higher chance of winning than white (for example, white has the lowest chance of winning). , blue, red, and rainbow colors). The vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as that of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image, and the area where the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated is the left side. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so that it is the closest side, even if the telop TP2 straddles the right variation display area 8Rr, the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the left variation display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is the right decoration. The telop TP2 is arranged in front of the pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-retention display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-retention display area HS.

Note that the telop TP2 is different from the above-mentioned telop TP1 in that the telop TP2 is repeatedly moved and displayed in that once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telops TP2 may be set to have different moving speeds, or may be set to the same speed, and the timing at which the plurality of telops TP2 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a is different, Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, others cross the next fluctuation and reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, and some cross over the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations) and disappear. Some of them reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear.

Furthermore, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle, or it may become particles and gradually disappear. In some cases, image information may be missing, resulting in a display format that is difficult to read (for example, a display format in which the image is divided into small blocks and is not arranged regularly, resulting in an irregular arrangement, resulting in an unclear image). When the above-mentioned telop TP1 is displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, and it does not become particles. They are different in that they do not gradually disappear and do not display in a manner in which image information is missing.

In addition, the telop TP2 may be displayed moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1), or may be displayed at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). It may be displayed moving, or it may be displayed moving at a constant speed that is slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Furthermore, the speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when it is being displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side, and when it is being displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side. The speed may be decelerated, and the speed may be accelerated or decelerated while being displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. This point also differs from the telop TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may decelerate and stop. . When the telop TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may turn into a blackout (pitch black screen), which will be described later, and then the winning or losing results may be displayed. This point also differs from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the font may change midway (for example, all characters or one character of the telop TP2 may be displayed). The font of the characters in the subtitles section changes, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to bold, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to fine font, all of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to The characters or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to italics, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 is changed significantly, or the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 is changed to a smaller size. In some cases, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may be underlined), or the content may change to other content. This point also differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Furthermore, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is approximately twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). However, if the vertical distance dimension of the caption TP2 is more than twice the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS) and is displayed moving. There are cases where the vertical distance of the telop TP2 is less than twice the vertical distance of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and it is displayed in a moving manner. In addition, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed with the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 being approximately twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), It may also be red or rainbow colored. This point also differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, and the player can select and set them by operating the effect button 63. The content of the telop TP2 may be, for example, the content of a comment by the selected character selected from among a plurality of characters representing the worldview of the gaming machine, or the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B. The content may include a part of the lyrics of the music played in , or the content may be the content of comments by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B. Of course, displaying or non-displaying of the telop TP2 can also be selectively set. Such selection settings may be made by the player in a setting mode while playing, or may be made in a setting mode while waiting for a customer (player waiting state). .

In decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B, since the fluctuation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it is not possible to change the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C to notify the expectation level of jackpot for the fluctuation. , it is not possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode of the pending icon 9A with the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B, the degree of expectation of winning can be suggested by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 is for informing that the game is in "A mode" and does not convey any other information to the player. For this reason, while the telop TP2, which can indicate the player's expectation of winning, is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, it is said that it is in "A mode". A telop TP1 that does not convey any other information to the player is placed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B, an A mode exclusive background image is displayed as a background image. Therefore, if a plurality of types of A-mode-specific background images are prepared, the A-mode-specific background image corresponding to the expected degree of winning may be displayed.

In this way, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has a wide variety of presentations, and is effective in suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play regarding the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, which is a variation presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols. I am now able to contribute.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + the first (that is, the 11th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + the second (that is, the 12th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "103 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, in the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of each decorative pattern. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and ), the number "5" that follows the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "6" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 61(F). ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E). Although it is smaller, it is still larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is below the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 61(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed is not at the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr but at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L corresponds to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. While the left decorative pattern 8L was in a parallel state, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. The line is at an angle that is largely tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted largely to the left.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(E) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(E). The number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 61 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E). It is smaller and smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed is near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. Therefore, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is not near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R was tilted significantly counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was tilted largely to the left. However, in FIG. 61(F), the right decorative pattern displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(E). However, the number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 61 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is slightly to the left of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started. Therefore, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is not slightly to the left of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, but is on the upper right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, A part of the upper side of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" protrudes from the upper side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, making it difficult to see, and the right side of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" extends over the right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. It jumps over and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuated toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr) The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, since the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is , the medium decorative pattern 8C of the large number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", and the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8". The display mode covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(E), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is in the vertical direction of the reel rotation. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the middle decoration pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the left, whereas the middle decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(F) The inclination of the symbol 8C is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative symbol 8C is slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is to the right. It is slightly tilted in the direction.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + the second (that is, the 12th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + the third (that is, the 13th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "102 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "7" that follows the number "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "1" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 61 (G). ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). Although it is smaller, it is still larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed is at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but when the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 61(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and is above the left decorative pattern 8L. A part of it protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, since the left variable display area 8Lr is placed closest to you, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" is It will be in a state covered by the pending number display area HS. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the angle was tilted significantly counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L was tilted largely to the left. However, in FIG. 61(G), the left decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is largely tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted to the right. It is tilted in a large direction.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(F) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(F). The number "9" following the number "8" in the right decorative pattern 8R appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 61 (G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G) is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). It is slightly larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. 61(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is not in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but slightly to the upper left, but on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr. , a part of the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. The line is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted slightly to the left.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(F) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). However, the number "9" following the number "8" in the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 61 (G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Further, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(G) is the same as the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. , the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. The medium decorative pattern 8C jumps over the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(F), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas the middle decorative pattern displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(G) The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative symbol 8C are largely tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted toward the right. It is in a state where it is heavily tilted.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started, the telop TP2, which is the message image "From now on...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. It is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen in the display mode of a subtitle. The telop TP2 is white.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, the 13th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 4th (that is, the 14th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "101 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "2" that follows the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(H) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G). It is smaller and smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 61(H), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" that is stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr but on the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern 8L was tilted significantly clockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L was tilted significantly to the right, whereas the left decorative pattern displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(H) The inclination of 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted more clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, that is, the left decorative symbol 8L is In FIG. 61(G), the tilted state has become more significantly tilted to the right.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(G) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(G). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 61 (H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G). It's larger, and it's considerably larger than its normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In Fig. 61(H), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, but on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the number The right decorative symbol 8R of "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the left.In contrast, the right decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(H) The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are largely tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is It is tilted significantly to the left.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(G) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(G). However, the number "8" following the number "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 61 (H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(H) is the same as the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. Although it is smaller than the original size, it is larger than the normal size, and larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is stopped and displayed is on the right side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. , the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(H) is not on the right side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" (the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuated toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr) The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, since the size of the right decorative pattern 8R is larger than the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the relationship between the medium decorative pattern 8C of number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of number "4" is , the right decorative pattern 8R of the large number "4" is placed in front of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is the number "3". The display mode covers a part of the inner decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(G), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is in the vertical direction of the reel rotation. On the other hand, the angle was tilted significantly clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was in a state tilted significantly to the right, whereas the middle decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop display and a stop display in FIG. 61(H) The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate.

The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (i.e., 64th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (i.e., 65th) When the fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) is started, as shown in FIG. 61(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R light up, respectively, and the corresponding left fluctuating display area 8Lr, middle In the variable display area 8Cr and right variable display area 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "50 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and at the 64th time (not shown) The number "3" that follows the number "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 61 (I), but a random number "4" is displayed. It appears opaque and freezes. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. Although it is, it is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started and the figure The position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in 61(I) is not at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but slightly to the lower right of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. However, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the left decorative symbol 8L is slightly tilted to the left.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light, and the right decorative pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) starts. The number "4" following the number "3" of the decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61 (I), and the random number "1" appears opaque. Stop display. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. It is considerably smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the left side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but when the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 61(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not on the left side of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is placed closest to you, a part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "1" is part of the sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R is relative to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. 61 (I), the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the right. The inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R is largely tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted toward the left. It is in a state where it is heavily tilted.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and the medium decorative pattern 8C that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) starts. The number "7" following the number "6" of the decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61 (I), and the random number "5" appears opaque. Stop display. Furthermore, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is considerably larger compared to the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, but when the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started, In FIG. 61(I), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but toward the left of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is not on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. The medium decorative pattern 8C jumps over the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" (the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated toward the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr) The direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, since the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" is , the medium decorative pattern 8C of the large number "5" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4", and the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4". The display mode covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is relative to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. 61(I), the right decorative pattern 8R was tilted significantly clockwise, whereas the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(I) The inclination is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative symbol 8C is largely tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted to the right. It is heavily tilted.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (i.e., 65th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th (i.e., 66th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "49 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, in the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of each decorative pattern. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “4” that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "5" that follows the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "2" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 61 (J). ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(J) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(J). It's getting bigger. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is at the slightly lower right side of the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (fluctuating display) is After the start, the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. The left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" jumps over the left variable display area 8Lr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L was slightly tilted to the left.In contrast, the left decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(J) The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. is tilted slightly to the left.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(I) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(I). The number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 61 (J), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(J) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(I). Although it is larger, it is smaller than the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(J) is not on the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr but at the lower center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R was tilted largely counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was tilted largely to the left. However, in FIG. The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. The state is slightly tilted to the left, and compared to the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61(I), the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R is parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. It's more than that.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(I) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 61(I). However, the number "6" following the number "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 61 (J), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Further, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(J) is the same as the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "5" temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is considerably smaller than the original size, and it is also smaller than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the position of the medium decoration pattern 8C of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed is on the left side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started. Therefore, in FIG. 61(J), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is not on the left side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, but on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" (the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated toward the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr) The direction in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, since the size of the left decorative pattern 8L is larger than the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the context of the medium decorative pattern 8C with the number "8" and the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "2" is , the left decorative pattern 8L of the large number "2" is placed in front of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8", and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is the number "8". The display mode covers a part of the inner decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, in FIG. 61(I), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the angle was tilted significantly clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was tilted significantly to the right, whereas the middle decorative symbol displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61(J) The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th (that is, 66th) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) starts, a message image saying "It's about to happen?" and a message saying "Ah, it's endless..." The image telop TP2, which is a message image saying "Ah, I wonder if it's not yet...", is moved and displayed in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2, which is the message image "Is it about to happen?", is blue, and the message image ``Ah, endless...'' and the message image ``Ah, I wonder if it's not yet...'' are in blue. is white.

After that, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) progresses, and when the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 105th (that is, the 115th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, A mode ends, and the decorative symbol stop position is indefinite. 61 (A) and (B), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are used to display variable effects (fluctuating display). will be held.

In addition, in the decoration pattern stop position indefinite effect B, although the effects shown in FIGS. 61(C) to 61(J) are for the case of ``no reach, loss'', the effects for the case of ``reach and loss'' are shown. In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up on the same horizontal line and are temporarily stopped, and the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a completely black screen) and turns white toward the center of the display screen 7a. Shining light rays converge and then disappear, creating a display style similar to when the power to an analog TV's cathode ray tube has been turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. That is, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern continues. This state is maintained until the time comes to notify the winning or losing results. Then, when the time to notify the winning or losing result (loss) is reached, as shown in FIGS. 61(C) to 61(J), the fluctuation effects of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R ( In the fluctuating display, as described above, random numbers appear as opaque numbers following each decorative pattern and are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

On the other hand, even in the case of a win, the display screen 7a first blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and the white shining light rays converge towards the center of the display screen 7a, and then the light rays disappear. The display looks as if the power to the cathode ray tube of an analog television had been turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. That is, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern continues. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R appear in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, as a number "7" and are identical to each other. After temporarily stopping in line with the horizontal line, the winning/losing result is displayed as a confirmed win, and then the winning game is started. When a win is announced as a winning result, the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern are also stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same number (number pattern, here the number "7") as the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. .

In decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B, the longer the period in which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period in which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of winning becomes. Although the screen is monotonous with a blackout (pitch black screen), it can heighten the expectations of the players.

In this manner, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped every time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. The position can change randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one decorative pattern and another one of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in an overlapping manner, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern In the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 61(F) are displayed in an overlapping manner, By placing the large medium decorative pattern 8C in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the large medium decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. The display mode is such that the right decorative pattern 8R with a large diameter covers a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C. For example, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, in the positional relationship between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern in FIG. 8C are displayed overlappingly, the large medium decorative pattern 8C is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the large medium decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 61(J) are displayed overlapping, the left decorative pattern 8L, which is larger in size, overlaps the middle decorative pattern 8C. By being placed on the front side, the left decorative pattern 8L, which is large in size, becomes a display mode that covers a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B, the stop position of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is determined every time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. In addition to changing randomly (irregularly), the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C Also, since the large decorative pattern changes randomly (irregularly) so that it is on the front side, the variation effect (variation) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is now possible to increase the variation of display). This can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are also random for each fixed stop of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is possible to change (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B, there are many variations for the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the game for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B. This can contribute to further suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is also changed every time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are fixed. It is possible to change randomly (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B, there are more variations for the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B. This can further contribute to suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

[Decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C]
Next, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C. The decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C is performed when the game mode is shifted to the special game mode, and here, the case where the game mode is shifted from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be explained below. .

First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular area as a variable display area for three decorative patterns (also referred to as a "decorative pattern variable area"). Three areas (that is, areas obtained by equally dividing the display screen 7a into three lines) are provided. The left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are decorative patterns due to the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of each variable display area to the bottom of the display screen 7a. A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) (consisting of numerical symbols (numbers "1" to "9") and various character symbols) is started. Specifically, the variation presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L rotate from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr to the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr, The fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols starts in a display mode in which the medium decorative symbols 8C rotate from the upper side of the medium variable display area 8Cr to the lower side of the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R A variable presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr to the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and furthermore, the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr, The lateral distance of the middle variable display area 8Cr and the lateral distance of the right variable display area 8Rr are the same lateral distance.

Each decorative pattern of the three-dimensional image is composed of a numerical pattern (numbers "1" to "9") with character designs in multiple colors (full colors), and the character design is the main character. displayed in large size. Therefore, the size of the number design is smaller than the size of the character design attached to the number design. Note that the character designs attached to the number designs are all different character designs.

Specifically, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is configured by adding a character pattern 8Lb to a bright blue number "6" pattern 8La (see FIG. 62(B)), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is bright. The character pattern 8Cb is attached to the red pattern 8Ca of the number "3" (see FIG. 62(B)), and the right decorative pattern 8R is a bright blue pattern 8Ra of the number "4". It is configured with a symbol 8Rb (see FIG. 62(B)).

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, the number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is provided in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

The numeric design (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a numeral "X", where X indicates a numeral) is colored. Specifically, among the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9", which are odd numbers except for the number "7", are bright red. The even numbers ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' are bright blue, and the number ``7'' is yellow (gold color). . In addition, the size of the decorative pattern consisting of the number pattern and the character pattern is such that the vertical distance dimension is approximately 3 of the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). Normally, the horizontal distance dimension is approximately 1/2 of the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area 8Lr (middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). It's the size. At this time, the size of the number designs constituting the decorative pattern having the normal size is the normal size of the number designs. The numbers ``1'' to ``9'' are special typefaces (originally created) that are different from existing typefaces (commonly distributed typefaces) such as block fonts, Gothic fonts, and Mincho fonts. It is formed by a special font).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols starts, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed change from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. The display mode changes rapidly. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner ( A sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided (variable display). The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but it is arranged so that the sub variable area KSZ is the closest side. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is It is placed behind the sub-variation area KSZ, so that the sub-variation area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images.In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ is not easily visible due to the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. It is designed not to be hindered.

The small decorative pattern is a numeric pattern, and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified to other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when variation starts, it does not become translucent and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and is the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable display (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small The variable performance (fluctuating display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even when the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are Although it overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation area of the medium decoration pattern 8C, the medium decoration pattern 8C is placed behind the said fluctuation display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and is a medium decoration pattern. 8C does not block the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image will be placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if another effect image is placed in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad, the other effect images will block the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are the same as the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L allows the left decorative symbol 8L to move from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. 4 pending display position 9Ad is not obstructed. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Although the 4th hold display position 9Ad is not blocked, if other effect images are placed in front of the 2nd hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position will be blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, among the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first pending display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the second pending display Since the positions 9Ad to 4th pending display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the first pending display position 9Ad to 4th pending display position 9Ad are arranged. A holding display area as the first special figure holding is arranged astride the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are four pending icons that have not been consumed and have been stocked. In addition, in the following explanation, during the fluctuating production (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols, a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and there are three or four pending icons (that is, the number of pending icons is 3 or 4). It is assumed that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 even though the number of reservations is 4). Furthermore, as the number of reservations increases, the time (fluctuation time) from the start of the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) to the end thereof becomes shorter. For example, in this embodiment, when the number of reservations is 3 or 4, the fluctuation time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in a no-reach loss.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-fluctuation area KSZ (lining up on the same horizontal line), there is a first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. and a second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are provided with a reservation number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the number of reservations (numbers) is displayed. The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ are , have the same lateral distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reservation number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same.

The background image of the pending number display area HS is different from the background image of the sub variable area KSZ, and is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but the pending number display area HS is the closest to the front. By arranging it so that it is on the side, the left decorative pattern 8L is placed behind the reserved number display area HS, the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the reserved number display area HS, and other effect images do not appear. Even if the number display area HS is held, other performance images are arranged behind the number display area HS of the reservation, and the number display area HS of the reservation number is not obstructed by the other performance images.

The number of 1st special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) and the number of 2nd special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) are in a font (for example, Gothic) that is different from the font of the small decorative pattern. The background image of the reserved number display area HS is set to another single color that has a high contrast to the single color of the background image, and does not change to another color. The number of first special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) and the number on second special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of holding display area HS and are always opaque. Therefore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is displayed in blue numbers. The number of second special drawings reserved based on the number is always displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reserved number display area HS so as to be spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by other effect images. In addition, the blue color indicating the number of the first special drawings reserved is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' (same color). Although it is not a color, it is a similar color. The red color of the number on hold for the second special drawing is different from the bright red of the odd numbers except for the number 7, such as number 1, number 3, number 5, and number 9. Although they are not the same color, they are similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high chance of winning)).

In the game mode in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started, and then the left fluctuating display area 8Lr is fluctuatingly displayed from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Thereafter, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side in the right variable display area 8Rr, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, and becomes a display mode in which it slowly moves in small increments in the vertical direction. Thereafter, a medium decorative pattern 8C, which is displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, and becomes a display mode that slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In addition, in the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of background images for the normal game are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed (determined display) at the center of their respective variable display areas, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line and are stopped and displayed (determined display). Along with this, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, in order to digest the pending icon 9A placed at the first pending display position 9Ad, when it starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, When the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the corresponding variable display position 9Cd, the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9ad, the corresponding variable icon 9C, and all pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it will be described later. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A-mode exclusive background image, and a large display is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MSG "entering A mode", which will be described later, is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, decorative symbol stop position indefinite rendering C is started, which is a display mode different from the decorative symbol fluctuating rendering (fluctuating display) in the game mode in the normal gaming state of FIGS. 62(A) and (B) described above. .

The A mode exclusive background image is a background image different from the normal game background image used as a background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image used exclusively in the A mode. Only one background image exclusively for A mode may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In this embodiment, the conditions for the occurrence of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C include, for example, the number of times variable effects (fluctuating displays) are performed without a hit occurring in a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). , the normal state). Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, a variable presentation (variable display) is performed a predetermined number of times. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the number of normal probability states (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C is started, a medium-sized left decorative pattern and a medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium-sized decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. , a second sub-variation area CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided, in which a medium-sized right decorative pattern is variablely produced (variably displayed). The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is approximately five times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ, and the horizontal distance dimension of the second sub-variation area CSZ is The lateral distance dimension is approximately five times larger than that of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar to that of the region KSZ.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern that are variablely produced (variably displayed) in the second sub-variable area CSZ are variablely produced (variably displayed) in the sub-variable area KSZ. Although they are larger than the small left decorative pattern, small medium decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern (approximately 5 times larger), they are larger than the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It's small. Also, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern are different from the small-sized left decorative pattern, small-sized medium decorative pattern, and small-sized right decorative pattern, and the left decorative pattern 8L and medium-sized decorative pattern 8C , have a smaller shape than the right decorative pattern 8R, have similar shapes, and have the same color. In other words, the medium-sized left decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the left decorative pattern 8L and has the same color as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the medium-sized middle decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The medium-sized right decorative pattern is a smaller outer shape of the right decorative pattern 8R and has the same color as the right decorative pattern 8R.

The background image of the second sub-variation area CSZ, unlike the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ, is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variable area CSZ is arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, but in this embodiment, the second sub-variable area CSZ During the period when the sub variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R have disappeared from the display screen 7a, so the left decorative pattern 8L The fluctuation area KSZ is not obstructed. In addition, by arranging the second sub-variable area CSZ to be the closest side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the second sub-variable area CSZ, and other The second sub-variation area CSZ is not obstructed by the effect image. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the second sub-variation area CSZ is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (fluctuating display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and at the same display position, for example, A fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is performed from the left edge of the decorative pattern toward the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, just like a coin is rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative patterns, that is, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, will stop displaying at the same timing when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) starts at the same timing. Ru.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indefinite rendering C, in which a maximum of 115 fluctuating renderings (fluctuation displays) are started, the fluctuating rendering (fluctuation display) with medium-sized decorative symbols starts in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ. The process is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). During the period in which the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-fluctuation area CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (fluctuating display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern is started, and when the second variable effect (fluctuating display) is being performed, a gold-colored "A mode entry" is started. ” message image MSG is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this embodiment) and then disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the message image "A mode" appears on the telop TP1 (for example, see FIG. 61(D)). ) is repeatedly displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a in the display mode of a telop during the period when the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C is performed.

The telop TP1, which is a message image "A mode", has the same color (gold color) as the message image MSG "entering A mode". The area where the subtitle TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and is about four times the vertical distance of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the number of reservations display area HS). It has size. Although the area where the caption TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are arranged so as to be the closest to the front as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the pending number display area HS are not obstructed by the telop TP1. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variation area KSZ and the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by the telop TP1.

As described above, the area in which the telop TP1 is displayed in a moving manner is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is a left fluctuation display area that is a fluctuation area of the left decorative pattern 8L. It overlaps with the upper area in area 8Lr, overlaps with the upper area in medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, which is the fluctuation area of medium decorative pattern 8C, and overlaps with the upper area in medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, which is the fluctuation area of right decorative pattern 8R. It overlaps with the upper area in the variable display area 8Rr. In this embodiment, the area where the telop TP1 is displayed in a moving manner is arranged behind the left variable display area 8Lr, the middle variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not obstructed by the area in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. In other words, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, nor does it become particles and gradually disappear. The telop TP1 is displayed moving at a constant speed for the telop TP1.

When the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C is performed and the predetermined number of times (10th) variable effect (fluctuating display) is started as a variable effect (fluctuating display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variable area CSZ, Immediately before this fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) ends, a counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 62(D). The counter image CNT is arranged in front of a counter image background image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of the counter image background image having a semitransparent horizontally long rectangular shape is as follows. The horizontal distance dimension of the counter image background image, which has a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape and is about three times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub fluctuation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), is It has a size approximately six times larger than the horizontal distance dimension of the variable area KSZ (or the reservation number display area HS).

Although this background image for a counter image having a translucent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is a fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the background image for a counter image is placed closest to the front side. , the medium decorative pattern 8C is placed behind the counter image background image, and the counter image CNT, which is placed in front of the counter image background image, is not obstructed by the medium decorative pattern 8C. Even when a performance image appears, another performance image is placed behind the background image for counter image, and the counter image CNT placed in front of the background image for counter image is not blocked by the other performance image. In other words, the visibility of the counter image CNT placed in front of the counter image background image is not obstructed by the medium decorative pattern 8C or other effect images. Note that since the counter image background image is semi-transparent, the area where the counter image CNT is not placed in the counter image background image (that is, the area that does not correspond to the counter image CNT in the counter image background image) is semi-transparent. The medium decorative pattern 8C and other performance images (the background images of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R) are visible through the transparent counter image background image.

Additionally, when the counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, (slightly after the start of display of the counter image CNT), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right The decorative pattern 8R appears again and is stopped and displayed. At this time, the character pattern 8Lb forming the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Cb forming the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the character pattern 8Rb forming the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed again, and the left decorative pattern 8L Only the number patterns 8La forming the middle decorative pattern 8C, the number patterns 8Ca forming the right decorative pattern 8R, and the number patterns 8Ca forming the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again. Furthermore, the size of the number pattern 8La that makes up the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca that makes up the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra that makes up the right decorative pattern 8R that appear again is the same as before disappearing. In other words, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62(A) and (B) are different from each other, and the numbers forming the left decorative pattern 8L appear again. The orientation of the symbol 8La, the numerical symbol 8Ca that constitutes the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the numerical symbol 8Ra that constitutes the right decorative symbol 8R is the same as that of the left decorative symbol 8L in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62(A) and (B). , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R have different orientations, and the number patterns 8La that make up the left decorative pattern 8L that appear again, the number patterns 8Ca that make up the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decoration. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. The position is different from the temporary stop display and the stop display position.

Specifically, the size of the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. 62(D) is the same as that of the game of FIG. The number pattern 8La of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the stop mode is larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed is at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. 62(D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L is the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. It is not in the center of 8Lr, but on the upper right side of left variable display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of left decorative pattern 8L protrudes from the upper side of left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the stopped state in the game mode of FIG. 62(D), the number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. 62(D). The inclination is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the number symbol 8La is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, forming the left decorative symbol 8L. The number pattern 8La is slightly tilted to the left. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as the number "1" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1".

The size of the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. 62(D) is the same as the temporary stop display in the game mode of FIG. 62(B). Although the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R that is stopped and displayed is slightly larger than the normal size of the number pattern, it is smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed is the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. 62(D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the number patterns 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R are the right variable display area which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. 8Rr, but on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and a part of the upper side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right variable display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is placed closest to you, a part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "2" is part of the sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed is not tilted (the vertical line passing through the midpoint of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R indicates that the reel is rotating). 62(D), the number pattern 8Ra constituting the right decorative pattern 8R that is displayed temporarily and stopped in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62(D). The inclination is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the numbers that make up the right decorative pattern 8R The symbol 8Ra is slightly tilted to the right. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "2" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2".

The size of the numerical pattern 8Ca constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. 62(D) is the temporary stop display in the game mode of FIG. 62(B). The number pattern 8Ca constituting the stopped and displayed medium decorative pattern 8C is considerably larger than the normal size of the number pattern, and is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the position where the medium decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed is the center of the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the medium decorative symbol 8C. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. 62(D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the number pattern 8La constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the medium decorative pattern 8C. It is not located at the center of 8Cr, but below the medium variation display area 8Cr. In addition, in the game mode of FIG. 62(B), the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed is not tilted (the vertical line passing through the midpoint of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R indicates that the reel is rotating). Similarly, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. The inclination is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative pattern 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the number pattern 8La that makes up the middle decorative pattern 8C is tilted. It is in a state where it is not. At this time, when the medium-sized medium decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the second sub-variation area CSZ, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is placed at the frontmost side, a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

In addition, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (10th) variation production (variation display) is performed as a variation production (variation display) using a medium-sized decorative pattern in the second sub-variation area CSZ, and this variation production (variation display) ) is finished, a counter image CNT "105 remaining" is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a, and a number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L and a numerical pattern 8La constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed. Only the number pattern 8Ra that constitutes the pattern 8Ca and the right decorative pattern 8R appeared again and was displayed in a stopped state, but the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C was started and a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) had elapsed. Then, the counter image CNT is displayed, and further, just before the time comes for the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R to be stopped and displayed, the number patterns 8La and the middle decorative pattern constituting the left decorative pattern 8L are displayed. Only the number pattern 8Ca that makes up 8C and the number pattern 8Ra that makes up the right decorative pattern 8R may appear again. When the number pattern 8La forming the left decorative pattern 8L, the number pattern 8Ca forming the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the number pattern 8Ra forming the right decorative pattern 8R appear again, the second sub-variation area CSZ is displayed on the display screen. 7a, and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a.

From now on, for convenience of explanation, the "number pattern 8La constituting the left decorative pattern 8L" will simply be referred to as "the left decorative pattern 8L," and the "number pattern 8Ca constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C" will simply be referred to as "the middle decorative pattern 8C." ``Decorative pattern 8C'', and ``number pattern 8Ca constituting right decorative pattern 8R'' may be simply written as ``right decorative pattern 8R''.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative pattern, When the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started so that the coin rotates at the same timing as the medium-sized medium decorative pattern and the medium-sized right decorative pattern, the second sub-variable area CSZ appears as shown in FIG. 62(E). disappears from the display screen 7a, the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr and medium variable display area. 8Cr, in the right variable display area 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "104 remaining". In other words, for the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the medium-sized left decorative pattern, medium-sized medium decorative pattern, and medium-sized right decorative pattern is started at the same timing. . Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is the left decorative pattern in the game mode shown in FIGS. The display mode is different from the variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In the variable presentation (variable display) of each decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B), as described above, the number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → The reels rotate in the order of number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →... In contrast to the variable display (variable display) in the display mode, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite display C, when the variable display (fluctuating display) of each decorative symbol stopped and displayed starts, each decorative symbol After emitting light, each decorative pattern is moved toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern, or each decorative pattern is moved toward the bottom of the variable display area of each decorative pattern while emitting light, and then stopped and displayed. The number immediately following each decorative pattern does not appear, and a random number appears opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and is stopped and displayed. This is caused by the second sub-variation area CSZ disappearing from the display screen 7a and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappearing from the display screen 7a, and as a result, as if a random number appears after the next number of each decorative pattern. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears in an opaque state and is stopped and displayed.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "2" that follows the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E) is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D). It has become. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(D), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E) is not on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr but on the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction of the reel rotation. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L was slightly tilted to the left, whereas the left decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(E) The inclination of the symbols 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbols 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(D) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(D). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 62 (E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(D). It is larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(D), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. , the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. A part of the upper side and a part of the right side of 8R protrude from the upper side and the right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, respectively, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R was tilted slightly clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas the right decorative pattern displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(E) The inclination of 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are largely tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted to the left. It is tilted in a large direction.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(D) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(D). However, the number "4" following the number "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 62 (E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Further, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(E) is the same as the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is considerably smaller than the original size, and it is also considerably smaller than the normal size of the numerical design. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(D), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed is below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. In FIG. 62(E), the position of the medium decoration pattern 8C of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but slightly to the left of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(D), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C corresponds to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. The line is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the medium decorative pattern 8C is tilted slightly to the left.

In the second sub-variable area CSZ, when a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variable display (fluctuating display) using medium-sized decorative symbols is started, "It continues... A plurality of (in this case, three telops TP2) message images are displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side of the display screen 7a in a telop display mode so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. . The telop TP2 is white, and other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow colors) have a higher chance of winning than white (for example, white has the lowest chance of winning). , blue, red, and rainbow colors). The vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as that of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image, and the area where the left decorative pattern 8L is fluctuated is the left side. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so that it is the closest side, even if the telop TP2 straddles the right variation display area 8Rr, the middle variation display area 8Cr, and the left variation display area 8Lr, the telop TP2 is the right decoration. The telop TP2 is arranged in front of the pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, so that the telop TP2 is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-retention display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variation area KSZ and the number-of-retention display area HS.

Note that the telop TP2 is different from the above-mentioned telop TP1 in that the telop TP2 is moved and displayed repeatedly in that it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a once it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telops TP2 may be set to have different moving speeds, or may be set to the same speed, and the timing at which the plurality of telops TP2 appear from the right side of the display screen 7a is different, Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, others cross over the next fluctuation and reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, and some cross over the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations) and disappear. Some of them reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear.

Furthermore, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle, or it may become particles and gradually disappear. In some cases, image information may be missing, resulting in a display format that is difficult to read (for example, a display format in which the image is divided into small blocks and is not arranged regularly, resulting in an irregular arrangement, resulting in an unclear image). When the above-mentioned telop TP1 is displayed moving along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, it does not suddenly disappear midway, and it does not become particles. They are different in that they do not gradually disappear and do not display in a manner in which image information is missing.

In addition, the telop TP2 may be displayed moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1), or at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). It may be displayed moving, or it may be displayed moving at a constant speed that is slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Furthermore, the speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when it is displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side, and when it is displayed moving from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side. The speed may be reduced, and the speed may be accelerated or decelerated while being displayed moving from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. This point also differs from the telop TP1 described above.

Furthermore, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly stop midway, or it may decelerate and stop. . When the telop TP2 stops, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may turn into a blackout (pitch black screen), which will be described later, and then the winning or losing results may be displayed. This point also differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is displayed moving toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the font may change midway (for example, all characters or one character of the telop TP2 may be displayed). The font of the characters in the subtitles section changes, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to bold, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to fine font, all of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to The characters or some of the characters in the telop TP2 are changed to italics, the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 is changed significantly, or the size of all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 is changed to a smaller size. In some cases, all or some of the characters in the telop TP2 may be underlined), or the content may change to other content. This point also differs from the telop TP1 described above.

In addition, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is approximately twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the pending number display area HS). However, if the vertical distance dimension of sub-variable area KSZ (or reserved number display area HS) is approximately twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of sub-variable area KSZ (or reserved number display area HS), and it is moved and displayed. In addition, there are cases where the vertical distance of the telop TP2 is less than twice the vertical distance of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), and the telop TP2 is moved and displayed. In addition, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed with the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 being more than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variation area KSZ (or the reserved number display area HS), It may also be red or rainbow colored. This point also differs from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, and the player can select and set them by operating the effect button 63. The contents of the telop TP2 include, for example, the content of a comment made by the selected character selected from among a plurality of characters representing the worldview of the gaming machine, or the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C. The content may include a part of the lyrics of the music played in , or the content may be the content of comments by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C. Of course, displaying or non-displaying of the telop TP2 can also be selectively set. Such selection settings may be made by the player in a setting mode while playing, or may be made in a setting mode while waiting for a customer (player waiting state). .

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, since the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it is not possible to change the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C to notify the expectation level of a jackpot for the fluctuation. , it is not possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode of the pending icon 9A with the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C, the expected degree of winning can be suggested by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 is for informing that the game is in "A mode" and does not convey any other information to the player. For this reason, while the telop TP2, which can indicate the player's expectation of winning, is placed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, it is called "A mode". A telop TP1 that does not convey any other information to the player is placed behind the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C, an A-mode exclusive background image is displayed as a background image. Therefore, if a plurality of types of A-mode-specific background images are prepared, the A-mode-specific background image corresponding to the expected degree of winning may be displayed.

In this way, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has a wide variety of presentations, and is effective in suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play due to the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, which is a variation presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols. I am now able to contribute.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + the first (that is, the 11th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + the second (that is, the 12th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "103 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light, and ), the number "5" that follows the number "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "6" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 62(F). ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E). Although it is smaller, the number pattern is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(E), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is below the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 62(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed is not at the bottom of the left variable display area 8Lr but at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. While the left decorative pattern 8L was in a parallel state, the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. The line is at an angle that is largely tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the left decorative pattern 8L is tilted largely to the left.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(E) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(E). The number "6" that follows the number "5" in the right decorative pattern 8R appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 62 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F) is considerably larger than that of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E). It is smaller and a little smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(E), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that is stopped and displayed is near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. Therefore, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is not near the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the angle was significantly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was in a state of being largely tilted to the left.In contrast, the right decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(F) The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(E) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(E). However, the number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 62 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(E), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is slightly to the left of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started. Therefore, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is not slightly to the left of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, but is on the upper right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, A part of the upper side of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" protrudes from the upper side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, making it difficult to see, and the right side of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" extends over the right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. It jumps over and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuated toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr) The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, since the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R, the relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" is , the medium decorative pattern 8C of the large number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8", and the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8". The display mode covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(E), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the middle decoration pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the left.In contrast, the middle decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(F) The inclination of the symbol 8C is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative symbol 8C is slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is to the right. It is slightly tilted in the direction.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + the second (that is, the 12th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + the third (that is, the 13th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "102 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F) is started, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "7" that follows the number "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears as a random number "1" instead of being stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 62 (G). ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61(F). Although it is smaller, the number pattern is larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that is stopped and displayed is at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but when the variable effect (variable display) is started, In FIG. 62(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is not in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, but on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and is located above the left decorative pattern 8L. A part of it protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, since the left variable display area 8Lr is placed closest to you, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "1" is It will be in a state covered by the pending number display area HS. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction of the reel rotation. On the other hand, the angle was tilted significantly counterclockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L was tilted significantly to the left. However, in FIG. 62(G), the left decoration displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is largely tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted to the right. It is tilted in a large direction.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(F) is started, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(F). The number "9" that follows the number "8" in the right decorative pattern 8R appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 62 (G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G) is larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(F). The number pattern is slightly larger than the normal size. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is slightly to the upper left of the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. 62(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is not in the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, but on the slightly upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, but on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr. , a part of the lower side of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. The line is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted slightly to the left.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(F) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(F). However, the number "9" following the number "8" in the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 62 (G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Further, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(G) is the same as the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. It is slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, whereas the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) has started. , the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. The medium decorative pattern 8C jumps over the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(F), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas the middle decorative pattern displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(G) The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the middle decorative symbol 8C are largely tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted toward the right. It is leaning heavily toward

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started, the telop TP2, which is the message image "From now on...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The message is displayed moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen in the display mode of a subtitle. The telop TP2 is white.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, the 13th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 4th (that is, the 14th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R emit light to display the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area. At 8Rr, a variable effect (variable display) is performed so that the reels rotate downward, and the counter image CNT is updated and displayed as "101 remaining".

At this time, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is such that a random number follows one of each decorative pattern, as described above. It appears as an opaque number and stops being displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable performance (variable display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L emits light and ), the number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed becomes opaque and appears in FIG. ” appears and stops displaying in an opaque manner. Furthermore, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(H) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G). It is smaller and smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" that is stopped and displayed is on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In FIG. 62(H), the position of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "9" that is stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr but on the lower right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the left decorative pattern 8L was tilted significantly clockwise, and the left decorative pattern 8L was tilted significantly to the right, whereas the left decorative pattern displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(H) The inclination of 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted more clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, that is, the left decorative symbol 8L is In FIG. 62(G), the tilted state has changed to a state where it is tilted more toward the right.

When the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(G) starts, the right decorative pattern 8R emits light and is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(G). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 62 (H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G). It is larger, and it is considerably larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that is stopped and displayed is on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr, whereas the variable effect (variable display) is started. In Fig. 62(H), the position of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that is stopped and displayed is not on the lower right side of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the number The right decorative symbol 8R of "4" jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr and straddles the middle variable display area 8Cr. Furthermore, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the left. In contrast, the right decorative pattern 8R was slightly tilted to the left. The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are largely tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted counterclockwise. It is tilted significantly to the left.

When the dynamic display (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is displayed in a stopped state in FIG. 62(G) starts, the medium decorative pattern 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(G). However, the number "8" following the number "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figure 62 (H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops being displayed. Furthermore, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62(H) is the same as the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. Although it is smaller than the number pattern, it is larger than the normal size of the number pattern, and larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the position of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "7" that is stopped and displayed is on the right side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, while the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) is started. , the position of the medium decoration pattern 8C of the number "3" that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62(H) is not on the right side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. Therefore, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" partially overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" (the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuated toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr) The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" (the direction in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is the medium variable display) (Displayed in a direction that changes toward the bottom of area 8Cr (progressing direction)). Here, since the size of the right decorative pattern 8R is larger than the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the relationship between the medium decorative pattern 8C of number "3" and the right decorative pattern 8R of number "4" is , the right decorative pattern 8R of the large number "4" is placed in front of the medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" is the number "3". The display mode covers a part of the inner decorative pattern 8C. Furthermore, in FIG. 62(G), the inclination of the medium decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed is such that the vertical line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative symbol 8C is in the vertical direction in which the reels rotate. On the other hand, the angle was tilted significantly clockwise, and the right decorative pattern 8R was in a state tilted significantly to the right, whereas the middle decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop display and a stop display in FIG. 62(H) The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the medium decorative pattern 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reels rotate.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (that is, the 64th time) fluctuating effect (fluctuation display) is started, the telop TP2, which is the message image "Soon...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. A plurality of telops (in this case, six telops TP2) are displayed moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen in the display mode of the telops. The telop TP2 is rainbow colored, suggesting that the expectation of winning is high.

The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (i.e., 64th) fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (i.e., 65th) When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) starts, the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a completely black screen), and white shining light rays converge toward the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 62(I). Eventually, the light beam disappears, creating a display similar to that of an analog TV's cathode ray tube being turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. That is, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern continues.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are placed in the center of the corresponding left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, and right variable display area 8Rr, respectively. The numbers ``7'' appear, are lined up on the same horizontal line, temporarily stop, and are then stopped and displayed, resulting in a confirmed display of a winning result, and the winning game is started. When a win is announced as a winning result, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small left decorative pattern, The small medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern are also stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the number "7" which is the same number (number pattern) as the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Ru.

Thereafter, when the winning game ends, the A mode has already been forcibly ended at this point, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C has also ended, and when returning to the game mode in the normal game state, in the case shown in FIG. As shown in A) and (B), a variable performance (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, in the decoration pattern stop position indefinite effect C, the effect in the case of "no reach loss" was shown from FIG. 62(C) to FIG. In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up on the same horizontal line and are temporarily stopped, and the display screen 7a blacks out (becomes a completely black screen) and turns white toward the center of the display screen 7a. Shining light rays converge and then disappear, creating a display style similar to when the power to an analog TV's cathode ray tube has been turned off. At this time, the contents of the pending number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ remain displayed. That is, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the variable performance (variable display) by the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern continues. This state is maintained until the time comes to notify the winning or losing results. Then, when the time to notify the winning/losing result (loss) is reached, as shown in FIGS. 62(C) to 62(H), the fluctuation effects of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R ( In the fluctuating display, as described above, random numbers appear as opaque numbers following each decorative pattern and are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, the longer the period in which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period in which the screen is completely black), the higher the expectation of winning becomes. Although the screen is monotonous with a blackout (pitch black screen), it can heighten the expectations of the players.

In this manner, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped every time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. The position can change randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one decorative pattern and another one of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in an overlapping manner, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern In the positional relationship between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 62(F) are displayed in an overlapping manner, By placing the large medium decorative pattern 8C in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, the large medium decorative pattern 8C covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Therefore, when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. The display mode is such that the right decorative pattern 8R with a large diameter covers a part of the medium decorative pattern 8C. Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are fixed every time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped. In addition to changing randomly (irregularly), for example, the positional relationship (front-to-back relationship) between the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R is changed randomly (such that the larger decorative pattern is on the front side). Since the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are designed to change irregularly (irregularly), it is possible to increase variations in the variation effects (fluctuating displays) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. This can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are also random for each fixed stop of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is possible to change (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C, there are many variations for the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the game for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C. This can contribute to further suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, each time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are fixed, the inclinations of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are also changed. It is possible to change randomly (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C, there are more variations for the variable presentation (fluctuating display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C. This can further contribute to suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A of FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B of FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C of FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L, It is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of variably producing (variably displaying) a medium decorative pattern 8C and a right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of patterns), and includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a medium decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The first effect (decorative pattern stop) in which the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (each pattern) change randomly (irregularly) every time the pattern is confirmed (determined stop). Figures 60 (C) to (J) for the indefinite position performance A, Figures 61 (C) to (J) for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance B, and Figures 62 (C) to (H) for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite performance C. ) can now be executed. According to this configuration, in the first performance, each time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at the stop position. can change randomly (irregularly), which can contribute to eliminating monotony in the variation presentation (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B in FIG. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C in FIG. 62 (in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B in FIG. ) to (J), and in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, Figs. The size of the design also includes an effect that changes randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were fixed and stopped last time and the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were fixed and stopped this time are determined. , and are designed to change randomly (irregularly), so by emphasizing the large decorative pattern (design) and making it stand out, the decorations that were previously large It is possible to give the player the feeling that the history of the symbols (symbols) may indicate something about the performance that is about to begin, and to contribute to the player's own idea of the rules of the performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B in FIG. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C in FIG. 62 (in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B in FIG. ) to (J), in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C, Figs. The tilt of the pattern also includes effects that change irregularly. According to this configuration, the inclinations of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were fixed and stopped last time, and the inclinations of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were fixed and stopped this time. and change randomly (irregularly), so for example, the player may feel that the history of the inclination of the left decorative pattern 8L (symbol) indicates something about the performance that is about to begin. It can be given to players and can contribute to them coming up with their own ideas about the rules of performance.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. Figures 60 (F), (H) to (J) for pattern stop position indefinite effect A, Figures 61 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position effect B, and figure 61 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position effect C. 62(F), (H)) is an effect in which one symbol is displayed overlapping another symbol when the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R (designs) are fixed and stopped. Contains. According to this configuration, for example, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fixed manner so that they overlap, so the idea of making the fixedly displayed pattern easier to see as in the past It is possible to make a final display of a decorative pattern (design) that does not exist at all and is unprecedented, and the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern (design) is repeated and it is not confirmed (as a winning or losing result). Even if this continues, it can contribute to making it difficult for the player to feel monotonous.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. Figures 60 (F), (H) to (J) for pattern stop position indefinite effect A, Figures 61 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position effect B, and figure 61 (F), (H) to (J) for decorative pattern stop position effect C. In FIGS. 62(F) and (H)), one symbol is displayed in the advancing direction of another symbol when the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R (designs) are fixed and stopped. Includes performance. Specifically, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A of FIG. 60(F), the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B of FIG. 61(F), and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C of FIG. 62(F), A medium decorative pattern 8C (one pattern) is displayed in the advancing direction of the right decorative pattern 8R (another pattern) (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuates toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr). According to this configuration, a display mode can be provided in which a part of one symbol and a part of another symbol overlap in the vertical direction. Further, an arrangement may be made in which one symbol and another symbol are not lined up on the same horizontal line.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. Figures 60 (D), (E), (G), (I) for the pattern stop position indefinite effect A, and Figures 61 (D), (E), (G), (I) for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B. In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C, FIGS. 62(D), (E), and (G)) include effects in which the display mode of the same pattern changes every time the same pattern changes. Specifically, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A shown in FIGS. ) The display mode changes to According to this configuration, even if the same symbol is frequently fixed and stopped due to repeated fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays), the position of the same symbol that is fixed and stopped changes randomly (irregularly). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony of performances caused by the same symbols that are fixed and stopped. Also, for example, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite rendering B shown in FIGS. 61(D), (E), (G), and (I), and the decorative pattern stopping position indefinite rendering shown in FIGS. 62(D), (E), and (G). In C, the position, size, and inclination of the number "1", which is the same symbol, is displayed in a display mode that changes randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, even if the same symbol is frequently fixed and stopped due to repeated fluctuating effects (fluctuating displays), the position, size, and inclination of the same symbol that is fixed and stopped will be random. Since they are arranged to change (irregularly), it can contribute to reducing the monotony of performances caused by the same symbols that are fixed and stopped.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C in FIG. The display means) can display a message image MSG, a telop TP1, and a telop TP2 (multiple types of images) in addition to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple designs), 60 (C) to (J) for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A, FIGS. 61 (C) to (J) for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B, and the figure for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C. 62(C) to (H)), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating and when they are fixed (during pattern fluctuation and when the pattern is fixed and stopped), the left decorative pattern 8L is , move and display the telop TP2 (first image) in front of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R (design), and move and display the telop TP2 (first image) in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (design). includes an effect of moving and displaying the subtitle TP1 (second image). According to this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the telop TP2 (first image) is displayed, and to emphasize the suggestion by the telop TP2 (first image) in a way that is easy for the player to understand.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. Figures 60 (D) to (J) for the pattern stop position indefinite effect A, Figures 61 (D) to (J) for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B, and Figures 62 (D) to (D) for the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C. In H)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same timing and then fixedly stopped. According to this configuration, every time the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuated (variably displayed), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are changed. Since it is possible to make a temporary stop and then a fixed stop at the same time, when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuated (variable display) and are finally displayed. , the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are images, but the weight feeling of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be imparted to the player; As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped, giving the player an impact of "boom", and the rhythmic left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right By being able to repeatedly perform variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative pattern 8R, it is possible to contribute to reducing monotony.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C in FIG. It was to be done. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C in FIG. However, even if the special game mode (A mode) is performed not during the normal gaming state but when the normal gaming state shifts to the b-time saving (play time) described above. good.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C in FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R Among them, one of the decorative patterns was spanning over the variable display area corresponding to one other decorative pattern, but this other one decorative pattern was also in a display mode spanning over the variable display area corresponding to one decorative pattern. Good too. Specifically, for example, in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A of FIG. 60(F), the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B of FIG. 61(F), and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C of FIG. 62(F), The medium decorative pattern 8C of the number "8" jumps over the right side of the medium variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr, but the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" also straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. It is also possible to jump over the left side of the image and straddle the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. In this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the variations in the variation presentation (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, the direction in which the middle decorative pattern 8C of "8" is fluctuated (variably displayed) of the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "8" (the direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuated toward the bottom of the right variable display area 8Rr) (progressing direction)) (The direction in which the right decorative pattern 8R of "8" is fluctuating (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C of number "8" (displayed in a direction that fluctuates toward the bottom (direction of travel)).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C in FIG. Instead, a random number appeared opaquely as the number following each decorative pattern and was displayed in a static state. However, because it was random, the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed this time happened to be the same as the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed last time. The decorative pattern may be the same, or the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed this time may be a decorative pattern that is one successor to the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed last time.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62, when the special game mode A mode is started, this is triggered. In other words, it started suddenly. Therefore, an effect may be performed to suggest that the start time of the A mode is approaching. For example, the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays) at which the A mode will start may be displayed as a numerical value in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the number of remaining variable effects (variable displays) reaches 100, which is the time to start the A mode, a white message image saying "100 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. When the number of remaining variable effects (variable displays) reaches 50, which is the time to start A mode, a blue message image saying "50 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. When the number of remaining variable performances (variable displays) reaches 25, which is the time to start A mode, a yellow message image "25 more" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and then the display is turned off. When the number of remaining fluctuation effects (fluctuating displays) reaches 10, which is the time to start A mode, a red message image "10 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and A mode is started. A red message image continues to be displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a until the start of the countdown for each change. Then, after displaying a red message image "0 (zero) remaining" in the upper center of the display screen 7a, immediately before a yellow (gold color) message image MSG "entering A mode" is displayed, "remaining The red message image "0 (zero)" is hidden. The color of the message image indicating the number of remaining variable effects (fluctuating displays) that will be the start time of A mode changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → red as the time approaches the start time of A mode. This can arouse players' expectations for the A mode.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B of FIG. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. The stopping positions of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly), and the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the inclination of the stop position of the right decorative pattern 8R were changing randomly (irregularly). However, each time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are determined, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and the size of the right decorative pattern 8R may be randomly (irregularly) changed. In this way, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 7]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B of FIG. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C of FIG. The stopping positions of the pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R change randomly (irregularly), and the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the inclination of the stop position of the right decorative pattern 8R were changing randomly (irregularly). However, each time the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped, the stop positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are changed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and the inclination of the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed randomly (irregularly). In this way, it is possible to contribute to eliminating monotony with respect to the variable presentation (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C in FIG. Since it is not possible to suggest the degree of jackpot, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot by changing the display mode of telop TP2 in various ways. For example, the pending icon 9A is set to have a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)) for the smiling sphere icon. Therefore, the expectation level of a jackpot may be set to be high in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)) as the colors of the telop TP2 by pre-reading effect.

[Modification 9]
In decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. 61, and decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C in FIG. Three vertically elongated rectangular areas (that is, areas in which the display screen 7a is equally divided into three columns) are provided as areas (decorative pattern variation areas), and the left decorative pattern 8L is the left variation display area 8Lr. The fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the left fluctuating display area 8Lr, and the medium decorative symbols 8C are medium fluctuating from the upper side of the medium fluctuating display area 8Cr. A fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated toward the bottom of the display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbols 8R move from the upper side of the right fluctuating display area 8Rr to the bottom of the right fluctuating display area 8Rr. A fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols was started in a display mode in which the reels were rotated toward the side. However, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has three horizontally long rectangular areas as variable display areas for the three decorative patterns (decorative pattern variable areas) (that is, an area where the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row). ) may be provided.

In this case, the left decorative symbol 8L is used as the upper decorative symbol and the reels are rotated from the right side of the upper fluctuating display area to the left side of the upper fluctuating display area. Decorative symbols fluctuate in a display mode in which the medium decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the center of the display area and then stopped and displayed, and the reels are rotated from the right side of the medium fluctuation display area to the left side of the medium fluctuation display area as the medium decorative symbol 8C. The production (fluctuating display) is started, temporarily stopped at the center of the middle fluctuation display area, and then stopped and displayed, and the right decorative symbol 8R is used as the lower decorative symbol and the reels move from the right side of the lower fluctuation display area to the left side of the lower fluctuation display area. The fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started in a rotated display mode, and after temporarily stopping at the center of the lower fluctuating display area, it is stopped and displayed. Further, for example, a part of the upper decorative pattern may jump out from the upper variable display area to the middle variable display area and be stopped and displayed across the upper variable display area and the middle variable display area, and the middle decorative symbol may , a part of it may jump out from the medium fluctuation display area to the upper fluctuation display area and be stopped and displayed straddling the medium fluctuation display area and the upper fluctuation display area, or it may jump from the medium fluctuation display area to the lower fluctuation display area. In some cases, the bottom decorative pattern jumps out to the middle variation display area and is stopped and displayed across the medium variation display area and the bottom variation display area, and a part of the bottom decorative pattern jumps out from the bottom variation display area to the medium variation display area and is displayed in a downward variation display. The display may be stopped and displayed across the area and the medium fluctuation display area. Of course, a part of the top decorative pattern may protrude from the right side, top side, or left side of the top variable display area, making it difficult to see, and a part of the medium decorative pattern may protrude from the right side, top side, or left side of the medium variable display area. A part of the lower decorative pattern may protrude from the right side, lower side, or left side of the lower variable display area and become difficult to see.

[Modification 10]
In the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A of FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B of FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and The stopping positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R can be changed randomly (irregularly) every time the right decorative pattern 8R is fixedly stopped. At this time, various effect sounds (various sound effects) and performance sounds may suddenly become muted (muted), and the first performance may proceed across a plurality of variations. In this way, the sound is muted (mute state) to create a sense of discomfort, and the player himself or herself learns the rule that the longer this state continues (the longer it is), the higher the expectation of winning. This can contribute to reducing the monotony of the variable presentation (variable display) of the heading, left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 11]
In the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance A of FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B of FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C of FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and The stopping positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R can be changed randomly (irregularly) every time the right decorative pattern 8R is fixedly stopped. However, among the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, two decorative patterns are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, and the remaining one decorative pattern is stopped on the same horizontal line. It may be a performance that is not displayed, or such a performance may be included. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the right decorative pattern 8R is not stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line. When the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the middle decorative pattern 8C is not stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the left decorative pattern 8L is not stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line. In addition, when two decorative patterns among the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, if they are on the same horizontal line, the two decorations In each variable table area where symbols are displayed in a variable manner, they may be placed on the left, center, or right side of each variable display area on the same horizontal line. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed side by side at the top of the display screen 7a on the same horizontal line, the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged at the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. The medium decoration pattern 8C is placed on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr and is displayed in a stopped state.

[Modification 12]
In the first performance in the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance B in FIG. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite performance C in FIG. In addition, the slope of each pattern could also change irregularly. However, among the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, two decorative patterns are stopped and displayed at the same inclination, and the remaining one decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a different inclination from the same inclination. It may be possible to create an effect such that it is performed, or it may be possible to include such an effect. For example, as an example where the rotation directions are completely different, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are slightly rotated counterclockwise and tilted at an angle, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are slightly tilted to the left. The right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in a state tilted slightly to the right at an angle that is slightly rotated clockwise as a different tilt from the same tilt. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are largely rotated clockwise and have a tilted angle, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have different inclinations, although the direction of rotation is the same. is stopped and displayed tilted greatly to the right, and the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed tilted slightly to the right at an angle that is slightly rotated clockwise as a tilt different from this same tilt. becomes.

[Modification 13]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C in FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R , when temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while jumping over from its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr) and straddling other variable display areas, When overlapped in the front-back direction with a part of a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped) in another variable display area, it changes randomly (irregularly) with respect to the positional relationship (front-back relationship). However, among the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, other variable display jumps over from its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). When temporarily stopped display (stopped display) while straddling the area, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped display (stopped display) straddling the own variable display area and another variable display area is It may be arranged in front of a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped) in the display area. In other words, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, other fluctuations jump from the own fluctuation display area (left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). When a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped) while straddling the display area, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped) straddles its own variable display area and another variable display area is It may also be a display mode that covers a part of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped displayed (stopped displayed) in the variable display area.

[Modification 14]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation B in FIG. 61 and the decorative pattern stop position indefinite presentation C in FIG. 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr), when a temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling another fluctuation display area, a temporary stop display (stop display) is performed in another fluctuation display area. When overlapping in the front-rear direction with a part of a decorative pattern to be displayed (displayed), the larger size of the decorative pattern is placed forward relative to the positional relationship (front-back relationship). However, among the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, other variable display jumps over from its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, middle variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped) while straddling the area, the size of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped) across its own variable display area and another variable display area, etc. It is also possible to adopt a display mode in which the smaller size of the decorative pattern is placed forward by comparing the size of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped displayed (stopped display) in the variable display area. In other words, among the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, other fluctuations jump from the own fluctuation display area (left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). When displayed in temporary suspension (stop display) while straddling the display area, the decorative pattern that is temporarily suspended (stop display) across its own variable display area and another variable display area, and other When the decorative pattern that is displayed temporarily (stopped) in the variable display area overlaps, the smaller size of the decorative pattern is placed in front of the larger size of the decorative pattern, and the larger size of the decorative pattern is placed in front of the larger one. A display mode may be used in which a part of the decorative pattern on the other side is covered.

[Modification 15]
In the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative pattern stop position indeterminate effect C in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols,
It is possible to execute a first production in which the stop position of each symbol changes irregularly every time the symbol is fixed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The first production includes a production in which the size of each symbol changes irregularly every time the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or aspect A4-2,
The first performance includes a performance in which the inclination of each symbol changes irregularly every time the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
The first production includes a production in which one symbol is displayed overlapping another symbol when the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The first performance includes a performance that displays one symbol in the advancing direction of another symbol when the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
The first production includes a production in which the display mode of the same symbol changes depending on the variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-6,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in addition to the plurality of patterns,
The first effect includes an effect of moving and displaying a first image in front of the symbol and moving and displaying a second image behind the symbol when the symbol is changing and when the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-7,
The first performance temporarily stops the plurality of symbols at the same timing and then permanently stops them.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 63 to 65. This decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance is executed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern sudden stop effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). Further, the corresponding drive data is read from the ROM 103 and the first movable accessory 14 is driven.

[Decorative pattern sudden stop effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect A. The decorative pattern suddenly confirmed stop performance is a performance in which a set of decorative symbols are not displayed in a reach mode but are stopped and displayed in a winning mode (determined stop). In the decorative pattern sudden confirmed stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped (determined stopped) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed approximately at the center of the display screen 7a, and the variation of the set of patterns The variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation) is represented by the display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stopped display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "234". Here, it is assumed that when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the special pattern 1 pending consumption is started and the special pattern 1 variation is executed from now on. Further, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of this special drawing 1 is a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

As shown in FIG. 63(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current special pattern variation (the variation). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner such that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the top to the bottom, respectively. Here, since each symbol is moving at high speed, the symbol cannot be visually recognized. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may vary in any manner. For example, the left, middle, and right symbols may be displayed in a variable manner so as to rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation.

As shown in FIGS. 63(C) and 63(D), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R started, the decoration An effect is executed in which a set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r different from the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r have the same shape and size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8l, middle decorative pattern 8c, and right decorative pattern 8r are decorated from different directions. Move toward symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are the same pattern, and are "7" here. The shape and size of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but they may be different.

The left decorative pattern 8l enters the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlaps the left decorative pattern 8L that is being variably displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8c enters the frame upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, overlaps the medium decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed on the front side of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The right decorative pattern 8r enters the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps with the right decorative pattern 8R that is being variably displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63(E), almost at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8l, middle decorative pattern 8c, and right decorative pattern 8r stop being lined up horizontally, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were being displayed in a variable manner The display disappears. As a result, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed (determined and stopped) at "777", and then a jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance A, after the start of special pattern variation, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then a set of decorative symbols 8L is displayed without being displayed in a reach mode. , 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner, which can surprise the player and increase interest.

FIGS. 63(F) to 63(J) are other examples of the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect A described in FIGS. 63(A) to 63(E). In FIGS. 63(F) to 63(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, are in the frame while the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. The effect to enter is executed.

FIG. 63(F) is the same state as FIG. 63(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, which are stopped (determined and stopped) at "234".

In Figure 63 (G), although the special pattern fluctuation has started due to the special pattern 1 pending, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the current special pattern fluctuation (the fluctuation concerned). The stop display is maintained without stopping. That is, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped and displayed in response to the previous special figure variation, remains maintained during the variation.

As shown in FIGS. 63(H) and (I), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the current special figure variation (the variation) was started, with the stop display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R being displayed, An effect is executed in which a set of decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come into the frame. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r have the same shape and size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8l, middle decorative pattern 8c, and right decorative pattern 8r are decorated from different directions. Move toward symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are the same pattern, and are "7" here. The shape and size of the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r are the same as those of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but they may be different.

The left decorative pattern 8l enters the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlaps the left decorative pattern 8L that is being variably displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8c enters the frame upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, overlaps the medium decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed on the front side of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The right decorative pattern 8r enters the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps with the right decorative pattern 8R that is being variably displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63(J), almost at the same time that the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are lined up horizontally and stopped, the decorative pattern 8L, which was stopped and displayed at "234", The display of 8C and 8R disappears. As a result, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed (determined and stopped) at "777", and then a jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect A, after the start of the special pattern variation, the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed after the previous special pattern variation is maintained, and then in the reach mode. Since the set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode without being displayed, it is possible to surprise the player and improve interest.

[Decorative pattern sudden stop effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect B. The decorative pattern suddenly confirmed stop performance is a performance in which a set of decorative symbols are not displayed in a reach mode but are stopped and displayed in a winning mode (determined stop). The main point of decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance B, when compared with decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance A, is that a plurality of sets of decorative patterns are not displayed, and only the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. different. In the decorative pattern sudden confirmed stop performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped (determined stopped) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed approximately at the center of the display screen 7a, and the variation of the set of patterns The variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation) is represented by the display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stopped display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "234". Here, it is assumed that when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the special pattern 1 pending consumption is started and the special pattern 1 variation is executed from now on. Further, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of this special drawing 1 is a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

When the special pattern fluctuation starts due to the expiration of the special pattern 1 hold, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect B, as shown in FIG. (The display disappears instead of being displayed in a variable manner in response to the change in question.)

As shown in FIG. 64(C), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the current special pattern variation (the variation), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear and the words "Jackpot" appear. An image is displayed and it is suddenly announced that the special drawing lottery result is a jackpot.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(D), an effect is performed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are placed in the frame. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move toward the center of the display screen 7a from different directions with respect to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are "7" here.

The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the substantially left center of the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C enters the frame upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops at approximately the center right of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 64(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally and stopped. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are brought to a stop display (determined stop) at "777", and thereafter, a jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance B, after the start of special pattern variation, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode without displaying the variation display and reach mode. , it is possible to surprise the players and improve their interest.

FIGS. 64(F) to 64(J) are other examples of the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance B described in FIGS. 64(A) to 64(E). In FIGS. 64(F) to 64(J), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed fade out from the display screen 7a while moving separately, an effect is performed in which a jackpot is announced. Ru.

FIG. 64(F) is the same state as FIG. 64(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, which are stopped (determined and stopped) at "234".

In FIG. 64(G), although the special pattern fluctuation has started due to the expiration of the special pattern 1 reservation, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not correspond to the current special pattern fluctuation (the fluctuation). The stop display is maintained without stopping. Thereafter, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move in different directions and fade out from the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L frames out toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative pattern 8C frames out toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R frames out toward the bottom right of the display screen 7a. Frame out in the direction.

FIG. 64(H) is the same state as FIG. 64(C). That is, a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the current special pattern variation (the variation), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have faded out and disappeared, and a character image expressing "Jackpot" is displayed, It is suddenly announced that the special drawing lottery result is a jackpot.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(I), an effect is performed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are placed in the frame. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R aligned. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are "7" here.

As shown in FIG. 64(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally and stop near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are brought to a stop display (determined stop) at "777", and thereafter, a jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance B, after the start of special pattern variation, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode without displaying the variation display and reach mode. , it is possible to surprise the players and improve their interest.

[Decorative pattern suddenly confirmed stop effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect C. The decorative pattern suddenly confirmed stop performance is a performance in which a set of decorative symbols are not displayed in a reach mode but are stopped and displayed in a winning mode (determined stop). Decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance C is different from decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance A in that a plurality of sets of decorative patterns are not displayed and only the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. The main difference is that the movement of the 1 movable accessory 14 is included. In the decorative pattern sudden confirmed stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped (determined stopped) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed. The first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, which are displayed approximately at the center of the display screen 7a, and the variation of the set of patterns The variable display of special symbols (special symbol variation) is represented by the display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stopped display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "234". Here, it is assumed that when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold is started, and the special figure 1 variation is executed from now on. Further, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of this special drawing 1 is a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has been selected.

When the special pattern variation starts due to the expiration of the special pattern 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. The stop display is maintained. In this state, the first movable accessory 14 moves rightward in front (front surface) of the display screen 7a from the left end to the right end of the display screen 7a. In accordance with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, an effect is performed in which the display contents of the display screen 7a are switched. Specifically, the first screen on which the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed is switched to the second screen on which the text image of "Jackpot" is displayed. Here, the first screen does not move, and the second screen moves to the front of the first screen and covers the first screen, thereby creating an effect in which the display contents are switched.

When the first movable accessory 14 moves to the rightmost advanced position, it stops at the advanced position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the display screen 7a becomes only the second screen on which the character image "Jackpot" is displayed. As a result, it is suddenly announced that the special drawing lottery result is a jackpot.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the first movable accessory 14 moves to the left in front of the display screen 7a from the right end to the left end of the display screen 7a. In accordance with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, an effect is performed in which the display contents of the display screen 7a are switched. Specifically, the second screen on which the character image "Jackpot" is displayed is switched to the first screen on which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "777". Here, the second screen does not move, and the first screen moves in front of the second screen and covers the second screen, thereby creating an effect in which the display contents are switched.

When the first movable accessory 14 moves to the leftmost retracted position, it stops at the retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65(E), the display screen 7a is in a state where only the first screen displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at "777". After that, a jackpot performance is performed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance C, after the start of special pattern variation, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode without displaying the variation and reach mode. , it is possible to surprise the players and improve their interest.

FIGS. 65(F) to 65(J) are other examples of the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect C described in FIGS. 65(A) to 65(E). In FIGS. 65(F) to 65(J), the first screen on which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state switches to the second screen on which the character image "Jackpot" is displayed. This is different from FIGS. 65(A) to 65(E).

FIG. 65(F) is the same state as FIG. 65(A). That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a, which are stopped (determined and stopped) at "234". Furthermore, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retreated position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 65(G), similarly to FIG. 65(B), as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the right, from the first screen on which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed, The screen switches to a second screen on which a character image of "Jackpot" is displayed. Here, by moving both the first screen and the second screen to the right, an effect is performed in which the display contents slide and switch.

FIG. 65(H) is the same state as FIG. 65(C). That is, when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the rightmost advanced position, it stops at the advanced position. Further, the display screen 7a becomes only the second screen on which the character image "Jackpot" is displayed. As a result, it is suddenly announced that the special drawing lottery result is a jackpot.

In FIG. 65(I), as in FIG. 65(D), as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the left, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C , 8R is switched to the first screen where "777" is stopped and displayed. Here, by moving both the first screen and the second screen to the left, an effect is performed in which the display contents slide and switch.

FIG. 65(J) is the same state as FIG. 65(E). That is, when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the leftmost retracted position, it stops at the retracted position. Further, the display screen 7a becomes a state where only the first screen displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at "777". After that, a jackpot performance is performed. In this way, in the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance C, after the start of special pattern variation, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode without displaying the variation and reach mode. , it is possible to surprise the players and improve their interest.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern suddenly fixed stop effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, after the start of the special pattern variation, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are hit without a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being displayed in a reach mode. It is possible to perform an effect that is stopped and displayed in this manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 64 and 65.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63(A) to 63(E), in this production, after the start of special symbol variation, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and a set of A stop display of the winning mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63(F) to (J), in this production, a set of decorative symbols 8L that are stopped and displayed after the start of the special symbol variation and after the previous special symbol variation; After the display of 8C and 8R is maintained, the stop display of the winning mode is displayed without displaying the variation display of a set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r corresponding to the current special symbol variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 65.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, in this performance, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed in a frame. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 64 and 65.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, in this production, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, but instead the character image of "Win" is displayed. A win is notified by , and after the notification, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to the modification shown in FIG. 63.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, in this effect, after the display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, a character image of "WIN" is displayed. is notified, and after the notification, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are stopped and displayed in a winning manner, are displayed in a frame. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to the modification shown in FIG. 65.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern suddenly fixed stop effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern sudden stop effect A, after FIG. 63(B), the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, and in FIG. 63(C), the display screen 7a shows the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In a state where the variable display is not displayed, the frame may be entered in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are "7". Then, in FIG. 63(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be fixed and stopped at "777" to notify the jackpot.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 63(B) of the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect A, when the fluctuating display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, even if the character image "Jackpot" appears and a jackpot is announced. good.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performance A, the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r are assumed to enter the frame at "7". However, the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r may be numbers other than "7" or may be images other than numeric images. Further, the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r may be framed with different numbers and may be stopped and displayed at a losing pattern.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop performances B and C, the winning notification may be an image other than the character image of "Jackpot". Furthermore, notification of a jackpot is not limited to displaying an image, but may also be the actuation of an accessory or the generation of a sound.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern sudden fixed stop effect C, after the stop pattern of "234" of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears, even if the first movable accessory 14 moves rightward from the retreat position toward the advance position. good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether the image is correct or not;
After the start of the special pattern variation, it is possible to perform an effect in which the set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a winning mode without being displayed in a reach mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the production, after the start of the special pattern variation, a variation display of the set of decorative symbols and a stop display of the winning mode are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
In the production, after the start of the special pattern variation, the display of the set of decorative patterns that were stopped and displayed after the previous special pattern variation is maintained, and then the variation of the set of decorative patterns corresponding to the current special pattern variation is maintained. The stop display of the winning mode is displayed without displaying the display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the production, the set of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed in a frame.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
In the production, a win is announced without the set of decorative symbols being displayed in a reach mode, and after the notification, the set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a win mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5,
In the performance, after the display of the set of decorative patterns disappears, the win is announced, and after the notification, the set of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in a win mode are displayed in a frame.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The accessory-linked performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 66 to 68. This accessory-linked performance is executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols in a normal game state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the role-linked effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Accessory linked production A]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked performance A. The accessory-linked performance A in FIG. 66 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the role-linked effect A, as shown in FIG. 66(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), an accessory development effect is performed. In this accessory deployment performance, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. In addition, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-reach state in which the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C changes at high speed. Furthermore, in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed on the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), accessory movement effect A is performed. In this accessory moving effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged with the decorative pattern 8L on top, the decorative pattern 8C in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R on the bottom, each having seven patterns and forming a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves to the left in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), accessory movement effect B is performed. In this accessory movement performance B, the first movable accessory 14 further moves in the retreat direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left in conjunction with the first movable accessory 14. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retreat direction (to the left). In this case, as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (leftward), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), an accessory movement effect C is performed. In this accessory movement performance C, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retreat position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are located approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is located on the left side of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that in this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), a jackpot symbol notification effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol notification performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and are reported as 7 jackpot symbols. At this time, the ally character CRA has been erased.

In addition, in the above-mentioned accessory movement effects B and C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14, but this However, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be made to move (move) at a slower speed than the first movable accessory 14, or may move at a faster speed than the first movable accessory 14. It may also be possible to link (move) with.

[Accessory linked production B]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked performance B. The role-linked performance B in FIG. 67 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the role-linked performance B, as shown in FIG. 67(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), accessory development performance A is performed. In this accessory deployment performance A, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-reach state in which the decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at six symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Furthermore, in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed on the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), accessory movement effect A is performed. In this accessory moving effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged with the decorative pattern 8L on top, the decorative pattern 8C in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R on the bottom, each having 6 patterns and forming a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves to the left in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), accessory movement effect B is performed. In this accessory movement performance B, the first movable accessory 14 further moves in the retreat direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left in conjunction with the first movable accessory 14. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retreat direction (to the left). In this case, as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (leftward), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), an accessory movement effect C is performed. In this accessory movement performance C, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retreat position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are located approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is located on the left side of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that in this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), a timer button effect is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 is displayed that prompts the player to press the effect button 63. This button image XA1 includes the text "PUSH" that prompts the player to press the production button 63, and the text "3 seconds left" indicating a timer countdown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), accessory development performance B is performed. In this accessory deployment performance B, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a again from the retracted position to the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). Moving. In this case, on the display screen 7a, in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK, and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol promotion performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the 6 symbols are changed to 7 symbols, which are notified as jackpot symbols. In other words, the 7 symbols are more advantageous to the player than the 6 symbols. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have become the seven promoted symbols, are displayed without interlocking with the first movable accessory 14.

In addition, in the above-mentioned accessory movement effects B and C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14, but this However, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be made to move (move) at a slower speed than the first movable accessory 14, or may move at a faster speed than the first movable accessory 14. It may also be possible to link (move) with.

[Accessory linked production C]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the accessory-linked performance C. The accessory-linked performance C in FIG. 68 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the accessory-linked performance C, as shown in FIG. 68(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure. Furthermore, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), accessory development performance A is performed. In this accessory deployment performance A, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. In addition, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-reach state in which the decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at six symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Furthermore, in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed on the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), accessory movement effect A is performed. In this accessory moving effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged with the decorative pattern 8L on top, the decorative pattern 8C in the center, and the decorative pattern 8R on the bottom, each having 6 patterns and forming a jackpot pattern. Note that the ally character CRA also moves to the left in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), accessory movement effect B is performed. In this accessory movement performance B, the first movable accessory 14 further moves in the retreat direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left in conjunction with the first movable accessory 14. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retreat direction (to the left). In this case, as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (leftward), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), an accessory movement effect C is performed. In this accessory movement performance C, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retreat position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are located approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is located on the left side of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Note that in this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a jackpot symbol enlargement effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol enlargement performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the ally character CRA has been deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), a timer button effect is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 is displayed that prompts the player to press the effect button 63. This button image XA1 includes the text "PUSH" that prompts the player to press the production button 63, and the text "3 seconds left" indicating a timer countdown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), accessory development performance B is performed. In this accessory deployment performance B, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a again from the retracted position to the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). Moving. In this case, on the display screen 7a, in the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK, and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol promotion performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the 6 symbols are changed to 7 symbols, which are notified as jackpot symbols. In other words, the 7 symbols are more advantageous to the player than the 6 symbols. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have become the seven promoted symbols, are displayed without interlocking with the first movable accessory 14.

In addition, in the above-mentioned accessory movement effects B and C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are linked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14, but this However, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be made to move (move) at a slower speed than the first movable accessory 14, or may move at a faster speed than the first movable accessory 14. It may also be possible to link (move) with.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned accessory-linked productions A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a when interlocking with the first movable accessory 14, but the decoration is not limited to this. The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 from a state where they are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the above-mentioned accessory-linked productions A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are linked with the first movable accessory 14 are linked with each other in a state where the jackpot symbol is formed. However, the decoration is not limited to this. The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 in a state where a losing symbol is formed.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned role-linked effects A to C, after the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in the role object movement effects A to C, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the first movable role are performed. This is performed in conjunction with the movement of the object 14. According to this configuration, the movements of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movements of the first movable accessory 14 can be emphasized, and the movements of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be emphasized in the game. can draw people's attention. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory-linked performances A to C, as shown in the accessory movement performances A to C, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved and the first movable accessory 14 is moved, the decorative symbol 8L , 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other in the same direction. According to this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be synchronized, and the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be synchronized with the movement of the first movable accessory 14. This can draw more attention to people. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory-linked performances A to C, as shown in the accessory movement performances A to C, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved and the first movable accessory 14 is moved, the decorative symbol 8L , 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other at the same speed. According to this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be completely synchronized, and the movements of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be completely synchronized. can attract more attention from players. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory movement performances A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, as shown in the accessory movement performances A to C, The first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position toward the retracted position. According to this configuration, when the first movable accessory 14 moves in the direction of leaving the display screen 7a, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are linked. Since this is performed, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be emphasized to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory movement performances A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, as shown in the accessory movement performances A to C, The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually displayed on the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves from a state where they are not displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are The entire image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be gradually synchronized, and the movements of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be gradually synchronized. can attract more attention from players. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory movement performances A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, as shown in the accessory movement performances A to C, The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a jackpot pattern. According to this configuration, the notification of the jackpot by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be emphasized, and the joy of the jackpot by the player can be amplified. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable accessory,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that moves a decorative pattern,
The second display performance is a performance that moves the movable accessory,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed, and the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display performance are performed. This is done in conjunction with
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination performance, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other in the same direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
In the combination performance, the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display performance are performed in conjunction at the same movement speed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
The movable accessory is movable between a retracted position and a deployed position,
In the combination performance, when the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other, the movable accessory is move from position to retreat position,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination performance, when the movement of the decorative pattern in the first display performance and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display performance are performed in conjunction with each other, the decorative pattern is The decorative pattern is gradually displayed on the display means as the movable accessory moves from a state where it is not displayed on the movable accessory, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in its entirety on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
The decorative pattern to be moved in the first display performance is a decorative pattern forming a jackpot pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

Scroll effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 69 to 71. This scroll effect is executed during the variation effect of decorative symbols in the normal game state, time saving state (low probability low base state), or variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a scroll effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Or display the image on the sub display screen 64.

[Scroll effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining scroll effect A. Scroll effect A in FIG. 69 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In scroll effect A, as shown in FIG. 69(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at 7 symbols, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at 3 symbols. Moreover, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles, respectively. Further, in this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the ally character CRA is placed at the upper right. In this decorative pattern temporary stop production, the image displayed on the display screen 7a and including the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA is also referred to as a stopped image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, the still images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction scroll (move) the display screen 7a from the top to the bottom. At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between consecutive still images XB1. This boundary portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, arrows are used to indicate that the boundary portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary portion XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 69(C), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is obtained. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(E), a reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, the two consecutive still images XB1 move downward, the boundary part XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary part XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the still image XB1 The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, forming a reach state. At this time, the new decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R include the performance pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, which are seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed. In addition, in this Reach replacement performance, a new ally character CRA is displayed after transforming, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
Thereafter, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, and a symbol confirmation stop performance that suggests a miss or a jackpot is performed.
Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is a different image from the still image XB1.

[Scroll effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining scroll effect B. Scroll effect B in FIG. 70 is an effect with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll effect B, as shown in FIG. 70(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at 7 symbols, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at 3 symbols. Moreover, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles, respectively. Further, in this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the ally character CRA is placed at the upper right. In this decorative pattern temporary stop production, the image displayed on the display screen 7a and including the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA is also referred to as a stopped image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, the still images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction scroll (move) the display screen 7a from the top to the bottom (first direction). At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between consecutive still images XB1. This boundary portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, arrows are used to indicate that the boundary portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary portion XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 70(C), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is obtained. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), an upward scroll effect is performed. This upward scrolling effect is an effect in which consecutive stop images XB1 are scrolled (moved) from the downward direction to the upward direction (second direction) from the state of the downward scroll stop effect. In the figure, it is shown using an arrow that the boundary portion XB2 is also scrolled (moved) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), an upward scroll stop effect is performed. In this up-scroll stop effect, two stop images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that the boundary XB2 provided between the two stop images XB1 is visible. . In this case, a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 70(F), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, it becomes one complete still image XB1. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned downward scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned upward scroll stop effect are different. According to this configuration, since the stopping positions differ depending on scrolling in different directions, it is possible to provide a mysterious atmosphere to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned downward scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned upward scroll stop effect may be the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, the two consecutive still images XB1 move downward, the boundary part XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary part XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the still image XB1 The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, forming a reach state. At this time, the new decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R include the performance pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, which are seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed. In addition, in this reach replacement performance, a transformed new ally character CRA is displayed, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
Thereafter, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, and a symbol confirmation stop performance that suggests a miss or a jackpot is performed.
Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Scroll effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining scroll effect C. Scroll performance C in FIG. 71 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the scroll effect C, as shown in FIG. 71(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern variation performance, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops at 7 symbols, the decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R temporarily stops at 3 symbols. Moreover, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles, respectively. Further, in this decorative pattern temporary stop performance, the ally character CRA is placed at the upper right. In this decorative pattern temporary stop production, the image displayed on the display screen 7a and including the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA is also referred to as a stopped image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scroll effect, the still images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction scroll (move) the display screen 7a from the top to the bottom (first direction). At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between consecutive still images XB1. This boundary portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, arrows are used to indicate that the boundary portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two still images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that a boundary portion XB2 provided between the two still images XB1 is visible. In this case, a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 71(C), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, one complete still image XB1 is obtained. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), an upward scroll effect is performed. This upward scrolling effect is an effect in which consecutive stop images XB1 are scrolled (moved) from the downward direction to the upward direction (second direction) from the state of the downward scroll stop effect. In the figure, it is shown using an arrow that the boundary portion XB2 is also scrolled (moved) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), an upward scroll stop effect is performed. In this up-scroll stop effect, two stop images XB1 that are continuous in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that the boundary XB2 provided between the two stop images XB1 is visible. . In this case, a portion of each of the two still images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, they become one still image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 71(F), when the upper still image XB1 is placed below the lower still image XB1, it becomes one complete still image XB1. That is, one still image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned downward scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned upward scroll stop effect are different. According to this configuration, since the stopping positions differ depending on scrolling in different directions, it is possible to provide a mysterious atmosphere to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned downward scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary part XB2 in the above-mentioned upward scroll stop effect may be the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), boundary part effect A is performed. In this boundary part effect A, the boundary part XB2 is expanded in the vertical direction and three characters XB3 appear in the boundary part XB2. This character XB3 is a character expressing a smiling face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), boundary part effect B is performed. In this boundary part rendering B, the character XB3 jumps out (moves) from the boundary part XB2. In this case, the characters XB3 include characters that completely protrude from the boundary portion XB2 and characters that partially protrude from the boundary portion XB2. According to this configuration, after a mysterious atmosphere is created by the scroll effect and the scroll stop effect, the player can be surprised by the boundary part effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), a reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, the two consecutive still images XB1 move downward, the boundary part XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary part XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the still image XB1 The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, forming a reach state. At this time, the new decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R include the performance pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R, which are seven patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed. In addition, in this Reach replacement performance, a new ally character CRA is displayed after transforming, adding to the mysterious atmosphere.
Thereafter, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, and a symbol confirmation stop performance that suggests a miss or a jackpot is performed.
Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a in the reach replacement effect is an image different from the still image XB1.

[Modified example]
A predetermined image (for example, an effect image, a character image) may be displayed in the boundary portion XB2.
In the scroll effects A to C, when the continuous still images XB1 scroll, the second movable accessory 15 may be moved in the scroll direction. That is, the scrolling of the still image XB1 and the movement of the second movable accessory 15 may be linked.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned scroll effects A to C, in the decorative pattern temporary stop effect, a still image XB1 including the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the ally character CRA is displayed, and then a plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are displayed. The screen 7a is scrolled in the first direction (downward), and then two consecutive still images XB1 are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a so that the boundary XB2 between the two still images XB1 is visible. According to this configuration, a plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled at the boundary between the two still images XB1. Since the XB2 is displayed in a stopped state so that it can be seen, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere, and to give the player an idea of what will happen next (will it be scrolled again? (For example, whether a pseudo-continuation performance, a look-ahead performance, or a chance-up performance) will be performed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the scroll effects A to C, a plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled on the display screen 7a. The still images XB1 are stopped and displayed so that the boundary portions XB2 of the still images XB1 are visible, and then the plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in the second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a more mysterious atmosphere, and the player is informed about the subsequent development (whether it will be scrolled again or whether it will be scrolled again or whether it will be a different effect than scrolling (for example, a pseudo-sequential It is possible to draw attention to whether a performance (direction, look-ahead performance, chance-up performance) is being performed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the scroll effects A to C, a plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive still images XB1 are scrolled on the display screen 7a. A plurality of consecutive still images XB1 are then scrolled in the second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a, and then the two still images The image is stopped and displayed so that the boundary part XB2 of the image XB1 can be seen. According to this configuration, it is possible to arouse a mysterious atmosphere for the player, and the subsequent development (whether it will be scrolled again, or a presentation different from scrolling (for example, a pseudo-continuous presentation, a look-ahead presentation) , chance-up production). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned scroll effects B to C, the position of the boundary part XB2 during the downward scroll stop effect is different from the position of the boundary part XB2 during the upward scroll stop effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference between the downward scrolling effect that scrolls in the first direction and the upward scrolling effect that scrolls in the second direction, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. I can do it.

The above scroll effects A to C are performed during the same variation of the special symbol. According to this configuration, each of the above-mentioned scroll effects A to C is performed in the same variation of the special symbol, so that a mysterious atmosphere can be provided to the player in a short period of time, and subsequent developments ( It is possible to draw attention to whether the screen will be scrolled again or whether an effect different from scrolling (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a chance-up effect) will be performed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable accessory,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first image,
The second display performance is a performance that scrolls and displays a plurality of consecutive first images in a first direction on the display means,
The third display performance is a performance that causes the two consecutive first images to be stopped and displayed on the display means so that the boundary between the two consecutive first images is visible;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and after the first display performance is performed, the second display performance is performed, and after the second display performance is performed, the A third display performance is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance in which the plurality of consecutive first images are scrolled and displayed on the display means in a second direction opposite to the first direction,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the display means stops displaying the two consecutive first images so that the boundary part can be seen;
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
The positions of the boundary part in the third display performance and the boundary part in the fifth display performance are different,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
Equipped with variable display means for variable display of special symbols,
The combination performance is performed during the same fluctuation of the special symbol in the fluctuation display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The decorative symbol special variation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 72 to 74. This decorative symbol special variation performance is executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols in a normal gaming state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern special variation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern special variation effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special variation effect A. Decorative symbol special variation performance A in FIG. 72 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative pattern special variation performance A, as shown in FIG. 72(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, a right hit suggestion display XC1 is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 is a display that urges the player to play right-handed. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a pre-movement effect is performed. In this pre-movement performance, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is erased. At this time, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), moving object movement effect A is performed. In this moving object moving effect A, the moving object XC2 appears from above the display screen 7a. The moving body XC2 is an image imitating the second movable accessory 15, and specifically, it is composed of a rectangular image and a bar-shaped image. Furthermore, various letters and characters are displayed on the rectangular portion of the moving body XC2. In this moving body movement effect A, when the moving body XC2 appears from above, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed according to the movement of the moving body XC2. The production pattern 8L has 7 patterns. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), moving object movement effect B is performed. In this moving object moving effect B, the moving object XC2 is an effect that moves upward. In this moving body movement effect B, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC2. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), moving object movement effect C is performed. In this moving body movement effect C, the moving body XC2 is a effect moving downward. In this moving body movement effect C, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are displayed according to the movement of the moving body XC2. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC2.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a fixed stop regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2, forming a losing or jackpot symbol.

[Decorative pattern special variation effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special variation effect B. Decorative symbol special variation performance B in FIG. 73 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative pattern special variation performance B, as shown in FIG. 73(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, a right hit suggestion display XC1 is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 is a display that urges the player to hit right. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display performance, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is erased, and a plurality of icon images XC3 are displayed. This icon image XC3 represents a predetermined emblem, and is displayed scattered throughout the display screen 7a. At this time, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), moving object movement effect A is performed. In this moving object moving effect A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction on the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 is an image imitating the first movable accessory 14, and specifically, is a bar-shaped image. In this moving object movement effect A, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect A, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually displayed in the after-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. The post-movement area XC6 is an area after the movement of the moving body XC5 on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L has seven patterns. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), moving object movement effect B is performed. In this moving object moving effect B, the moving object XC5 is an effect that moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect B, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving object movement effect B, the decorative pattern 8L is completely displayed in the after-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), moving object movement effect C is performed. In this moving object movement effect C, the moving object XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect C, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving object movement effect C, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually displayed in the after-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), moving object movement effect D is performed. In this moving object moving effect D, the moving object XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect D, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving body movement effect D, the decorative pattern 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), moving object movement effect E is performed. In this moving object moving effect E, the moving object XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect E, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect E, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are gradually displayed in a post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. Ru. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), moving body movement effect F is performed. In this moving object moving effect F, the moving object XC5 is an effect that moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect F, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving body movement effect F, the decorative pattern 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), a decorative pattern enlargement effect is performed. In this decorative pattern enlargement effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged while the moving body XC5 is in a stopped state. At this time, character XC4 is not enlarged. Character XC4 may also be enlarged. The icon image XC3 that has not been erased by the mobile object XC5 continues to be displayed. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), a decorative pattern fade-out effect is performed. In this decorative pattern fade-out effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the character XC4 gradually disappear. The icon image XC3 that has not been erased by the mobile object XC5 continues to be displayed. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a fixed stop regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, forming a losing or jackpot symbol.

[Decorative design special variation effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special variation effect C. Decorative symbol special variation performance C in FIG. 74 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative pattern special variation performance C, as shown in FIG. 74(A), first, a decorative pattern variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation performance, a right hit suggestion display XC1 is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 is a display that urges the player to play right-handed. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display performance, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is erased, and a plurality of icon images XC3 are displayed. This icon image XC3 represents a predetermined emblem, and is displayed scattered throughout the display screen 7a. At this time, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), moving object movement effect A is performed. In this moving object moving effect A, the moving object XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction on the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 is an image imitating the first movable accessory 14, and specifically, is a bar-shaped image. In this moving object movement effect A, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect A, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually displayed in the after-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. The post-movement area XC6 is an area after the movement of the moving body XC5 on the display screen 7a. The decorative pattern 8L has seven patterns. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), moving object movement effect B is performed. In this moving object moving effect B, the moving object XC5 is an effect that moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect B, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving object movement effect B, the decorative pattern 8L is completely displayed in the after-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), moving object movement effect C is performed. In this moving object movement effect C, the moving object XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect C, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving object movement effect C, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually displayed in the after-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving object XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), moving object movement effect D is performed. In this moving object moving effect D, the moving object XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect D, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving body moving effect D, the decorative pattern 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), moving object movement effect E is performed. In this moving object moving effect E, the moving object XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect E, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. In addition, in the moving body movement effect E, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are gradually displayed in a post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. Ru. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), moving body movement effect F is performed. In this moving object moving effect F, the moving object XC5 is an effect that moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect F, when the moving object XC5 passes the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. Furthermore, in the moving body movement effect F, the decorative pattern 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 that expands as the moving body XC5 moves from left to right. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), moving body movement effect G is performed. In this moving body movement effect G, the moving body XC5 is inverted and moved from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect G, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. That is, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are gradually erased as the moving body XC5 moves. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), a moving object movement effect H is performed. In this moving body movement effect H, the moving body XC5 further moves to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect H, the decorative pattern 8R and the character XC4 are completely erased. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(K), moving object movement effect I is performed. In this moving body movement effect I, the moving body XC5 further moves to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect I, the decorative pattern 8C is erased from the part that touches the moving object XC5. That is, the decorative pattern 8C is gradually erased as the moving body XC5 moves. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(L), a moving object movement effect J is performed. In this moving body movement effect J, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect J, the decorative pattern 8C is completely erased. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(M), moving body movement effect K is performed. In this moving object moving effect K, the moving object XC5 is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving body moving effect K, the decorative pattern 8L is erased from the part that touches the moving body XC5. That is, the decorative pattern 8L is gradually erased as the moving body XC5 moves. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(N), moving body movement effect L is performed. In this moving body movement effect L, the moving body XC5 further moves to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving object movement effect L, the decorative pattern 8L is completely erased. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XC1 continues to be displayed regardless of the movement of the mobile body XC5.
Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R come to a fixed stop regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, forming a losing or jackpot symbol.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned decorative pattern special variation performance C, in the moving body movement performances G to L, the decorative design or character was erased from the part that touched the moving body may be deleted from the portion overlapping with the moving body XC5.
The decorative symbol special variation performance B and the decorative symbol special variation performance C can be executed in different variations, and may be executed during the same gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state), for example.

[Effect example]
In the decorative symbol special variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually displayed as the moving object moves in the moving object movement effect. According to this configuration, the display effects of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be expressed by comparing them with the moving objects, and the display effects of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be made interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned decorative symbol special variation performances B to C, in the moving body movement performance, a part of the decorative symbol is displayed in the after-movement area XC6, which is the area after the moving body XC5 has moved, and as the moving body XC5 moves. In the post-movement area XC6, which is enlarged accordingly, the display area of the decorative pattern is displayed to be gradually enlarged. According to this configuration, the movement of the moving body XC5 and the manner in which the decorative symbols are displayed are linked, so that it is possible to provide the player with a new fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and to make the fluctuating display of decorative symbols mysterious. It can be sublimated into something interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the decorative pattern special variation effects A to C, the decorative pattern is not displayed before the moving object movement effect in which the decorative pattern is gradually displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to sublimate the display of decorative patterns in the moving object movement effect to something more mysterious and interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned decorative pattern special variation performance B, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the moving body movement performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear in the decorative pattern fade-out performance regardless of the movement of the moving body. be done. According to this configuration, it is possible to sublimate the display of decorative patterns in the moving object movement effect to something more mysterious and interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the decorative pattern special variation performance B, after the moving object movement performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged in the decorative pattern enlargement performance, and gradually become thinner and erased in the decorative pattern fade-out performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to sublimate the display of decorative patterns in the moving object movement effect to something more mysterious and interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The above-mentioned decorative symbol special variation performances A to C are the same variation, and are performed in a high base state (probability variable gaming state or time saving state) that is relatively advantageous to the player compared to a low base state (normal state). It will be done. Players have higher expectations for a jackpot when they are in a high base state than when they are in a low base state. According to this configuration, by performing the moving object movement effect in a predetermined variation in the high base state, it is possible to make the moving object movement effect more mysterious and to improve expectations for the moving object movement effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a moving object,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a decorative pattern,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, when the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is performed, and the first display performance and the second display performance are performed, The decorative pattern is gradually displayed in the second display performance as the moving object moves in the first display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect displays a part of the decorative pattern in a post-movement area that is an area after the movement of the moving object, and displays the part of the decorative pattern that is enlarged as the moving object moves. displaying the decorative pattern in such a way that the display area thereof is gradually increased in the post-movement area;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination performance, the decorative pattern is not displayed before the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern is erased,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination performance, the third display performance is performed after the second display performance, and in the second display performance, after the decorative pattern is displayed in the post-movement area, the third display performance is performed. In the display performance, the decorative pattern is erased regardless of the movement of the moving object.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination presentation, in the third display presentation, when the decorative pattern is erased, it is enlarged and gradually becomes thinner and erased.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-5,
The gaming state of the gaming machine is always one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player. has become,
In the combination performance, the first display performance, the second display performance, and the third display performance have the same variation and are performed during the second gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The decorative pattern loss effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 75 to 77. This decorative symbol loss performance is executed during a decorative symbol variation performance in a normal gaming state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern loss effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern loss effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern loss effect A. Decorative pattern loss performance A in FIG. 75 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative pattern loss effect A, as shown in FIG. 75(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a ready-to-reach state display effect is performed. In this ready-to-win state display performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at 4 symbols to form a ready-to-reach state. Furthermore, in the reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), moving object collision effect A is performed. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the top of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect A, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing part XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), moving object collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving body collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), so that the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving body collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C further expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), so that the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving body collision effect D, the 4 decorative patterns 8C having multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2) are erased, and the new 5 decorative patterns 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in a ready-to-reach state. is formed. Further, the icon image XD1 is displayed with a changed position. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), a moving object collision effect E is performed. In this moving body collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the top of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing part XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving body collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the center of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect F, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving body collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C further expands and deforms. In this moving body collision effect G, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing part XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(J), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop and display at 7 symbols, while the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, and the icon image This is a production in which XD1 launches an attack on an ally character CRA.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern loss effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern loss effect B. Decorative symbol loss performance B in FIG. 76 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative pattern loss effect B, as shown in FIG. 76(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a ready-to-reach state display effect is performed. In this ready-to-win state display performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at 4 symbols to form a ready-to-reach state. Furthermore, in the reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), moving body collision effect A is performed. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the top of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect A, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing part XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), moving object collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving body collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), so that the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving body collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C further expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), so that the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), a moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving body collision effect D, the 4 decorative patterns 8C having multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2) are erased, and the new 5 decorative patterns 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in a ready-to-reach state. is formed. Further, the icon image XD1 is displayed with a changed position. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), moving body collision effect E is performed. In this moving body collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the top of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing part XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving body collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the center of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect F, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving body collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C further expands and deforms. In this moving body collision effect G, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing part XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), decorative pattern repair effect A is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect A, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is partially repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the area of the defective part XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in the decorative pattern repair performance A, the missing portions XD2 in the middle and lower portions of the decorative pattern 8C are repaired and returned to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(K), decorative pattern restoration effect B is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing part XD2 disappears. Specifically, in decorative pattern repair performance B, the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C is further repaired, and the decorative pattern 8C completely returns to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(L), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop and display at 7 symbols, while the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, and the icon image This is a production in which XD1 launches an attack on an ally character CRA.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Decorative pattern loss effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern loss effect C. Decorative pattern loss performance C in FIG. 77 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the decorative pattern loss effect C, as shown in FIG. 77(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a ready-to-reach state display effect is performed. In this ready-to-win state display performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at 4 symbols to form a ready-to-reach state. Furthermore, in the reach state display effect, an icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), moving body collision effect A is performed. In this moving body collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the top of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving body collision effect A, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing part XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), moving object collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving body collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), so that the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect B, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a moving object collision effect C is performed. In this moving body collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C further expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (4 patterns), so that the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect C, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a moving object collision effect D is performed. In this moving body collision effect D, the 4 decorative patterns 8C having multiple missing parts XD2 (enlarged missing parts XD2) are erased, and the new 5 decorative patterns 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed in a ready-to-reach state. is formed. Further, the icon image XD1 is displayed with a changed position. This icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative pattern 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), moving body collision effect E is performed. In this moving body collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the top of the decorative pattern 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is lost, resulting in a missing part XD2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), a moving object collision effect F is performed. In this moving body collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the center of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C expands and deforms. In this moving object collision effect F, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect F, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing portion XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(I), a moving object collision effect G is performed. In this moving body collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative pattern 8C while the decorative pattern 8C further expands and deforms. In this moving body collision effect G, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns), the collision part in the decorative pattern 8C is further damaged, and a new missing part XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving object collision effect G, the decorative pattern 8C is enlarged and deformed, and the missing part XD2 is enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a cut-in effect is performed. In this cut-in effect, the cut-in image XD3 is displayed so as to hide the decorative pattern 8C having the missing portion XD2, or the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. This cut-in image XD3 includes an icon image XD1 as a chance up, the words "It's super hot!" as a chance up, and an ally character CRA as a chance up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(K), decorative pattern restoration effect A is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect A, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is partially repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the area of the defective part XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in the decorative pattern repair performance A, the missing portions XD2 in the middle and lower portions of the decorative pattern 8C are repaired and returned to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(L), decorative pattern restoration effect B is performed. In this decorative pattern repair effect B, the decorative pattern 8C (5 patterns) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the missing part XD2 disappears. Specifically, in decorative pattern repair performance B, the upper part of the decorative pattern 8C is further repaired, and the decorative pattern 8C completely returns to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(M), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop and display at 7 symbols, while the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, and the icon image This is a production in which XD1 launches an attack on an ally character CRA.
Thereafter, a losing symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modified example]
In the above decorative pattern loss effects A to C, the icon image XD1 is used as the moving object that collides with the decorative pattern, but the object is not limited to this, and any moving object may be used, and a predetermined character, text, effect, etc. may be used as the moving object. .
In the above decorative symbol loss effects A to C, a moving object collision effect is performed for decorative symbols in the reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving object collision effect is performed for decorative symbols that are in the process of fluctuation. You may also do so. In this case, the fluctuating decorative pattern may be a low-speed fluctuating decorative pattern that is slower than normal fluctuating.
In the above decorative pattern loss effect C, the cut-in effect is performed after the moving object collision effect G, but the cut-in effect is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect may be performed during any of the moving object collision effects, or after any of the moving object collision effects. This may be performed during the decorative pattern restoration performance.

[Effect example]
In the decorative pattern loss effects A to C, the icon image XD1 as a moving object and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, and then, as the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative pattern 8C, the decorative pattern 8C is An effect is performed in which the collision portion is damaged and a defective portion XD2 is generated. According to this configuration, the effect of the icon image XD1 as a moving object makes it possible to make the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbols mysterious, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the decorative pattern loss effects A to C, when a defective part XD2 occurs in the decorative pattern 8C in the moving body collision effect, the decorative pattern 8C becomes larger as the defective part XD2 expands. According to this configuration, since the decorative pattern becomes larger when the missing portion XD2 is enlarged by the icon image XD1, it is possible to emphasize the enlargement of the missing portion XD2 by the icon image As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the decorative pattern loss effects A to C, when a defective part XD2 occurs in the decorative pattern 8C in the moving body collision effect, the decorative pattern 8C deforms as the defective part XD2 expands. According to this configuration, since the decorative pattern is deformed when the missing portion XD2 is enlarged by the icon image XD1, it is possible to emphasize the enlargement of the missing portion XD2 by the icon image As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above decorative pattern loss productions A to C, in the moving body collision productions A to C, a defective part XD2 occurs and expands in the decorative pattern 8C, which is the 4 symbols, and these 4 symbols disappear, and then the moving body collision In performances D to G, a performance is performed in which a missing portion XD2 is generated and enlarged in the decorative pattern 8C, which is the fifth pattern. According to this configuration, in the decorative pattern 8C, different patterns are sequentially deleted and enlarged, so that the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern can be made more mysterious, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. can.

In the above decorative pattern loss productions A to C, in the moving body collision productions A to C, a defective part XD2 occurs and expands in the decorative pattern 8C, which is the 4 symbols, and these 4 symbols disappear, and then the moving body collision In performances D to G, a performance is performed in which a missing portion XD2 is generated and enlarged in the decorative pattern 8C, which is the 5th design, and then a super reach performance is performed. According to this configuration, in the decorative pattern 8C, different symbols are sequentially deleted and enlarged, and furthermore, the super reach effect is developed thereafter, so that the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern can be made more mysterious. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the subsequent super reach performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a predetermined moving object,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a first decorative pattern,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined moving object collides with the first decorative pattern, thereby causing a collision portion of the first decorative pattern to be lost;
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the first decorative pattern becomes larger as the defective portion expands;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the third display performance of the combination performance, the first decorative pattern is deformed as the missing portion expands.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is to display a second decorative pattern different from the first decorative pattern, and to cause a collision in the second decorative pattern by the moving body colliding with the second decorative pattern. It is a production where parts are missing,
The combination effect may include a fourth display effect,
In the combination performance, in the third display performance, after the missing part of the first decorative pattern is enlarged, the first decorative pattern disappears, and then the fourth display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
In the fourth display performance of the combination performance, the missing portion of the second decorative pattern is enlarged, and then the second decorative pattern disappears, and then a super reach performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The ceiling reaching schedule suggestion productions A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 78 to 80. This ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance is executed during the fluctuating display of decorative patterns. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Suggestion of reaching the ceiling A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production A. The ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance displays information (reaching schedule information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until b time saving (play time) is reached in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state). , is an effect that suggests to the player the number of changes (number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and high base state). . Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is referred to as the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also referred to as reaching the ceiling.

In the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the display screen 7a displays the fluctuations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game. The game number display GS is displayed. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation in the normal state. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The number of games display GS is displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value representing the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of changes (number of games) after the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a text image of "Number of games 400" is displayed. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS is not cleared by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off. Note that the number of games displayed on the game number display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

In addition, in FIG. 78(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1 are set (stored) as thresholds for the ceiling effect counter. ing. Note that these threshold values are just examples and can be set to any numerical value.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 for each change. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC=TH1=201), the sub-control board 90 controls the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. After a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was displayed, the first arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position at the center of the left end of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining number of times information CD.

The mode image MG represents a production mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 (reaches the ceiling) in the normal state. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the "play time mode" effect is started after reaching the ceiling, so an image showing the characters "play time mode" is displayed. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image that reads "200 times until the end", and is configured so that it can be read as "200 times until the play time mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "200 times" portion numerically indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can know the remaining number of fluctuations until b time reduction (play time) is reached.

The display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the variation (variation of TC=TH1=201) ends (stop display). That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and is displayed after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. The display disappears before the 8R fluctuation display switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special symbol 1 variation a plurality of times from FIG. 78(B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2 (TC=TH2=51), as shown in FIGS. , 8R is displayed and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the second position at the center of the right end of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining number of times information CD, as in the previous (first) display.

The mode image MG is a character image of "play time mode" similar to the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD is a text image that says "90% reached", and is configured so that it can be read as "90% reached until play time mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. . The "90%" part indicates the ratio (%) of the number of fluctuations executed so far (required number minus remaining number of times) to the number of fluctuations required to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). There is. This is the second time that the expected arrival information TJ has been displayed, and 150 changes have passed since the first display and deletion of the expected arrival information TJ in FIG. 78(B). After knowing the number of fluctuations remaining, I am nervous because I don't know it again. By displaying this second arrival schedule information TJ, it is possible to give a sense of security after the excitement.

The display of the second arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the corresponding variation (TC=TH2=51 variations) ends. In other words, the second expected arrival information TJ is displayed after the display of fluctuations of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2, and The display disappears before the variable display of 8L, 8C, and 8R switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, the stop display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special symbol 1 variation a plurality of times from FIG. 78(D), the sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the third threshold value TH3 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (TC=TH3=11), as shown in FIG. 78(E), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the third time. Display schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position in the center of the left end of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, as in the first (previous) and second (previous) displays. There is.

After the third arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the arrival schedule information TJ moves downward toward the lower left end of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 78(F). When reaching the third position at the lower left end of the display screen 7a, the arrival schedule information TJ moves rightward toward the fourth position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 78(G). .

When the arrival schedule information TJ reaches the fourth position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, it is displayed vertically and adjacent to the game number display GS displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a. Here, a rectangular frame image is newly displayed, and inside the frame image, the remaining number of times information CD of "10 games remaining" and the number of games display GS of "Number of games 590" are displayed vertically side by side.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(H), even after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the third arrival schedule information TJ is maintained. The third arrival schedule information TJ is maintained at the fourth position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling reaching number).

From FIG. 78(H), the special symbol 1 variation is repeated multiple times, and when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC=TH4=1), as shown in FIG. 78(I)(J). , the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ becomes "0 times until", and the number of games display GS becomes "the number of games 600".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop display and the next variation starts, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 changes the gaming state to the normal state (normal probability state). and a non-time-saving state and a low base state) to a time-saving state (a normal probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state). As a result, time b (play time) begins. Here, since the special drawing 1 reservation remains, the special drawing 1 lottery in the time-saving state is executed after entry.

As shown in FIG. 78(K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and a variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(L), a mode image MG of "play time mode" and a start image TN of "rush" are displayed. This notifies you that the ceiling has been reached and the "play time mode" performance has started.

[Suggestion of reaching the ceiling B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion effect B. The ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance displays information (attainment schedule information) related to the remaining number of fluctuations until b time saving (play time) is reached in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state). This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of changes (number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and high base state). . Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is referred to as the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also referred to as reaching the ceiling.

In FIG. 79(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1 are set (stored) as thresholds for the ceiling effect counter. ing. Note that these threshold values are just examples and can be set to any numerical value.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 for each change. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC=TH1=201), as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in a large size at a first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining number of times information CD.

The mode image MG represents a production mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 (reaches the ceiling) in the normal state. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the "play time mode" effect is started after reaching the ceiling, so an image showing the characters "play time mode" is displayed. The remaining number of times information CD includes a character image "up to 200 times", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image representing "40%".
The character image "Up to 200 times" is configured so that it can be read as "Up to play time mode 200 times" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "200 times" portion numerically indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. The ratio image expressed as "40%" numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling to the required number of changes to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the region of a specific color, and as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases, the area of the region of the specific color decreases. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can know the extent of the number of fluctuations remaining until b time reduction (play time) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 79(A), the display screen 7a also displays a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a game number display GS representing the number of games (number of changes) after the end of the jackpot game. be done. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The number of games display GS is displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value representing the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of changes (number of games) after the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a text image of "Number of games 400" is displayed. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS is not cleared by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off. Note that the number of games displayed on the game number display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

The display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the corresponding variation (TC=TH1=201 variations) ends. That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the fluctuation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, , 8R disappears before the variable display switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, as shown in FIG. 79(B), the stop display of "567" of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special symbol 1 variation a plurality of times from FIG. 79(B), the sub control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC=TH2=51), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the second time, as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the same first position as the first arrival schedule information TJ. That is, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, similar to when it was displayed last time. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are reduced.

The mode image MG is a character image of "play time mode" similar to the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD includes a character image of "50 more times", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image representing "10%". The character image "50 more times" is configured so that it can be read as "50 times until play time mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The ratio image expressed as "10%" numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling with respect to the required number of changes to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the region of a specific color, and as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases, the area of the region of the specific color decreases. This is the second display of the expected arrival information TJ, and 150 changes have passed since the first display and deletion of the expected arrival information TJ in FIG. 79(A). , Once I knew the number of changes remaining, I was in a state where I didn't know again and was nervous. By displaying this second arrival schedule information TJ, it is possible to give a sense of security after the excitement.

After the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79(D), the arrival schedule information TJ moves toward the lower right end of the display screen 7a while being displayed in a reduced size. When it reaches the second position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, it is displayed vertically and adjacent to the game number display GS displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ is maintained at the second position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of ceiling reaches). As the arrival schedule information TJ is reduced, the display areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are expanded.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(E), while the arrival schedule information TJ is being displayed, the false arrival schedule information tj is further displayed in a larger size. Whether or not to display the false arrival schedule information tj is randomly determined by a lottery for each variation pattern, and here it is assumed that the display is determined by a lottery. Moreover, here, the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed at the same time of change as the arrival schedule information TJ, but it may be displayed at the time of a change after the change in which the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed. Furthermore, the arrival schedule information TJ may be displayed after the change in which the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed. Like the arrival schedule information TJ, the false arrival schedule information tj includes a mode image mg and false remaining number of times information cd.

The mode image mg is a character image of "play time mode" similarly to the mode image MG. The false remaining number of times information cd includes a character image "up to 10 times", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image expressed as "2%". The character image "Up to 10 times" is configured so that it can be read as "Up to play time mode 10 times" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "10 times" part is a numerical value different from the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and a false number of remaining fluctuations is shown. The false number of remaining fluctuations may be larger or smaller than the actual number of remaining fluctuations, and is randomly determined. The "10 times" portion is then decremented by one for each variation. The ratio image expressed as "2%" numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the remaining false number of times to reach the ceiling to the required number of fluctuations to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the region of a specific color, and as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases, the area of the region of the specific color decreases. When this false expected arrival information tj is displayed, the player mistakenly assumes that it is the number of fluctuations remaining until b time reduction (play time) is reached.

After the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79(F), the false arrival schedule information tj moves toward the lower left end of the display screen 7a while being displayed in a reduced size. When reaching the lower left end of the display screen 7a, the arrival schedule information TJ displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a is displayed side by side and adjacent to each other. The player is confused as to which of the expected arrival information TJ and the false expected arrival information tj is correct information. This can make the players excited and increase their interest.

After repeating the special symbol 1 variation multiple times from FIG. 79(F), as shown in FIG. 79(G), the character image included in the false remaining number of times information cd of the false arrival schedule information tj is changed to "0 more times". At the same time, a character image of "lie" is displayed, and it is reported that this false arrival schedule information tj is fake. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(H), the display of the false arrival schedule information tj disappears. The arrival schedule information TJ is continuously displayed.

From FIG. 79(H), the special symbol 1 variation is repeated multiple times, and when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC=TH4=1), as shown in FIG. 79(I)(J). , the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ becomes "0 times until", and the number of games display GS becomes "the number of games 600".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying at "789" and the next variation starts, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 changes the gaming state to the normal state. (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) to time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). As a result, time b (play time) begins. Here, since the special drawing 1 reservation remains, the special drawing 1 lottery in the time-saving state is executed after entry.

As shown in FIG. 79(K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(L), a mode image MG of "play time mode" and a start image TN of "rush" are displayed. This notifies you that the ceiling has been reached and the "play time mode" performance has started.

[Suggestion of reaching the ceiling C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion production C. The ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance displays information (attainment schedule information) related to the number of fluctuations remaining until b time saving (play time) is reached in normal times (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state). This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of changes (number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and high base state). . Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is referred to as the ceiling, and reaching that number of fluctuations is also referred to as reaching the ceiling.

In FIG. 80(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC=201). In the sub-RAM of the gaming machine 1, a first threshold TH1=201, a second threshold TH2=51, a third threshold TH3=11, and a fourth threshold TH4=1 are set (stored) as thresholds for the ceiling effect counter. ing. Note that these threshold values are just examples and can be set to any numerical value.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 for each change. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC=TH1=201), as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in a large size at a first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes a mode image MG and remaining number of times information CD.

The mode image MG represents a production mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 (reaches the ceiling) in the normal state. In the game machine 1 of this embodiment, the mode effect represented by the smiley face image is started after reaching the ceiling, so the smiley face image and the word "mode" are displayed. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image that reads "soon until the end", and is configured so that it can be read as "soon until the smiley face image mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "soon" part qualitatively indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, and corresponds to the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. In this way, the remaining number of times information CD may be qualitative content other than numerical values. Here, depending on the number of changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, the messages are displayed in the following order: ``Still,'' ``Going well,'' ``Almost there,'' ``Almost there,'' ``Almost achieved,'' and ``Achieved.'' When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can roughly know the extent of the number of fluctuations remaining until b time reduction (play time) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), the display screen 7a also displays a variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a game number display GS representing the number of games (number of changes) after the end of the jackpot game. be done. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The number of games display GS is displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value representing the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of changes (number of games) after the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a text image of "Number of games 400" is displayed. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS is not cleared by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off. Note that the number of games displayed on the game number display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.

The display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the corresponding variation (TC=TH1=201 variations) ends. That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the fluctuation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, , 8R disappears before the variable display switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the stop display of "567" of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed.

After repeating the special symbol 1 variation a plurality of times from FIG. 80(B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold TH2 (TC=TH2=51), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the second time, as shown in FIG. Display schedule information TJ. The second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the same first position as the first arrival schedule information TJ. That is, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD, similar to when it was displayed last time. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display areas of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are reduced.

The mode image MG is a character image of "play time mode" similar to the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image that reads "Just a little more", and is configured so that it can be read as "Just a little more until the smiley face image mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. This is the second display of the expected arrival information TJ, and since 150 changes have passed since the first display and deletion of the expected arrival information TJ in FIG. 80(A), the player ,Once I found out how many fluctuations remained, I was nervous because I didn't know it again. This second display can provide a sense of security after the excitement.

After the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, as shown in FIG. 80(D), the arrival schedule information TJ moves toward the lower right end of the display screen 7a while being displayed in a reduced size. When it reaches the second position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, it is displayed vertically and adjacent to the game number display GS displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ is maintained at the second position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of ceiling reaches). As the arrival schedule information TJ is reduced, the display areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed are expanded.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(E), even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner stop being displayed, the display of the arrival schedule information TJ is continued. As shown in FIG. 80(F), when the next variation starts, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed are again displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, the content of the arrival schedule information TJ has not been changed since the previous change, and the same content is continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 80(G), even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been displayed in a variable manner are stopped, the display of the arrival schedule information TJ is continued. The content of the arrival schedule information TJ has not been changed since the previous change, and the same content is continuously displayed. That is, the remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "just a little more", and does not change with each number of fluctuations, but the character content changes after a certain number of fluctuations has elapsed.

After repeating the special symbol 1 variation a plurality of times from FIG. 80(G), the sub-control board 90 determines whether the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the third threshold TH3 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the third threshold TH3 (TC=TH3=11), as shown in FIG. Change the contents of a CD. Specifically, the text image of "Just a little more" is changed to "Almost accomplished."

From FIG. 80(H), the special symbol 1 variation is repeated multiple times, and when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold TH4 (TC=TH4=1), as shown in FIG. 80(I)(J). , the contents of the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ are further changed. Specifically, the text image of "almost achieved" is changed to "achieved". The game number display GS is "game number 600".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop displaying at "678" and the next variation starts, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 changes the gaming state to the normal state. (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) to time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). As a result, time b (play time) begins. Here, since the special drawing 1 reservation remains, the special drawing 1 lottery in the time-saving state is executed after entry.

As shown in FIG. 80(K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and a variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(L), a mode image MG of "smile face image mode" and a start image TN of "rush" are displayed. This notifies you that the ceiling has been reached and the "smile face image mode" effect has started.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the presentation suggesting that the target will reach the ceiling.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78(A) to 78(E), in the normal state, the expected arrival information TJ, which is information related to the number of fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached, is displayed. a first effect in which the arrival schedule information TJ disappears in the normal state after the first effect; and a second effect in which the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed again in the normal state after the second effect. A third performance can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78(E) to (J), in the third effect, the display of the expected arrival information TJ is continued until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the ceiling number. Ru. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the arrival schedule information TJ includes a mode image representing a production mode (play time mode) to be executed after the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of times the ceiling is reached. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78(L), at the start of the performance mode executed after reaching the ceiling, a mode image representing the performance mode is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, in the first performance, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a, and in the third performance, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position, then moves to a second position on the display screen 7a while being reduced in size, and is continuously displayed at the second position. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. At position 2, a numerical image representing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the expected arrival information TJ. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 79.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the ceiling reaching plan suggestion performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In performances A and B that suggest reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of times information CD corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling performance counter. However, the remaining number of times information CD may correspond to the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. For example, in the above embodiment, the remaining number of times information CD is displayed as 0 at the time of one fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, but the remaining number of times information CD is displayed as 1 at the time of one fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. Therefore, the play time mode may be started without displaying the state in which the remaining number of times information CD becomes 0.

[Modification 2]
In the ceiling reaching schedule suggestion performance B, the timing at which the false reaching schedule information tj is displayed is randomly determined. That is, the false arrival schedule information tj may be displayed before the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed. Furthermore, either the remaining number of times information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ or the false remaining number of times information CD of the false arrival schedule information tj may become 0 first. For example, even if the false remaining count information CD of the false arrival schedule information tj has not become 0, the remaining count information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ becomes 0 first, and the remaining count information CD play time mode is entered. good.

[Modification 3]
In production B that suggests reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of times information CD is assumed to include a text image of ``200 times until'', a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image showing ``40%''. . However, the remaining number of times information CD may be at least one of these.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A10-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming state switching means that switches the gaming state to a second gaming state when the number of changes in the first gaming state reaches a specific number,
In the first gaming state, a first performance in which arrival schedule information, which is information related to the number of fluctuations remaining until reaching the specific number of times, is displayed;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the display of the arrival schedule information disappears in the first gaming state;
After the second performance, a third performance in which the arrival schedule information is displayed again in the first game state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1,
In the third performance, the display of the arrival schedule information is continued until the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1 or aspect A10-2,
The arrival schedule information includes a mode image representing a production mode to be executed after the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches the specific number;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-3,
the mode image is displayed at the start of the production mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4,
In the first effect, the arrival schedule information is displayed at a first position of the display means,
In the third effect, the arrival schedule information is displayed at the first position, and then moved to a second position of the display means while being reduced in size, and is continuously displayed at the second position. Ru,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5,
The arrival schedule information includes a numerical image representing the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the specific number of times,
In the third effect, a numerical image representing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the arrival schedule information at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. (in other words, when the ceiling is reached), the state shifts to play time (low probability time saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the present embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also called the normal mode, and the display mode during the low accuracy time saving (play time) is also called the "burst time saving mode". Below, in the low probability state (normal state), "when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter becomes 0)" is also simply referred to as "when the ceiling is reached."

Mode suggestion image display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 81 to 83. This mode-suggestion image display effect is executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols in a normal game state (low probability state) or a time saving state (low probability low base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a mode suggestion image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Mode suggestion image display effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image display effect A. This mode suggestion image display production A consists of the number of changes before the special symbol reaches the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) in the low probability state (normal state), the number of changes when the number reaches the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling. Represents each display effect in fluctuations. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect A, the front-of-ceiling effect A is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol is 3 changes remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the in-front-of-the-ceiling effect B is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol is 3 changes remaining until reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when the number of changes is 2 changes remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol is 1 change remaining until reaching the ceiling. is a display effect when the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 variations remaining until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), and ceiling reaching effect D is a display effect when the number of variations of the special symbol is 1 variation after reaching the ceiling, in other words. , is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol changes by 1 after entering the Bakusho time saving mode (play time), and the ceiling reaching effect E is a display effect when the number of changes of the special symbol changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 changes) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined change (for example, 10 changes) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestion image display effect in FIG. 81, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect A, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. A first mode suggestion image XE1 and a remaining variation count display XE2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 7 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image that suggests the explosive time saving mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this front-of-the-ceiling presentation A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1, and represents the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling. In front-of-ceiling performance A, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains three variations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "three remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), in the ceiling front presentation B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative patterns are displayed from approximately the center to the bottom right. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 8 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this front-of-the-ceiling performance B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In front-of-ceiling performance B, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 2 variations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is expressed as "2 remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), in the ceiling front presentation C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative patterns are displayed from approximately the center to the bottom right. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. In this ceiling front effect C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In front-of-ceiling performance C, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains one variation until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is expressed as "one variation remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), in the ceiling reaching effect A, on the display screen 7a, the remaining variation count display XE2 is continuously displayed at the bottom, the right hit display XE3 is displayed at the top right, and the The time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hand hitting display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball is launched, and specifically, it is a display that suggests to the player that he or she should hit the ball to the right. The image XE4 suggesting entry into the explosive time-saving mode is an image that suggests to the player that the game has entered the explosive time-saving mode, and is written as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching performance A, the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "0 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, on the display screen 7a, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed at the upper right, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed at the lower left. . The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image that suggests the explosive time saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 has a trapezoidal shape, which is different from the shape of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image showing an explanation of the explosive running time-saving mode. Specifically, it is displayed as "If the movable accessory moves, it is a jackpot." In other words, in the explosive running time-saving mode, the movable accessory (for example, This indicates that if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move (move) from the retracted position to the deployed position, it will be a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, on the display screen 7a, the right-hand hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed at the upper right, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed at the lower left, Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D are the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change (for example, after 10 changes) from the ceiling reaching effect D, as shown in FIG. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E are the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the front-of-the-ceiling effects A to C.
Thereafter, during the explosive run time reduction mode, a performance similar to the ceiling reaching performance E is performed.

[Mode suggestion image display effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image display effect B. This mode suggestion image display production B is based on the number of changes before the special symbol reaches the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) during the low probability state (normal state), the number when the number reaches the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling. Represents each display effect in fluctuations. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display performance B, the front-of-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-ceiling performance B is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when the number of changes is 2 changes remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol is 1 change remaining until reaching the ceiling. is a display effect when the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 variations remaining until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), and ceiling reaching effect D is a display effect when the number of variations of the special symbol is 1 variation after reaching the ceiling, in other words. , is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol changes by 1 after entering the Bakusho time saving mode (play time), and the ceiling reaching effect E is a display effect when the number of changes of the special symbol changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 changes) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined change (for example, 10 changes) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestion image display effect in FIG. 82, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect B, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. A first mode suggestion image XE1 and a remaining variation count display XE2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 7 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image that suggests the explosive time saving mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this front-of-the-ceiling presentation A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1, and represents the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling. In front-of-ceiling performance A, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains three variations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "three remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), in the ceiling front presentation B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative patterns are displayed from approximately the center to the bottom right. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 8 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this front-of-the-ceiling performance B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In front-of-ceiling performance B, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 2 variations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is expressed as "2 remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), in the ceiling front presentation C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative patterns are displayed from approximately the center to the bottom right. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. In this ceiling front effect C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In front-of-ceiling performance C, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains one variation until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is expressed as "one variation remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), in the ceiling reaching effect A, on the display screen 7a, the remaining variable number display XE2 is continuously displayed at the bottom, the right hit display XE3 is displayed at the upper right, and the The time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hand hitting display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball is launched, and specifically, it is a display that suggests to the player that he or she should hit the ball to the right. The image XE4 suggesting entry into the explosive time-saving mode is an image that suggests to the player that the game has entered the explosive time-saving mode, and is written as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching performance A, the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "0 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. Displayed towards the bottom right. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image that suggests the explosive time saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 has a rectangular shape, and has the same shape as the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestion image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image showing an explanation of the explosive running time-saving mode. Specifically, it is displayed as "If the movable accessory moves, it is a jackpot." In other words, in the explosive running time-saving mode, the movable accessory (for example, This indicates that if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move (move) from the retracted position to the deployed position, it will be a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, on the display screen 7a, the right-hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed at the upper right, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D are the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change (for example, after 10 changes) from ceiling reaching effect D, as shown in FIG. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E are the same size as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the front-of-the-ceiling effects A to C.
Thereafter, during the explosive run time reduction mode, a performance similar to the ceiling reaching performance E is performed.

[Mode suggestion image display production C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image display effect C. This mode suggestion image display production C is based on the number of variations before the special symbol reaches the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) during the low probability state (normal state), when the number reaches the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling. Represents each display effect in fluctuations. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display performance C, the front-of-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-ceiling performance B is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when the number of changes is 2 changes remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol is 1 change remaining until reaching the ceiling. is a display effect when the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 variations remaining until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), and ceiling reaching effect D is a display effect when the number of variations of the special symbol is 1 variation after reaching the ceiling, in other words. , is a display effect when the number of changes in the special symbol changes by 1 after entering the Bakusho time saving mode (play time), and the ceiling reaching effect E is a display effect when the number of changes of the special symbol changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 changes) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined change (for example, 10 changes) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestion image display effect in FIG. 83, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect C, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. A first mode suggestion image XE1 and a remaining variation count display XE2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 7 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image that suggests the explosive time saving mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this front-of-the-ceiling presentation A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1, and represents the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling. In front-of-ceiling performance A, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains three variations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "three remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), in the ceiling front presentation B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative patterns are displayed from approximately the center to the bottom right of the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 8 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this front-of-the-ceiling performance B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In front-of-ceiling performance B, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 2 variations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is expressed as "2 remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), in the ceiling front presentation C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative patterns are displayed from approximately the center to the bottom right. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining variation count display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. In this ceiling front effect C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining variation count display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In front-of-ceiling performance C, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains one variation until reaching the ceiling, the remaining number of variations display XE2 is expressed as "one variation remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), in the ceiling reaching effect A, on the display screen 7a, the remaining variable number display XE2 is continuously displayed at the bottom, the right hit display XE3 is displayed at the upper right, and the The time-saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed approximately in the center. The right-hand hitting display XE3 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball is launched, and specifically, it is a display that suggests to the player that he or she should hit the ball to the right. The image XE4 suggesting entry into the explosive time-saving mode is an image that suggests to the player that the game has entered the explosive time-saving mode, and is written as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching performance A, the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the ceiling, so the remaining number of variations display XE2 is displayed as "0 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, the right-hitting display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. Displayed towards the bottom right. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image that suggests the explosive time saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 has a rectangular shape, and has the same shape as the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestion image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right hit display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed approximately in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image showing an explanation of the explosive running time-saving mode. Specifically, it is displayed as "If the movable accessory moves, it is a jackpot." In other words, in the explosive running time-saving mode, the movable accessory (for example, This indicates that if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 move (move) from the retracted position to the deployed position, it will be a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, on the display screen 7a, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed at the upper right, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from below the approximate center. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D are displayed smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the front-of-ceiling effects A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change (for example, after 10 changes) from the ceiling reaching effect D, as shown in FIG. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from approximately the center to the right side. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E are displayed smaller than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the front-of-ceiling effects A to C.
Thereafter, during the explosive run time reduction mode, a performance similar to the ceiling reaching performance E is performed.

[Modified example]
In the mode suggestion image display effect A, the shapes of the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 are different, but the shapes of the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 are different. The characters ``Bakusou Time-Save Mode'' are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters displayed in the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different.

[Effect example]
In the above mode suggestion image display effects A to C, in the normal state and before the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the ceiling, even though it is in the normal mode in the normal state, the short running time mode (play time) The first mode suggestion image XE1 that suggests is displayed, and then, when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the ceiling, the normal state is changed to the low-accuracy time-saving state, and the display mode shifts from the normal mode to the explosive time-saving mode. In this case, a second mode suggestion image XE5 suggesting the explosive time saving mode is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the explosive time saving mode even before the ceiling is reached, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the mode suggestion image display effects A to C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed in association with the remaining variation count display XE2. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a higher sense of anticipation for the explosive time saving mode even before the ceiling is reached, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the mode suggestion image display productions A to C, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is deleted after the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the ceiling (500 prescribed times) and after a predetermined variation. According to this configuration, since the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased after the display mode enters the fast-paced time-saving mode, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display effect of the fast-paced time-saving mode. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image display effects A to C, when the vehicle reaches the ceiling (before the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased), a mode explanation image XE6, which is an image representing an explanation of the explosive run time saving mode, is displayed. According to this configuration, the details of the fast-paced time-saving mode can be conveyed to the player while giving the player a sense of anticipation for the fast-paced time-saving mode, so that expectations for the fast-paced time-saving mode can be further dramatically increased. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image display effects A to C, the right-hand hit display XE3 is displayed before the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed when the player reaches the ceiling. According to this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to launch the game ball when entering the fast running time saving mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In the gaming machine, a game is played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the game state is changed to the second game state, and in the second game state, the display mode in the display means shifts to a specific mode,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is performed when the game state is the first game state and before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, even though the game state is the first game state. , an effect of displaying a first mode suggestion image suggesting the specific mode in the second gaming state;
The second display effect is such that when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the display mode is changed to the specific one. When transitioning to a mode, a second mode suggestion image suggesting the specific mode is displayed;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
In the first display performance of the combination performance, the first mode suggestion image is displayed in association with the remaining number of times up to the predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the second display performance of the combination performance, the second mode suggestion image is erased after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times after reaching the predetermined number of times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance in which a mode explanation display representing an explanation of the specific mode is performed,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second mode suggestion image is erased in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance in which a direction suggestion display suggesting the launch direction of the game ball is performed,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed before the second mode suggestion image in the second display effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. (in other words, when the ceiling is reached), the state shifts to play time (low probability time saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the present embodiment, the display mode during the normal state is also called the normal mode, and the display mode during the low accuracy time saving (play time) is also called the "burst time saving mode". Below, in the low probability state (normal state), "when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter becomes 0)" is also simply referred to as "when the ceiling is reached."

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, the V flag is OFF in the gaming state setting process of FIG. 32 (step 2301: NO) (that is, when transitioning to the low probability time saving gaming state) In this case, the time saving counter is set to 100 (step S2303) (in other words, after the jackpot, the low-accuracy time-saving game state is performed until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100), but the invention is not limited to this. When shifting to the accurate time saving game state, the low accurate time saving state may be continued until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 499 times. In addition, in the gaming state setting process of FIG. 32, when the V flag is ON (step 2301: YES) (that is, when moving to the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the time-saving count is set to 100 (step S2308). , After the jackpot, the high-accuracy time-saving state continues until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100, but in this case, after the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 100, the number of changes of the special symbol further increases to 499. There may be cases in which the low-accuracy time-saving state continues until the
The following mode suggestion image continuation performances A to C are used when the low-accuracy time-saving state continues until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 499 after a jackpot, or when the special symbol changes after a high-accuracy time-saving state. This effect can occur when the low-accuracy time-saving state continues until the number of times reaches 499.
In addition, when the number of changes of the special symbol becomes 499 times after a jackpot, or when the number of changes of the special symbol becomes 499 times after a high-accuracy time-saving state, it is referred to as "when the fluctuation occurs before reaching the ceiling". call.

Mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 84 to 86. This mode-suggestion image continuation performance is executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols in the normal gaming state (low probability state) or time saving state (low probability low base state). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the mode suggestion image continuation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Mode suggestion image continuation production A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image continuation effect A. This mode suggestion image continuation production A is based on the number fluctuation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the fluctuation when reaching the ceiling in the low probability state (normal state). Represents display performance. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image continuation performance A, the front-of-the-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is three fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-the-ceiling performance B is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. This is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining before reaching the ceiling, and the front ceiling representation C is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining before reaching the ceiling. The fluctuation effects before reaching the ceiling A to B are the display effects during the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the reaching the ceiling effect is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), that is, the explosion. This is the display effect when entering the time saving mode (play time). In this mode suggestion image continuation effect A, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestion image continuation effect A, in front of the ceiling effect A shown in FIG. A running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and a remaining variation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 7 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Moreover, the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests that the gaming state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, it is an image that suggests the explosive time-saving mode, and has a trapezoidal shape. The runaway time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "runaway time-saving mode" and various effects. In addition, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the game state changes from the low probability time saving state to the normal state, in other words, the number of fluctuations before reaching the ceiling. Represents the remaining number of times. In front-of-ceiling presentation A, the number of variations of the special symbol remains three variations before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed as "3 remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), in front of the ceiling presentation B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from approximately below the center to the bottom right are displayed in the burst time saving mode. The suggestion image XF1 and the remaining variation count display XF2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 8 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In front-of-ceiling performance B, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 2 variations before reaching the ceiling, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed as "2 remaining variations."

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), in the ceiling front effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from approximately below the center to the bottom right are displayed in the burst time saving mode. The suggestion image XF1 and the remaining variation count display XF2 are continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the before-ceiling performance C, since the number of variations of the special symbol is one variation remaining until the variation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining variation number display XF2 is expressed as "one variation remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), in the pre-ceiling variation effect A, an enlarged explosive run time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 84(E), in the pre-ceiling variation effect B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from approximately below the center to the lower right Over the course of the cycle, a burst running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and a remaining variation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling variation performance B, it is a pre-ceiling variation performance, that is, the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 variations remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining variation count display XF2 is "0 remaining variations". It is expressed as That is, in this pre-ceiling variation performance B, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has been changed from the low probability time saving state to the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), in the ceiling reaching effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from approximately below the center to the bottom right, a short burst mode is suggested. Image XF1 is displayed, and right-hand hit display XF4 is displayed at the upper right. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball will be launched, and specifically, is a display that suggests that the player should play right-handed.
Thereafter, if there is no jackpot, the explosive time-saving mode is continued, and the performance is continued in a low-probability time-saving state like the ceiling-reaching performance. Furthermore, after reaching the ceiling, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the game state is changed from the low accuracy time saving state to the normal state, the explosive running time saving mode ends, and the display of the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. .

[Mode suggestion image continuation production B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image continuation effect B. This mode suggestion image continuation production B is based on the number fluctuation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the fluctuation when reaching the ceiling in the low probability state (normal state). Represents display performance. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image continuation performance B, the front-of-the-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of variations in the special symbol is three variations remaining before the variation before reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-the-ceiling production B is a display performance when the number of variations of the special symbol is 3 variations remaining before the variation before reaching the ceiling. This is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining before reaching the ceiling, and the front ceiling representation C is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining before reaching the ceiling. The fluctuation effects before reaching the ceiling A to B are the display effects during the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the reaching the ceiling effect is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), that is, the explosion. This is the display effect when entering the time saving mode (play time). In this mode suggestion image continuation effect B, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In this mode suggestion image continuation effect B, in front of the ceiling effect A shown in FIG. XF1 and remaining variation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 7 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Moreover, the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests that the gaming state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, it is an image that suggests the explosive time-saving mode, and has a trapezoidal shape. The runaway time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "runaway time-saving mode" and various effects. In addition, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the game state changes from the low probability time saving state to the normal state, in other words, the number of fluctuations before reaching the ceiling. Represents the remaining number of times. In front-of-ceiling presentation A, the number of variations of the special symbol remains three variations before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed as "3 remaining variations." In addition, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the variation number display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), in front-of-ceiling presentation B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the bombing time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the rest are displayed at the bottom. The number of fluctuations display XF2 is continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 8 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In front-of-ceiling performance B, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 2 variations before reaching the ceiling, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed as "2 remaining variations." In addition, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the variation number display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), in the ceiling front effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the bombing time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the rest are displayed at the bottom. The number of fluctuations display XF2 is continuously displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the before-ceiling performance C, since the number of variations of the special symbol is one variation remaining until the variation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining variation number display XF2 is expressed as "one variation remaining". In addition, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the variation number display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), in the pre-ceiling variation effect A, an enlarged explosive run time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85(E), in the pre-ceiling variation effect B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower part suggests a short burst mode. An image XF1 and a remaining variation count display XF2 are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling variation performance B, it is a pre-ceiling variation performance, that is, the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 variations remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining variation count display XF2 is "0 remaining variations". It is expressed as That is, in this pre-ceiling variation performance B, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has been changed from the low probability time saving state to the normal state. In addition, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the variation number display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), in the ceiling reaching effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from approximately the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the bottom. , the right-hand hit display XF4 is displayed in the upper right corner. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball will be launched, and specifically, is a display that suggests that the player should play right-handed. In addition, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 moves from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it reappears from the right end and moves to the left again.
Thereafter, if there is no jackpot, the explosive time-saving mode is continued, and the performance is continued in a low-probability time-saving state like the ceiling-reaching performance. Furthermore, after reaching the ceiling, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the game state is changed from the low accuracy time saving state to the normal state, the explosive running time saving mode ends, and the display of the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. .

[Mode suggestion image continuation production C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining mode suggestion image continuation effect C. This mode suggestion image continuation production C is based on the number fluctuation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the fluctuation when reaching the ceiling in the low probability state (normal state). Represents display performance. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image continuation performance C, the front-of-the-ceiling performance A is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is three fluctuations remaining before the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the front-of-ceiling performance B is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. This is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining before reaching the ceiling, and the front ceiling representation C is a display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation remaining before reaching the ceiling. The fluctuation effects before reaching the ceiling A to B are the display effects during the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the reaching the ceiling effect is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until reaching the ceiling (reaching the ceiling), that is, the explosion. This is the display effect when entering the time saving mode (play time). In this mode suggestion image continuation effect C, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestion image continuation production C, in front of the ceiling production A shown in FIG. The number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 7 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. In addition, the Bakushu time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image that suggests that the gaming state is a low-probability time-saving state, that is, it is an image that suggests the Bakushu time-saving mode, and is a strip-like image from the lower right to the lower left of the display screen 7a. is formed. The runaway time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the words "runaway time-saving mode" and various effects. In addition, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the game state changes from the low probability time saving state to the normal state, in other words, the number of fluctuations before reaching the ceiling. Represents the remaining number of times. In front-of-ceiling presentation A, the number of variations of the special symbol remains three variations before reaching the ceiling, so the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed as "3 remaining variations." Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed closer to the front than the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "runaway time-saving mode" move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), in front-of-ceiling presentation B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the bombing time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuations are displayed at the bottom. XF2 continues to be displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 8 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In front-of-ceiling performance B, since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 2 variations before reaching the ceiling, the remaining variation count display XF2 is displayed as "2 remaining variations." Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed closer to the front than the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "runaway time-saving mode" move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), in the ceiling front effect C, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the bombing time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining variation number are displayed at the bottom. XF2 continues to be displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the before-ceiling performance C, since the number of variations of the special symbol is one variation remaining until the variation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining variation number display XF2 is expressed as "one variation remaining". In addition, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the variation number display XF2 move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again. Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed closer to the front than the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "runaway time-saving mode" move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), in the pre-ceiling variation effect A, an enlarged explosive run time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), in the pre-ceiling variation performance B, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower left, and the bombing time saving mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of variations are displayed at the bottom. XF2 is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 4 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 8 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Further, the remaining number of fluctuations display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling variation performance B, it is a pre-ceiling variation performance, that is, the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 variations remaining until the ceiling is reached, so the remaining variation count display XF2 is "0 remaining variations". It is expressed as That is, in this pre-ceiling variation performance B, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has been changed from the low probability time saving state to the normal state. Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed closer to the front than the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "runaway time-saving mode" move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), in the ceiling reaching effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the bottom, and the upper right is displayed. Right-handed player display XF4 is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-place patterns. Specifically, in the decorative pattern 8L, 9 patterns are stopped and displayed, in the decorative pattern 8C, 5 patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the decorative pattern 8R, 7 symbols are displayed in a stopped state. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball will be launched, and specifically, is a display that suggests that the player should play right-handed. Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed closer to the front than the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 (text, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition, in the explosive time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, the characters representing "runaway time-saving mode" move from the right to the left on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they reappear from the right end and move to the left again. Moving.
Thereafter, if there is no jackpot, the explosive time-saving mode is continued, and the performance is continued in a low-probability time-saving state like the ceiling-reaching performance. Furthermore, after reaching the ceiling, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the game state is changed from the low accuracy time saving state to the normal state, the explosive running time saving mode ends, and the display of the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. .

[Modified example]
In the mode suggestion image continuation production C, the characters and effects included in the Bakushu time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 move in a predetermined direction in the Bakushu time-saving mode suggestion image XF1, but the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the internal characters and effects move while the image XF1 moves.

In the above-mentioned mode suggestion image continuation productions A to C, the explosive run time saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the front-of-the-ceiling production and the explosive run-time saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variable production are the same, but the explosive run time-saving mode in the front-of-the-ceiling production The suggestion image XF1 and the explosive run time saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variation performance may have different shapes, may include different characters, may include different effects, or may be different images. May contain. In addition, the image XF1 suggesting the short running time mode in the front-of-ceiling performance and the image XF1 suggesting the short-running time mode in the reaching-the-ceiling performance were the same, but the image XF1 suggesting the short-running time-saving mode in the front-of-the-ceiling performance and the short-running time reducing mode in the reaching-the-ceiling performance were the same. The mode suggestion image XF1 may have a different shape, may contain different characters, may contain a different effect, or may contain a different image. Furthermore, the image XF1 suggesting a fast-running time-saving mode in the pre-ceiling variation effect and the image XF1 suggesting a fast-moving time-saving mode in the reaching-the-ceiling effect were the same; may have a different shape, may include different characters, may include a different effect, or may include a different image from the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1.

[Effect example]
In the mode suggestion image continuation productions A to C, in the low probability state (normal state), in the pre-ceiling production of the number variation before the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling variation, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is is displayed, and after that, in the pre-ceiling variation performance in which the number of variations of the special symbol reached 499 times before the ceiling (corresponding to the second specified number of times), the gaming state was changed from the low-accuracy time-saving state to the normal state. Nevertheless, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 indicating a low-accuracy time saving state is displayed, and then, when the ceiling is reached, the explosive running time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is continuously displayed in the ceiling reaching effect. According to this configuration, in the case where the low accuracy time saving state is temporarily returned to the normal state before the ceiling is reached, and the low accuracy time saving state is immediately returned to the low accuracy time saving state by reaching the ceiling, once the normal state is returned, the normal state is returned. Since the game is informed of the advantageous Bakushu time-saving mode without informing the player of the situation, it is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to returning to the normal state, and the player can enjoy the Bakushu-shu time-saving mode in a good mood. You can enjoy it. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuation performances A to C, the explosive run time saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the front-of-the-ceiling production and the explosive running time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variable production have the same configuration. According to this configuration, in the case where the low accuracy time saving state is temporarily returned to the normal state before the ceiling is reached, and the low accuracy time saving state is immediately returned to the low accuracy time saving state by reaching the ceiling, once the normal state is returned, the normal state is returned. It is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to the event, and the player can enjoy the fast-paced time-saving mode in a good mood. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuation performances A to C, the explosive run time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the front-of-the-ceiling production and the explosive run time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling-reaching production have the same configuration. According to this configuration, in the case where the low accuracy time saving state is temporarily returned to the normal state before the ceiling is reached, and the low accuracy time saving state is immediately returned to the low accuracy time saving state by reaching the ceiling, once the normal state is returned, the normal state is returned. It is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to the event, and the player can enjoy the fast-paced time-saving mode in a good mood. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuation effect C, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 has a structure in which internal characters and effects move. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the fast-paced time-saving mode suggestion image XF1 to the player, and the player can enjoy the fast-paced time-saving mode in a pleasant manner. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C, the remaining variation count display XF2 is performed in the ceiling front effects A to C. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a countdown from the low-accuracy time-saving state to the time when the state returns to the normal state, and it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency until the state returns to the normal state. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
One of a plurality of game states including a first game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second game state that is relatively advantageous to the player, including a display means that can execute a plurality of display effects. A gaming machine in which a game is played in a gaming state, and when the gaming state is the first gaming state and the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a first specified number of times, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state,
In the gaming machine, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a second specified number of times that is smaller than the first specified number of times in the second gaming state, the gaming state changes to the second specified number of times. The gaming state may be changed to the first gaming state,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays an advantageous mode suggestion image suggesting that the mode is advantageous to the player on the display means when in the second gaming state;
The second display performance is performed after the first display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times, and the second display performance is performed when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times. 2, the advantageous mode suggestion image is displayed even though the gaming state has been changed to the first gaming state after reaching the specified number of times;
The third display performance is performed after the second display performance when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number of times, and displays the advantageous mode suggestion image. It is a performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the second display effect are the same;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the third display effect are the same;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
The advantageous mode suggesting image includes a moving image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the first display performance, displaying a remaining number of fluctuations representing the remaining number of times until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second prescribed number;
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The multiple section display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 87 to 89. This multi-section display performance is executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols in a normal gaming state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a multi-section display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Multiple section display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the multiple section display effect A. The multi-section display performance A in FIG. 87 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the multiple section display effect A, as shown in FIG. 87(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed within the image. The decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a stopped state with two symbols, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a stopped state with three symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a screen split effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image Region G is formed. Button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen split effect, the divided area G is formed such that the button image XG is located in the section G22. Each section of this divided region G is formed in a matrix shape (lattice shape, checkerboard shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a section image display effect is performed. In the partition image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the partition G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the partition G31. Next, the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, and then , the first character group CRA is displayed in section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in section G12. That is, in the partitioned image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11, and then the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each partition clockwise from the button image XG as a starting point. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image showing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image representing a character with a smiling face and an emblem consisting of a circle and a triangle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), a block image deletion effect is performed. In this section image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, second character group CRB, or button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G are erased all at once and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 87(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Note that other images, such as a sandstorm image, may be displayed instead of the blackout.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), an entire section image display effect is performed. In this section whole image display effect, a character image CRC different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the entire divided region G (each section). This character image CRC represents a fighting warrior character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach performance A, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the first character group CRA that has been displayed in multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and the first character group CRA is displayed in a predetermined position. Expand the action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(I), super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach performance C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an action in which they confront each other is developed.
Thereafter, a winning pattern or a jackpot pattern is displayed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a winning pattern or a jackpot pattern is notified.

[Multiple section display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the multiple section display effect B. Multi-section display performance B in FIG. 88 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the multiple section display effect B, as shown in FIG. 88(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed within the image. The decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a stopped state with two symbols, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a stopped state with three symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a screen split effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image Region G is formed. Button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen split effect, the divided area G is formed such that the button image XG is located in the section G22. Each section of this divided region G is formed in a matrix shape (lattice shape, checkerboard shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a section image display effect is performed. In the partition image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the partition G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the partition G31. Next, the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, and then , the first character group CRA is displayed in section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in section G12. That is, in the partitioned image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11, and then the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each partition clockwise from the button image XG as a starting point. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image showing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image representing a character with a smiling face and an emblem consisting of a circle and a triangle.

Furthermore, in the divided region G, the frame of each section has an effect-like effect of a predetermined color, and in each section, the color of the effect portion of the frame differs depending on the displayed image. Specifically, in the sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13 where the first character group CRA is displayed, the color of the effect part of the frame is red, and the second character group CRB is displayed. In the partitions G12 and G11, the color of the effect part of the frame is blue, and in the partition G22 where the button image XG is displayed, the color of the effect part of the frame is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a block image deletion effect is performed. In this section image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, second character group CRB, or button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G are erased all at once and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 88(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Note that other images, such as a sandstorm image, may be displayed instead of the blackout.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), an entire section image display effect is performed. In this section whole image display effect, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each section in the section image display effect are displayed in the entire divided area G (each section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach performance A, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(H), super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the first character group CRA that has been displayed in multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and the first character group CRA is displayed in a predetermined position. Expand the action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(I), super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach performance C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an action in which they confront each other is developed. Note that this character image CRC represents a character of a fighting warrior.
Thereafter, a winning pattern or a jackpot pattern is displayed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a winning pattern or a jackpot pattern is notified.

[Multiple section display effect C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the multiple section display effect C. The multi-section display performance C in FIG. 89 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the multiple section display effect C, as shown in FIG. 89(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display performance, the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative pattern 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed within the image. The decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a stopped state with two symbols, and the decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a stopped state with three symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a screen split effect is performed. In this screen split effect, the button image Region G is formed. Button image XG is displayed in section G22. In other words, in this screen split effect, the divided area G is formed such that the button image XG is located in the section G22. Each section of this divided region G is quadrangular and formed in a substantially matrix shape (lattice shape, checkerboard shape). The shape and size of each section of the divided region G are different.
Furthermore, adjacent sections of the divided region G are basically separated by a predetermined distance. However, adjacent sections of the divided region G may have some parts in contact with each other. Even in the following section image display effect, section image deletion effect, and whole section image display effect, the distance between adjacent sections is the same as the distance during the screen split effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a section image display effect is performed. In the partition image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the partition G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the partition G31. Next, the first character group CRA is displayed in section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in section G23, and then , the first character group CRA is displayed in section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in section G12. That is, in the partitioned image display effect, in the divided area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the partition G11, and then the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each partition clockwise from the button image XG as a starting point. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image showing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. The second character group CRB is an image representing a character with a smiling face and an emblem consisting of a circle and a triangle.

Furthermore, in the divided region G, the frame of each section has an effect-like effect of a predetermined color, and in each section, the color of the effect portion of the frame differs depending on the displayed image. Specifically, in the sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13 where the first character group CRA is displayed, the color of the effect part of the frame is red, and the second character group CRB is displayed. In the partitions G12 and G11, the color of the effect part of the frame is blue, and in the partition G22 where the button image XG is displayed, the color of the effect part of the frame is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a block image deletion effect is performed. In this section image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, second character group CRB, or button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G are erased all at once and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 89(E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. Note that other images, such as a sandstorm image, may be displayed instead of the blackout.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), an entire section image display effect is performed. In this section whole image display effect, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each section in the section image display effect are displayed in the entire divided area G (each section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach performance A, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the first character group CRA that has been displayed in multiple sections of the divided area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and the first character group CRA is displayed in a predetermined position. Expand the action.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(I), super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach performance C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an action in which they confront each other is developed.
Thereafter, a winning pattern or a jackpot pattern is displayed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a winning pattern or a jackpot pattern is notified.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned multiple section display effects B and C, in the section whole image presentation, among the first character group CRA and second character group CRB, the first character group CRA which has the largest number of sections displayed is divided into divided areas. Although the display is not limited to this, the second character group CRB, which has a smaller number of displayed sections, out of the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB, can be displayed in the section image display effect. It may also be displayed.
In the above multiple section display effects A to C, button images XG have the same shape and size in the button display effect, screen split effect, and section image display effect, but the button image Different shapes and/or different sizes may be used in the display effect, screen split effect, and divided image display effect.

[Effect example]
In the multiple section display effects A to C, a divided area G that divides a predetermined area of the display screen 7a is displayed in the screen split effect, and in the divided image display effect, six of the nine sections of the divided area G are displayed. The first character group CRA is displayed, the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine divisions of the divided area G, and then the performance button 63 is pressed by the player in the division image deletion performance. As a result, an effect is performed in which the first character group CRA displayed in six sections and the second character group CRB displayed in two sections disappear. According to this configuration, different groups of images displayed in a plurality of sections disappear, so it is possible to instantly provide a spectacular view to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above multiple section display effects A to C, in the screen split effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the first character group CRA is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G. When the second character group CRB is displayed, a button image XG representing the effect button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, the button image XG is displayed mixed with the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB that are displayed in a plurality of sections, so it is possible to provide the player with a sense of mystery as well as a spectacular view. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the multiple section display effect A, in the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the first character group CRA is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G. The second character group CRB is displayed, and then, when the player presses the performance button 63 in the division image deletion performance, the first character group CRA displayed in six divisions and the first character group CRA displayed in two divisions are displayed. The second character group CRB and the second character group CRB disappear, and then a part of an image (character image CRC) different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the divided area G in the whole section image presentation. . According to this configuration, displaying the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G can create a sense of mystery and increase the interest of the divided image display effect. can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the multiple section display effect A, in the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in six of the nine sections of the divided area G, and the first character group CRA is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G. The second character group CRB is displayed, the button image XG is displayed in one section of the divided area G, and then, when the player presses the production button 63 in the section image deletion effect, the button image XG is displayed in six sections. The first character group CRA displayed in the two sections, the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections, and the button image An image (character image CRC) different from the second character group CRB and the button image XG is displayed. According to this configuration, since the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG are displayed in the divided area G, it is possible to create a more mysterious feeling and add interest to the divided image display performance. can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned multiple section display effects A to C, while the button image XG is displayed in the button display effect, the divided area G is formed so that the button image XG is included in one section in the screen split effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the divided area G is formed around the button image can be granted. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is such that the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections and displayed, a first image is displayed in each of a first number of sections among the plurality of sections, and A second image is displayed in each of the second number of sections among the sections,
The second display effect includes the first image displayed in the first number of sections and the second image displayed in the second number of sections by the player's operation of the operation means. The image disappears,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-2]
The gaming machine described in XG-1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which an operating means image representing the operating means is displayed in a predetermined section of the plurality of sections of the display means,
The combination effect includes the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-3]
The gaming machine described in XG-2,
In the second display effect in the combination effect, the first image and the second image disappear, and an image different from the first image and the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-4]
The gaming machine described in XG-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect includes, in the plurality of sections of the display means, a section where the first image is displayed, a section where the second image is displayed, and a section where the operation means image is displayed. It is a performance in which a predetermined image is expressed using partitions,
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[XG-5]
The gaming machine described in XG-4,
In the case where the first display effect and the third display effect of the combination effect are performed, when the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections and displayed, the operation means image is carried out in the displayed state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

Functional timer display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 90 to 92. This function-based timer display performance is executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols in a normal gaming state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and, if it contains an instruction to execute a function-based timer display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Functional timer display effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the functional timer display effect A. Functional timer display performance A in FIG. 90 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the functional timer display effect A, as shown in FIG. 90(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the first timer display effect A is performed. In this first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame. It is possible to display the number of seconds until In the illustrated example, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds, which is the target timer value. It is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a movable accessory action effect is performed. In this movable accessory actuation performance, the first movable accessory 14 is activated and moves from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed darkly to emphasize that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the illustrated example, a darkened area on the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 has passed is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), jackpot symbol performance A is performed. In this jackpot symbol performance A, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of 6 symbols, that is, a jackpot symbol is formed by the zeros of the 6 symbols. These 6 jackpot symbols suggest that the gaming state after the jackpot will shift to a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state), and are of lower value to the player than the 7 jackpot symbols described below. It is a jackpot pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XH2 is displayed at the same position on the display screen 7a as the above-described first timer display XH1. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a single rectangular frame, which is different from the first timer display XH1. Further, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can display a two-digit number of seconds, but the number of seconds below the decimal point is omitted. In the illustrated example, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. In the second timer display XH2, 0 seconds is the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for prompting the player to press the production button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a little while after the second timer display XH2 starts counting down. In the figure, button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), jackpot symbol presentation B is performed. In this jackpot symbol production B, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of 7 symbols, that is, a jackpot symbol is formed by the zeros of the 7 symbols. These 7 jackpot symbols suggest that the gaming state after the jackpot will shift to a variable probability state (high probability time saving state), and are jackpot symbols that have higher value for the player than the above-mentioned 6 jackpot symbols. be.
Thereafter, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game shifts to a variable probability state (high probability high base state).

[Functional timer display effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the functional timer display effect B. Functional timer display performance B in FIG. 91 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the functional timer display performance B, as shown in FIG. 91(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the first timer display effect A is performed. In this first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame. It is possible to display the number of seconds until In the illustrated example, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds, which is the target timer value. It is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a movable accessory action effect is performed. In this movable accessory actuation performance, the first movable accessory 14 is activated and moves from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed darkly to emphasize that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the illustrated example, a darkened area on the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 has passed is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), jackpot symbol performance A is performed. In this jackpot symbol performance A, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of 6 symbols, that is, a jackpot symbol is formed by the zeros of the 6 symbols. These 6 jackpot symbols suggest that the gaming state after the jackpot will shift to a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state), and are of lower value to the player than the 7 jackpot symbols described below. It is a jackpot pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a at a different position from a position where a first timer display XH1, which will be described later, is displayed. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, and has a different form (aspect) from the first timer display XH1. Further, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can display a two-digit number of seconds, but the number of seconds below the decimal point is omitted. In the illustrated example, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. In the second timer display XH2, 0 seconds is the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for prompting the player to press the production button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a little while after the second timer display XH2 starts counting down. In the figure, button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), jackpot symbol performance B is performed. In this jackpot symbol performance B, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of 7 symbols, that is, a jackpot symbol is formed by the zeros of the 7 symbols. These 7 jackpot symbols suggest that the gaming state after the jackpot will shift to a variable probability state (high probability time saving state), and are jackpot symbols that have higher value for the player than the above-mentioned 6 jackpot symbols. be.
Thereafter, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game shifts to a variable probability state (high probability high base state).

[Functional timer display performance C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the functional timer display effect C. Functional timer display performance C in FIG. 92 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the functional timer display effect C, as shown in FIG. 92(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the first timer display effect A is performed. In this first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below it. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double rectangular frame. It is possible to display the number of seconds until In the illustrated example, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. The target timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds (00:00).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed in the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 reaches 0 seconds, which is the target timer value. This is a 5 second performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a movable accessory action effect is performed. In this movable accessory actuation performance, the first movable accessory 14 is activated and moves from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. That is, this movable accessory activation performance is a performance in which the first movable accessory 14 is activated before the timer value of the first timer display XH1 reaches 0 seconds, which is the target timer value. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed darkly to emphasize that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the illustrated example, a darkened area on the display screen 7a where the first movable accessory 14 has passed is indicated by hatching. The figure also shows that the timer value is 04:50, which is earlier than the target timer value, in the first timer display XH1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), jackpot symbol performance A is performed. In this jackpot symbol performance A, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of 6 symbols, that is, a jackpot symbol is formed by the zeros of the 6 symbols. These 6 jackpot symbols suggest that the gaming state after the jackpot will shift to a low probability time saving state (low probability high base state), and are of lower value to the player than the 7 jackpot symbols described below. It is a jackpot pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a at a different position from a position where a first timer display XH1, which will be described later, is displayed. This second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, and has a different form (aspect) from the first timer display XH1. Further, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can display a two-digit number of seconds, but the number of seconds below the decimal point is omitted. In the illustrated example, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. In the second timer display XH2, 0 seconds is the target timer value to be reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, a button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for prompting the player to press the production button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a little while after the second timer display XH2 starts counting down. In the figure, button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), jackpot symbol performance B is performed. In this jackpot symbol performance B, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. At this time, each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of seven symbols, that is, a jackpot symbol is formed by the zeros of the seven symbols. These 7 jackpot symbols suggest that the gaming state after the jackpot will shift to a variable probability state (high probability time saving state), and are jackpot symbols that have higher value for the player than the above-mentioned 6 jackpot symbols. be.
Thereafter, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game, the game shifts to a variable probability state (high probability high base state).

[Modified example]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the function-specific timer display effects A to C are performed in the same variation, but the invention is not limited to this, and the function-specific timer display effects A to C are performed across multiple changes. You may also do so.
In the above functional timer display performances A to C, in the same variation, the first movable accessory 14 is activated based on the first timer display performance, a jackpot symbol performance is performed, and then the second timer display performance is performed. Although the jackpot symbol performance is performed based on this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot symbol performance is performed based on the second timer display performance, and then the first movable accessory 14 is performed based on the first timer display performance. may be activated, and a jackpot symbol presentation may be performed.
In the functional timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are countdown type timers, but the present invention is not limited to this, and either one of the two timers, or Both may be count-up timers.
In the function-specific timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 do not appear at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display The display XH2 may appear at the same timing.
In the function-specific timer display effects A to C, the button image XH3 is displayed after the second timer display XH2 is displayed, but the button image XH3 is not limited to this, and before the second timer display XH2 is displayed, or It may be displayed at the timing when the second timer display XH2 is displayed.
In the functional timer display performances A to C, when the second timer display XH2 appears and the button image XH3 is displayed, the jackpot symbol (decorative symbol The configuration was such that 7 jackpot symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are displayed, but if the button image XH3 does not appear even if the second timer display XH2 appears, the jackpot symbol will not upgrade and the jackpot will not be played. The same jackpot symbol as in symbol performance A may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the above functional timer display effects A to C, in the same variation, the first movable accessory 14 operates (moves) based on the first timer display XH1, and then the jackpot symbol is displayed based on the second timer display XH2. be done. According to this configuration, two different timer displays are performed with the same fluctuation and have different roles, one timer display operates the first movable accessory 14, and the other timer display displays the jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the timer effects from becoming boring and to improve the interest in the timer effects. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned functional timer display effects A to C, the first movable accessory 14 operates (moves) based on the first timer display XH1 in the same variation, and six symbols suggesting a jackpot with low comparative value for the player are displayed. A jackpot symbol is displayed, and then, based on the second timer display XH2, seven jackpot symbols suggesting a jackpot of relatively high value to the player are displayed. According to this configuration, two different timer displays are performed with the same fluctuation and have different roles, and one timer display activates the first movable accessory 14 and also suggests a jackpot that has low comparative value for the player. The player enjoys each timer display as the 6 jackpot symbols are displayed, and the other timer display displays 7 jackpot symbols that suggest a jackpot that is of relatively high value to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the timer effects from becoming boring and to improve the interest in the timer effects. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above functional timer display effect C, in the first timer display effect, the initial timer value of the first timer display XH1 is set and counted down, and before the timer value reaches the target of 0 seconds, the first movable The accessory 14 is configured to operate. According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the timer performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the functional timer display effects B and C, the display position of the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect is different from the display position of the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect. There is. According to this configuration, since the display position of the first timer display XH1 and the display position of the second timer display XH2 are different, the difference between the two timer displays can be clearly shown to the player. Therefore, the player can distinguish and enjoy the two timer displays, suppress the rut of the timer effects, and increase the interest in the timer effects. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the functional timer display effects B and C, the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect and the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect have different sizes. According to this configuration, since the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are different in size, the difference between the two timer displays can be clearly shown to the player. Therefore, the player can distinguish and enjoy the two timer displays, suppress the rut of the timer effects, and increase the interest in the timer effects. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing a plurality of display performances and a movable member,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance in which the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first aspect,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a first jackpot symbol based on a timer display of a second mode that is different from the timer display of the first mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
In the first display performance of the combination performance, the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first aspect, and a second jackpot symbol different from the first jackpot symbol is displayed,
The first jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol that is more valuable to the player than the second jackpot symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
In the first display performance of the combination performance, an initial timer value of the timer display of the first aspect is set and counted, and the timer value of the timer display of the first aspect reaches the target value. the movable member operates,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combination effect, the timer display in the first mode in the first display effect and the timer display in the second mode in the second display effect have different display positions on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
In the combination effect, the timer display in the first mode in the first display effect and the timer display in the second mode in the second display effect are different in size.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image transition effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 93 to 95. This specific image transition effect can be executed during the variation effect of the effect design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image transition effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Specific image transition effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start performance is a start performance of a battle performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93(D) to 93(F), image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, four images G1, G2, G3, and G4 called "FIGHT" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, image G1 is displayed at the top of display screen 7a, image G2 is displayed at the left side of display screen 7a, image G3 is displayed at the bottom of display screen 7a, and image G4 is displayed at the right side of display screen 7a. will be displayed.

In FIG. 93(D), the brightness of image G1, which is one of the four images "FIGHT", is set higher than the other images G2 to G4. As a result, the image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2 to G4.

In FIG. 93(E), the brightness of image G2, which is one of the four images "FIGHT", is set higher than the other images G1, G3, and G4. As a result, image G2 appears brighter than the other images G1, G3, and G4.

In FIG. 93(F), the brightness of image G4, which is one of the four images "FIGHT", is set higher than the other images G1 to G3. As a result, image G4 appears brighter than the other images G1 to G3.

In the image transition effect, images with higher brightness than other images are created in the order of image G1→image G2→image G3→image G4→image G1→.... As a result, in the image transition effect, a brightly displayed image of "FIGHT" is displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Note that while the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is being played out in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, during the image transition performance, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right performance symbol 8R is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(G), a winning/losing performance is executed. The victory/defeat decision performance is a performance that notifies the results of the battle performance. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA won the battle performance. If the friendly character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (hit) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and are determined to stop. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

[Specific image transition effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start performance is a start performance of a battle performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94(D) to 94(F), image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 forming the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed at the left of the display screen 7a, and the image G3 of "T" is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. , the "T" image G4 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the "L" image G5 is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a, and the "E" image G6 is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. will be displayed.

In FIG. 94(D), the brightness of the image G1 of "B", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the other images G2 to G6. As a result, the "B" image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 94(E), the brightness of the "T" image G4, which is one of the six images that make up the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6. are doing. As a result, the "T" image G4 appears brighter than the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6.

In FIG. 94(F), the brightness of the image G6 of "E", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the other images G1 to G5. As a result, the "E" image G6 appears brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In the image transition effect, image G1 of "B" → image G2 of "A" → image G3 of "T" → image G4 of "T" → image G5 of "L" → image G6 of "E" → image G6 of "B" Images with higher brightness than other images are created in the order of image G1→... As a result, in the image transition effect, each character constituting the character string "BATTLE" is displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Note that while the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is being played out in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, during the image transition performance, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right performance symbol 8R is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), a winning/losing effect is executed. The victory/defeat decision performance is a performance that notifies the results of the battle performance. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA won the battle performance. If the friendly character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (hit) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and are determined to stop. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

[Specific image transition effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining specific image transition effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), a battle start effect is executed. The battle start performance is a start performance of a battle performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the left effect pattern 8L is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95(D) to 95(F), image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 forming the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed on the left of the display screen 7a, and the image G3 of "T" is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The "T" image G4 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the "L" image G5 is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a, and the "E" image G6 is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. displayed in the section.

In addition, in the image transition effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward (advances) from the retracted position and stops at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The characters "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 are configured to be able to emit light independently one by one. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which not only the light is emitted but also the brightness can be adjusted.

In FIG. 95(D), the brightness of the image G1 of "B", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the other images G2 to G6. As a result, the "B" image G1 appears brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 95(E), the brightness of the image G6 of "E", which is one of the six images forming the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than the other images G1 to G5. As a result, the "E" image G6 appears brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In FIG. 95(F), the brightness of the character "O" (the rightmost "O"), which is one of the four characters that make up the character string "OARO", is set higher than the other characters. ing. As a result, the character "O" appears brighter than other characters.

In the image transition effect, "B" image G1 → "A" image G2 → "T" image G3 → "T" image G4 → "L" image G5 → "E" image G6 → "O" Create images and characters with higher brightness than other images in the following order: character → character "R" → character "A" → character "O" → image G1 of "B" →... . As a result, in the image transition effect, each character constituting the character strings "BATTLE" and "OARO" is displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise around the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Note that while the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is being played out in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, during the image transition performance, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right performance symbol 8R is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a winning/losing decision effect is executed. The victory/defeat decision performance is a performance that notifies the results of the battle performance. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA won the battle performance. If the friendly character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (hit) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and are determined to stop. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of specific image transition effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a plurality of images are displayed on the periphery of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and a specific image among the plurality of images is distinguished from the remaining images by changing the brightness of the images. By repeating the enabling process, a specific image among the plurality of images is transitioned. Specifically, four images "FIGHT" are displayed, and the character string "FIGHT" is transitioned by changing the brightness of the four images G1 to G4 (Fig. 93 (D) (E) (F) ). In addition, by changing the brightness of the six images G1 to G6 that make up the character string "BATTLE", each character transitions (Fig. 94 (D) (E) (F), Fig. 95 (D) (E)) (F)). According to this configuration, the display of the image on the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a becomes innovative, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that images G1 to G4 of "FIGHT" and images G1 to G6 forming the character string of "BATTLE" correspond to "predetermined images." Furthermore, brightness corresponds to a "color attribute." Furthermore, the image transition effects shown in FIGS. 93 to 95 correspond to "transition effects."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the image transition effect, a specific image among the plurality of images transitions counterclockwise toward the display screen 7a (FIGS. 93(D) to (F), FIG. 94 (D) to (F), Figures 95 (D) to (F)). According to this configuration, rotational movement can be added to the display of the image on the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the second movable accessory 15, and the characters forming the character string "OARO" emit light in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to add movement to the display of the image in the peripheral portion including the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the second movable accessory 15 corresponds to a "light-emitting part" and an "accessory".

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is played out in the center of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to add movement to the periphery of the battle performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the moving image of the battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB corresponds to the "image related to the predetermined image", and the battle effect corresponds to the "image display effect".

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the specific image transition effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the brightness of the image is changed in the transition effect, but the change is not limited to this, and any change may be made as long as the color attribute, which is the attribute of the display color of the predetermined image, is changed. The color attributes here include brightness, lightness, saturation, hue, and the like.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the specific image is transitioned counterclockwise in the transition effect, but it may also be transitioned clockwise. Further, in addition to clockwise or counterclockwise, the specific images may be transitioned in a predetermined order, or the specific images may be transitioned in a random order.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, the second movable accessory 15 was used to cause the characters constituting the character string "OARO" to emit light in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95(F)). On the other hand, the "light emitting section" may be realized as an image. For example, the characters "OARO" may be displayed as an image on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the second movable accessory 15 is employed as the "light emitting part", but there may be a plurality of "light emitting parts"; for example, four panel lamps may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a. .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having a display device,
By displaying a plurality of predetermined images on the periphery of the display screen of the display device, and changing the color attribute that is the display color attribute of the plurality of predetermined images, a specific image among the plurality of predetermined images can be changed to the remaining one. It is possible to perform a transition effect that transitions the specific image by repeating the process of making it distinguishable from the image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
In the transition effect, the specific image among the plurality of predetermined images transitions clockwise or counterclockwise toward the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or aspect B6-2,
further comprising a light-emitting section that is disposed near the peripheral edge of the display screen and is capable of emitting light;
the light emitting section emits light in accordance with the transition of the specific image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3,
The light emitting unit is displayed as an image on the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3,
The light emitting unit is arranged as an accessory on a peripheral part of the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-5,
In parallel with the transition effect, it is possible to execute an image display effect that displays an image related to the predetermined image in a specific area of the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image absorption effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 96 to 98. This specific image absorption performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image absorption effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Specific image absorption effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 96(C), 96(D), and 96(F), image rendering is performed. The image production is performed with the second movable accessory 15 moved so as to overlap the top of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Note that the image effect is subsequently executed also in the enlarged image display effect shown in FIG. 96(G) and the display color change effect shown in FIG. 96(H). On the second movable accessory 15, a character string "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is written.

As shown in FIG. 96(C), in the image production (initial stage), the leftmost characters "O", "A", and "R" are used to form the character string of the second movable accessory "OARO". Images TG1, TG2, and TG3 corresponding to are displayed. Then, the "O" image TG1 moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y3. Note that the image corresponding to the rightmost "O" forming the character string "OARO" is not displayed here.

Note that the moving speeds of images TG1 to TG3 may be the same or different. Further, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the images TG1 to TG3 may move in a linear trajectory, or may move in a curved trajectory so as to swing back and forth. Furthermore, the images TG1 to TG3 may be moved while rotating. Although any axis of rotation may be used at this time, it is conceivable to set the axis in a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a, for example.

As shown in FIG. 96(D), in the image production (middle stage), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 compared to the image production (initial stage). . The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to further approach "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. Further, the image TG2 of "A" moves as shown by the arrow Y2 and disappears near the second movable accessory 15 "A" (indicated by a broken line in the figure). For example, the image TG2 of "A" is reduced in size so as to be sucked into "A" of the second movable accessory 15, becomes more transparent, and disappears. When the "A" image TG2 disappears, a new "A" image TG4 is displayed. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y4. Furthermore, the image TG3 of "R" is closer to the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image rendering (initial stage). The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to further approach "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a chance effect is executed. The chance performance is a performance executed based on the degree of expectation of winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "Chance" is displayed. Note that the chance performance is not limited to such a performance, and may be a sound performance such as outputting a sound effect, for example.

As shown in FIG. 96(F), in the image production (later stage), the image TG5 of "O" is directed toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 on the display screen 7a, as shown by the arrow Y5. move above. The image TG6 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y6. The image TG7 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y7. The "O" image TG8 moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the right end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by an arrow Y8. The images TG5 to TG8 move toward the corresponding characters on the second movable accessory 15 and disappear near the characters.

In the image production (later stage), an image TG8 corresponding to "O" at the right end of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image production, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a and disappears, but the character string "O", "A", and "R" on the left end are displayed. This suggests that the expectation of winning is higher when the effect is performed with images corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" than when the effect is performed with the corresponding images. It has become. In other words, the corresponding character is determined based on the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, when a performance is performed using images corresponding to the "O" of "OARO", the performance may be performed using images corresponding to "O" and "A" of "OARO".

It should be noted that image effects are executed in parallel in subsequent effects as well, but since they are the same as the image effects (later stage), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display performance is a performance in which one of the characters targeted for performance corresponding to "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, an image UG of "O" is shown being displayed. The degree of expectation for winning may vary depending on the characters. Note that the display color of the "O" image UG is blue. The display color here may be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like. It also suggests that the expectation of winning is higher in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a display color change effect is executed. The display color change performance is a performance that changes the display color of an image enlarged and displayed in the enlarged image display performance. Here, a state in which the color of the "O" image UG is changed to red is shown. This is a performance that suggests that expectations for winning are high.

[Specific image absorption effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 97(C), (D), and (F), image rendering is performed. The image production is performed with the second movable accessory 15 moved so as to overlap the top of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Note that the image effect is subsequently executed also in the enlarged image display effect shown in FIG. 97(G) and the battle effect shown in FIG. 97(H). On the second movable accessory 15, a character string "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is written.

As shown in FIG. 97(C), in the image production (initial stage), among the plural characters that make up the character string of the second movable accessory "OARO", the leftmost characters "O", "A", and "R" Images TG1, TG2, TG3, TG4, and TG5 corresponding to are displayed. Then, the "O" image TG1 moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y3. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y4. The image TG5 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y5. Note that the image corresponding to the rightmost "O" forming the character string "OARO" is not displayed here.

Note that the moving speeds of images TG1 to TG5 may be the same or different. Further, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the images TG1 to TG5 may move in a straight line trajectory, or may move in a wavering curved trajectory. Furthermore, the images TG1 to TG5 may be moved while rotating. Although any axis of rotation may be used at this time, it is conceivable to set the axis in a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a, for example.

Here, images TG1 and TG2 correspond to "O" at the left end of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15. Further, images TG3 and TG4 correspond to the "A" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15. In this way, the images corresponding to the respective characters constituting the character string of the second movable accessory 15 may be a plurality of images. For example, three or more images may be associated with each character.

As shown in FIG. 97(D), in the image production (middle stage), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 compared to the image production (initial stage). . The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to further approach "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" is closer to "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial stage). The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to further approach "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y2. Further, the image TG3 of "A" moves as shown by the arrow Y3 and disappears near the second movable accessory 15 "A" (indicated by a broken line in the figure). For example, the image TG3 of "A" is reduced in size so as to be sucked into "A" of the second movable accessory 15, becomes more transparent, and disappears. The image TG4 of "A" is closer to "A" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial stage). The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a so as to further approach "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y4. The image TG5 of "R" is closer to the "R" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial stage). The image TG5 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to further approach "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), a chance effect is executed. The chance performance is a performance executed based on the degree of expectation of winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "Chance" is displayed. Note that the chance performance is not limited to such a performance, and may be a sound performance such as outputting a sound effect, for example.

As shown in FIG. 97(F), in the image production (later stage), the image TG6 of "O" is directed toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 on the display screen 7a, as shown by the arrow Y6. move above. The "O" image TG7 moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y8. The image TG9 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y9. The image TG10 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the right end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y10. The images TG6 to TG10 move toward the corresponding characters on the second movable accessory 15 and disappear near the characters.

In the image production (later stage), an image TG10 corresponding to the "O" at the right end of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image production, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a and disappears, but the character string "O", "A", and "R" on the left end are displayed. This suggests that the expectation of winning is higher when the effect is performed with images corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" than when the effect is performed with the corresponding images. It has become. In other words, the corresponding character is determined based on the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, when a performance is performed using images corresponding to the "O" of "OARO", the performance may be performed using images corresponding to "O" and "A" of "OARO".

It should be noted that image effects are executed in parallel in subsequent effects as well, but since they are the same as the image effects (later stage), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display performance is a performance in which one of the characters targeted for performance corresponding to "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, an image UG of "O" is shown being displayed. The degree of expectation for winning may vary depending on the characters. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "O" is red. The display color here may be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like. It also suggests that the expectation of winning is higher in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. The battle performance is performed in the display area of the "O" image UG after the "O" image UG disappears. In addition, winning is confirmed by winning the battle performance.

[Specific image absorption effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining specific image absorption effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 98(C), 98(D), and 98(F), image rendering is performed. The image production is performed with the second movable accessory 15 moved so as to overlap the top of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Note that the image effect is subsequently executed in the enlarged image display effect shown in FIG. 98(G) and the display color change effect shown in FIG. 98(H). On the second movable accessory 15, a character string "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is written.

As shown in FIG. 98(C), in the image presentation (initial stage), an image TG1 corresponding to "OA" among the plurality of characters constituting the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory is displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "OA" moves on the display screen 7a toward "OA" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. Further, here, the image of "OA" is larger than the "OA" of the second movable accessory 15. Note that, similar to the specific image absorption effect B, the number of "OA" images may be two or more.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the image TG1 may move in a straight line trajectory, or may move in a curved trajectory such that it swings back and forth. Furthermore, the image TG1 may be moved while rotating. Although any axis of rotation may be used at this time, it is conceivable to set the axis in a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a, for example.

As shown in FIG. 98(D), in the image production (mid-term), the image TG1 of "OA" moves as shown by the arrow Y1 and disappears in the vicinity of "OA" of the second movable accessory 15 ( (indicated by a dashed line in the figure). For example, the image TG1 of "OA" is reduced so as to be sucked into "OA" of the second movable accessory 15, becomes more transparent, and disappears. Note that the image TG1 of "OA" is reduced and becomes smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a chance effect is executed. The chance performance is a performance executed based on the degree of expectation of winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "Chance" is displayed. Note that the chance performance is not limited to such a performance, and may be a sound performance such as outputting a sound effect, for example.

As shown in FIG. 98(F), in the image production (later stage), the image TG2 of "OA" moves on the display screen 7a toward "OA" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y2. Moving. The image TG3 of "RO" moves on the display screen 7a toward "RO" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y3. The images TG2 and TG3 move toward the corresponding character string of the second movable accessory 15 and disappear near the character string.

In the image production (later stage), an image TG3 corresponding to "RO" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image production, an image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a, and disappears, but the production is performed with the image corresponding to "OA". This suggests that the expectation of winning is higher when the effect is performed using images corresponding to "OA" and "RO" than when the effect is performed using images corresponding to "OA" and "RO." In other words, the corresponding character string is determined based on the degree of expectation of winning.

It should be noted that image effects are executed in parallel in subsequent effects as well, but since they are the same as the image effects (later stage), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), an enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display performance is a performance in which one of the character strings that was the target of the performance corresponding to "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. . Here, the image UG of "OA" is shown being displayed. The degree of expectation of winning may vary depending on the character string. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "OA" is blue. The display color here may be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like. It also suggests that the expectation of winning is higher in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. The battle performance takes place in the display area of the "OA" image UG after the "OA" image UG disappears. In addition, winning is confirmed by winning the battle performance.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of specific image absorption effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image similar to the character displayed by the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the image is moved on the display screen 7a so as to approach the character of the second movable accessory 15. 96(C)(D)(F), FIG. 97(C)(D)(F), FIG. 98(C)(D)(F) )). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a performance that cooperates with the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second movable accessory 15 corresponds to a "display section," images TG1 to TG10 correspond to a "specific image," and the image effect corresponds to a "specific image effect."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 displays a plurality of characters "O", "A", "R", and "O", and in the image production, "O", "A", "R" A performance is performed targeting at least one of the letters "O" (Fig. 96 (C) (D) (F), Fig. 97 (C) (D) (F), Fig. 98 (C) (D )(F)). According to this configuration, a wide variety of effects can be produced in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the number of characters to be subjected to the image production among the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is determined based on the degree of expectation of winning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by the performance in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that "win" corresponds to "advantageous games that are advantageous to the player," and "advantageous games" include normal states (low-probability, low-probability, includes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the base state).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of characters targeted for image production among the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is increased while the production pattern is changing (FIG. 96(F), 97(F), FIG. 98(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by the performance in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) to be displayed in the image production among the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enlarged image display effect to be displayed at the lower center is executed (FIG. 96(G), FIG. 97(G), FIG. 98(G)). According to this configuration, one of the characters that was the target of the performance is enlarged and displayed, which can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

Note that the image UG corresponds to a "corresponding image", and the enlarged image display effect corresponds to an "image display effect".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for image production among the character strings "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is changed to The decision is made based on the degree of expectation for (FIG. 96(H), FIG. 97(G), FIG. 98(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning by using the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for image production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for image production among the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is changed. (Fig. 96(H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for winning by using the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for image production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. can.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the image UG, a battle effect is executed instead of the image UG (FIGS. 97(G)(H), FIG. 98(G)(H)). According to this configuration, the connection between performances becomes smooth, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific image absorption effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, images of the characters "O", "A", "R", and "O" constituting the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15, or images of the character strings "OA" and "RO" are used. I was doing image production. However, it is not necessary to limit it to such characters. That is, the "symbols displayed by the display section" include figures with meanings attached to them, such as marks and pictures.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the second movable accessory 15 was displaying the character string "OARO", but there is also an accessory that displays "O", an accessory that displays "A", and an accessory that displays "R". A plurality of display sections may be provided. For example, four display sections may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
Although the second movable accessory 15 is configured to be movable between the retracted position and the advanced position in the above example, it may be configured using a non-movable display section.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B7-1]
a display device capable of displaying images;
A gaming machine comprising: a display section disposed close to a peripheral portion of a display screen of the display device and displaying symbols;
A specific image that is similar to the symbol displayed on the display section is displayed on the display screen, and is moved on the display screen so as to approach the symbol on the display section. It is possible to perform a specific image production that causes the image to disappear in the vicinity.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1,
The display section displays a plurality of symbols,
In the specific image rendering, rendering is performed targeting at least one symbol among the plurality of symbols;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2,
In the specific image production, the number of symbols targeted for the specific image production among the plurality of symbols is determined based on the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2 or aspect B7-3,
In the specific image production, it is possible to increase the number of symbols targeted for the specific image production among the plurality of symbols while the production pattern is changing;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4,
Executing an image display effect of displaying a corresponding image obtained by enlarging an image corresponding to one of the symbols targeted for the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols in a specific area of the display screen of the display device. It is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5,
In the image display performance, the display color of the corresponding image is determined based on the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5 or aspect B7-6,
In the image display effect, the display color of the corresponding image can be changed while the effect pattern is changing;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-5 to B7-7,
In the image display effect, after displaying the corresponding image, a moving image can be displayed instead of the corresponding image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character string decomposition effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 99 to 101. This character string decomposition performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 if it contains an instruction to execute a character string decomposition effect, and reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[String decomposition effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining character string decomposition effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display performance is a performance that displays an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change performance is a performance that enlarges the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 99(E) and 99(F), constituent character effects are executed. The component character rendering is a rendering in which the characters "ch", "cha", "n", "s", and "!" that make up the character string "chance!" move in predetermined directions, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 99(E), in the constituent character rendering (first half), the character image K1 of "CH" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. Further, the character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y4. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y5.

As shown in FIG. 99(F), in the constituent character rendering (second half), each character image K1 to K5 further moves in addition to the movement in the constituent character rendering (first half). The character image K1 of "CH" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. Further, the character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y4. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

Note that the moving speeds of images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Further, the images K1 to K5 may be moved in a linear trajectory, or may be moved in a curved trajectory such that they waver.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, the loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at "5", and the middle production symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "6". Incidentally, at the same time as the fixed stop effect, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden.

[String decomposition effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining character string decomposition effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display performance is a performance that displays an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change performance is a performance that enlarges the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 100(E) and 100(F), constituent character effects are executed. The component character rendering is a rendering in which the characters ``chi'', ``cha'', ``n'', ``s'', and ``!'' that make up the character string ``Chance!'' rotate and move in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 100(E), in the constituent character rendering (first half), the character image K1 of "CH" moves diagonally downward and to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves approximately upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 100(F), in the constituent character rendering (second half), each character image K1 to K5 further moves in addition to the movement in the constituent character rendering (first half). The character image K1 of "CH" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves approximately upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

Note that the moving speeds of images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Further, the images K1 to K5 may be moved in a linear trajectory, or may be moved in a curved trajectory such that they waver. Furthermore, the rotation axes of the images K1 to K5 are also not limited. For example, the rotation axis may be the horizontal direction parallel to the display screen 7a, or the rotation axis may be the vertical direction parallel to the display screen 7a. Alternatively, a rotation axis having a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance. On the other hand, if the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, the loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, it is shown that the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are determined and stopped at "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined and stopped at "6". Incidentally, at the same time as the fixed stop effect, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden.

[String decomposition performance C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the character string decomposition effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a character string display effect is executed. The character string display performance is a performance that displays an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, a character string image MG "Chance!" is displayed, and a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed. It is assumed that the border of the frame image WG is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a frame line change effect is executed. The frame line change performance is a performance that enlarges the frame image WG displayed in accordance with the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the periphery of the display screen 7a. In particular, the border of the frame image is thicker, and the display color of the border is red. The display color of the border of the frame image WG suggests the degree of expectation for winning. For example, the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 101(E) and 101(F), constituent character effects are executed. The component character rendering is a rendering in which the characters ``chi'', ``cha'', ``n'', ``su'', and ``!'' that make up the character string ``Chance!'' rotate and move in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 101(E), in the constituent character rendering (first half), the character image K1 of "CH" moves diagonally downward and to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves approximately upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 101(F), in the constituent character rendering (second half), each character image K1 to K5 further moves in addition to the movement in the constituent character rendering (first half). The character image K1 of "CH" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves approximately upward on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" moves diagonally downward and to the right on the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" rotates clockwise around the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

Note that the moving speeds of images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Further, the images K1 to K5 may be moved in a linear trajectory, or may be moved in a curved trajectory such that they waver. Furthermore, the rotation axes of the images K1 to K5 are also not limited. For example, the rotation axis may be the horizontal direction parallel to the display screen 7a, or the rotation axis may be the vertical direction parallel to the display screen 7a. Alternatively, a rotation axis having a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB engage in a battle. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance. On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle performance, the loss is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined to stop in a winning manner. Here, a state where the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at "5" is shown. Incidentally, at the same time as the fixed stop effect, the variable icon 9C becomes hidden.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effects of character string decomposition.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character string display effect is executed to display the character string "Chance!" on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (FIG. 99(C), FIG. 100(C), FIG. 101( C)) Next, a constituent character effect is executed in which the characters "ch", "cha", "n", "s", and "!" that make up the character string are moved in predetermined directions, respectively (see FIG. 99 ( E) (F), Figure 100 (E) (F), Figure 101 (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the message quality is higher than that of simply displaying a character string, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the character string "Chance!" corresponds to a "symbol string" and a "character string", the character string display effect corresponds to the "first effect", and the characters "chi", "cha", and "n" that make up the character string ”, “S”, and “!” correspond to “constituent symbols” and “constituent characters”, and the constituent character effects correspond to “second effects”.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the component character presentation, the characters "ch", "cha", "n", "su", and "!" that make up the character string are rotated and moved in predetermined directions. (Fig. 100(E)(F), Fig. 101(E)(F)). According to this configuration, the message quality is higher than that of simply displaying a character string, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed in the character string display effect. According to this configuration, since the character string image MG is emphasized by the frame image WG, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Note that the frame image WG may be, for example, a "speech bubble" indicating a character's dialogue.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before executing the constituent character effect, a frame line change effect is executed to enlarge the boundary of the frame image WG to the periphery of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 99(D) and 100). (D), Figure 101(D)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be forced to pay attention to the next constituent character effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the frame line change effect is included in the "second effect."

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the constituent character presentation, the character "!" constituting the character string reaches the boundary of the frame image WG (FIG. 99(F), FIG. 100(F), FIG. 101( F)). According to this configuration, the component character presentation becomes dynamic and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the character string decomposition effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The above example was an example of displaying the character string "Chance!", but it is not limited to such a character string. The "symbol string" includes figures with meanings attached to them, such as marks and pictures.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the characters "ch", "cha", "n", "s", and "!" that make up the character string are rotated with the rotation axis perpendicular to the display screen 7a. You can. In that case, it is conceivable to model the characters "chi", "cha", "n", "su", and "!" as a three-dimensional model.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B8-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display device capable of displaying an image,
a first effect of displaying a symbol string on a display screen of the display device;
a second rendering in which constituent symbols constituting the symbol string displayed in the first rendering are moved in respective predetermined directions;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1,
the symbol string is a character string, and the constituent symbols are constituent characters;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1 or aspect B8-2,
In the second performance, the constituent symbols are moved while being rotated;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B8-1 to B8-3,
In the first performance, the symbol string is displayed, and a frame image surrounding the symbol string is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4,
In the second effect, after transforming the frame image, the constituent symbols are moved.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or aspect B8-5,
In the second rendering, at least a part of the constituent symbols reaches the boundary of the frame image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B8-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or aspect B8-6,
The display color of the frame image suggests the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the case of a 2R jackpot, two round games are played in the first jackpot 30. In this case, in one round game, when 10 game balls enter the first grand prize opening 30, the first grand prize opening 30 closes, and one game ball enters the first grand prize opening 30. When a ball wins, 10 game balls are paid out, that is, 100 game balls are paid out in one round game (if there is no over-win). Therefore, the number of game balls that can be paid out in a 2R jackpot is 200 if there is no over-win.
The jackpot game count display effects A to C shown below are effects that can appear when one of the two types of 2R jackpots is won.

The jackpot game count display performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 102 to 104. This jackpot game count display is executed while the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability, low base state), or a variable probability state (high probability, high base state) while the decorative symbols are being varied. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the jackpot game count display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Jackpot game count display effect A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining jackpot game count display effect A. The jackpot game count display performance A in FIG. 102 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display effect A, as shown in FIG. 102(A), first, after the decorative symbol variation effect, the reach effect is performed. In this ready-to-win effect, on the display screen 7a, seven decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is moved up and down at high speed to form a ready-to-reach state. Further, in this reach effect, a variation number display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. This variation number display XI6 represents the number of variations of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot. Further, on the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification performance, a 2R jackpot symbol indicating a 2R jackpot is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a special symbol (a symbol in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). The special symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification performance, the variable number display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), jackpot game performance A is performed. In this jackpot game performance A, on the display screen 7a, an acquired game ball number display XI1 is displayed on the right side, a count display XI2 is displayed approximately below the center, and a count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center. The acquired game ball number display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a count in a count-up method, and is represented by an integer greater than or equal to 0 in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game performance A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows the acquired ball as "0", and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display that suggests the count value targeted by the count display XI2 (possible final count value), and is written as "Aim for count 20!", indicating that the target value of the count display of the count display XI2 is It suggests that it is "20". In addition, in this jackpot game production A, the display of the number of fluctuations display XI6 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), jackpot game performance B is performed. In this jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game performance A. In addition, in this jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count displayed in the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count on the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired and put out increases by "100", the count on the count display XI2 increases by "1". In other words, when one round game (10 prizes entered into the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 increases by "10". In the jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the 1R round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired and put out balls do not include the game balls that were won in excess of 10 in the first grand prize opening 30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), jackpot game performance C is performed. In this jackpot game production C, an acquired game ball number display XI1, a count display XI2, and a count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game performance B. In addition, in this jackpot game performance C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "200", and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count displayed in the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count on the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of balls acquired and put out increases by "100", the count on the count display XI2 increases by "1". In other words, when one round game (10 prizes entered into the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 increases by "10". In the jackpot game production C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the 2R round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired and put out balls do not include the game balls that were won in excess of 10 in the first grand prize opening 30.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the following jackpot game production D will be performed, and if the current jackpot is a 2R potential probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot will be executed. Game performance E is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, jackpot game performance D is performed as shown in FIG. 102(F). In this jackpot game production D, a super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 is written as "entering super-bakusou mode" and is an image that suggests that the display mode after a jackpot will become super-bakusou mode.More specifically, the game state after a jackpot is a definite change state. This is an image that suggests something.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, a performance based on the super-bakusou mode is performed, that is, a performance suggesting that the state is in a variable state is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, jackpot game production E is performed as shown in FIG. 102(G). In this jackpot game performance E, a loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yururi mode suggestion image XI5 is written as "Entering Yururi mode" and is an image that suggests that the display mode after a jackpot will be Yururi mode. Specifically, the gaming state after a jackpot is a latent probability change state. This is an image that suggests.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the loose mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the state is in a latent probability change state is performed.

[Jackpot game count display effect B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining jackpot game count display performance B. The jackpot game count display performance B in FIG. 103 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display effect B, as shown in FIG. 103(A), first, a ready-to-win effect is performed after a decorative symbol variation effect. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is moved vertically at high speed to form a ready-to-reach state. Further, in this reach effect, a variation number display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. This variation number display XI6 represents the number of variations of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot. Further, on the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification performance, a 2R jackpot symbol indicating a 2R jackpot is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a special symbol (a symbol in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). The special symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification performance, the variable number display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), jackpot game performance A is performed. In this jackpot game performance A, on the display screen 7a, an acquired game ball number display XI1 is displayed on the right side, a count display XI2 is displayed approximately below the center, and a count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center. The acquired game ball number display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a countdown method, and is represented by an integer greater than or equal to 0 in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game production A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows that the acquired balls are "0", and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display that suggests the count value (possible final count value) that the count display XI2 is targeting, and is written as "Aim for count 0!", and indicates that the target value of the count display of the count display It suggests that it is "0". In addition, in this jackpot game production A, the display of the number of fluctuations display XI6 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), jackpot game performance B is performed. In this jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game performance A. In addition, in this jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired game balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by 10, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1, and when the number of balls acquired increases by 100, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1. In other words, when one round game (10 prizes entered into the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is decreased by "10". In the jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the 1R round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired and put out balls do not include the game balls that were won in excess of 10 in the first grand prize opening 30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a jackpot game performance C is performed. In this jackpot game production C, an acquired game ball number display XI1, a count display XI2, and a count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game performance B. In addition, in this jackpot game performance C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "200", and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired game balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by 10, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1, and when the number of balls acquired increases by 100, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1. In other words, when one round game (10 prizes entered into the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is decreased by "10". In the jackpot game production C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the 2R round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired and put out balls do not include the game balls that were won in excess of 10 in the first grand prize opening 30.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the following jackpot game production D will be performed, and if the current jackpot is a 2R potential probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot will be executed. Game performance E is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, jackpot game performance D is performed as shown in FIG. 103(F). In this jackpot game production D, a super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 is written as "entering super-bakusou mode" and is an image that suggests that the display mode after a jackpot will become super-bakusou mode.More specifically, the game state after a jackpot is a definite change state. This is an image that suggests something.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, a performance based on the super-bakusou mode is performed, that is, a performance suggesting that the state is in a variable state is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, jackpot game performance E is performed as shown in FIG. 103(G). In this jackpot game performance E, a loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yururi mode suggestion image XI5 is written as "Entering Yururi mode" and is an image that suggests that the display mode after a jackpot will be Yururi mode. Specifically, the gaming state after a jackpot is a latent probability change state. This is an image that suggests.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the loose mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the state is in a latent probability change state is performed.

[Jackpot game count display effect C]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot game count display effect C. The jackpot game count display performance C in FIG. 104 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the jackpot game count display performance C, as shown in FIG. 104(A), first, a ready-to-win performance is performed after a decorative symbol variation performance. In this ready-to-win effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol 8C is moved vertically at high speed to form a ready-to-reach state. Further, in this reach effect, a variation number display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. This variation number display XI6 represents the number of variations of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot. Further, on the display screen 7a, a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification performance, a 2R jackpot symbol indicating a 2R jackpot is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification performance, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at a special symbol (a symbol in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). The special symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. In addition, in the special jackpot notification performance, the variable number display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), jackpot game performance A is performed. In this jackpot game production A, on the display screen 7a, the number of acquired game balls display XI1 is displayed on the right side, the count display XI2 is displayed approximately below the center, the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center, and on the upper side The expectation level suggestion effect image XI7 is displayed. The acquired game ball number display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a countdown method, and is represented by an integer greater than or equal to 0 in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game production A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows that the acquired balls are "0", and the count display XI2 shows "20" in a hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display that suggests the count value (possible final count value) that the count display XI2 is targeting, and is written as "Aim for count 0!", and indicates that the target value of the count display of the count display It suggests that it is "0". In addition, in this jackpot game production A, the display of the number of fluctuations display XI6 is erased.

Further, the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7 is an image that suggests the expectation level that the jackpot in the special jackpot notification performance is a 2R probability variable jackpot, and the expectation level is suggested by the color of the effect. If the effect color is blue, the expectation of a 2R probability-variable jackpot is the lowest, and if the effect color is yellow, the expectation of a 2R probability-variation jackpot is higher than blue, and if the effect color is green, the expectation of a 2R probability-variation is the lowest. If the expectation level for a jackpot is higher than yellow and the effect color is purple, the expectation level for a 2R probability-variable jackpot is higher than green, and if the effect color is red, the expectation level for a 2R probability-variable jackpot is the highest. It is configured to be.
The expectation level suggestion effect image XI7 in this jackpot game production A has an effect color of blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), jackpot game performance B is performed. In this jackpot game performance B, the number of acquired game balls display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game performance A. In addition, in this jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "100", and the count display XI2 shows "10" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired game balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by 10, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1, and when the number of balls acquired increases by 100, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1. In other words, when one round game (10 prizes entered into the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is decreased by "10". In the jackpot game performance B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the 1R round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired and put out balls do not include the game balls that were won in excess of 10 in the first grand prize opening 30. In addition, in the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7, the effect changes from blue to green, indicating that the expectation level for the 2R probability change jackpot has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), jackpot game performance C is performed. In this jackpot game performance C, an acquired game ball number display XI1, a count display XI2, a count target suggestion display XI3, and an expectation level suggestion effect image XI7 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game performance B. In addition, in this jackpot game performance C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows the acquired balls as "200", and the count display XI2 shows "0" in a hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired game balls displayed on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count on the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of balls acquired on the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by 10, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1, and when the number of balls acquired increases by 100, the count on the count display XI2 decreases by 1. In other words, when one round game (10 prizes entered into the first big prize opening 30) is completed, the count display XI2 is decreased by "10". In the jackpot game production C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the 2R round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired and put out balls do not include the game balls that were won in excess of 10 in the first grand prize opening 30. In addition, in the expectation level suggestion effect image XI7, the effect changes from green to red, indicating that the expectation level for the 2R probability change jackpot has reached its peak.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the following jackpot game production D will be performed, and if the current jackpot is a 2R potential probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot will be executed. Game performance E is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R probability variable jackpot, jackpot game performance D is performed as shown in FIG. 104(F). In this jackpot game performance D, a super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 is written as "entering super-bakusou mode" and is an image that suggests that the display mode after a jackpot will become super-bakusou mode.More specifically, the game state after a jackpot is a definite change state. This is an image that suggests something.
Thereafter, on the display screen 7a, a performance based on the super-bakusou mode is performed, that is, a performance suggesting that the state is in a variable state is performed.

If the current jackpot is a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, jackpot game production E is performed as shown in FIG. 104(G). In this jackpot game performance E, a loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This Yururi mode suggestion image XI5 is written as "Entering Yururi mode" and is an image that suggests that the display mode after a jackpot will be Yururi mode. Specifically, the gaming state after a jackpot is a latent probability change state. This is an image that suggests.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the loose mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the state is in a latent probability change state is performed.

[Modified example]
In the above jackpot game count display productions A to C, the won game balls won in the won game ball number display XI1 do not include the game balls that were won in excess of 10 balls in the first big winning slot 30. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired and put out balls may include game balls that have won more than 10 balls in the first grand prize opening 30.
In the above jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the case of a special jackpot, that is, in the case of a 2R jackpot, jackpot game effects A to E are performed, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the above jackpot game count display effects A to C are performed. It is a configuration that cannot be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot game performance in the above-mentioned jackpot game count display performances A to C may also be performed when there is a 16R jackpot.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, during the jackpot game, the acquired game ball number display XI1 representing the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game and the count display XI2 representing the count are performed, and then the acquired game ball number The count display XI2 is changed in accordance with the change in the display XI1. According to this configuration, as the jackpot game (round game) progresses, the count display XI2 also progresses (according to the completion), so the mode announced at the end of the jackpot game is the super-bakusou mode. It is possible to gradually raise expectations for the game, and it is possible to liven up a relatively boring jackpot game (round game). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display productions A to C, in the jackpot game production, the acquired game ball number display XI1 does not change depending on the game balls obtained by entering a winning hole other than the first big winning hole 30, and the first It changes only by acquiring game balls based on winnings in the big winning hole 30. According to this configuration, the count display XI2 is clearly linked to winnings in the first big winning opening 30, so the player can easily recognize the progress of the jackpot game (round game), and at the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to gradually raise expectations that the announced mode is a super-bakusou mode, and it is possible to liven up a relatively boring jackpot game (round game). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, before the jackpot game effect (that is, at the time of reach effect or special jackpot notification effect), a variation number display XI6 representing the number of variations of the special symbol is performed. According to this configuration, by displaying the variable number of times display XI6 before the jackpot game performance, the more you get addicted to the game, the more you can gradually increase your expectations for the jackpot, and the subsequent jackpot game performance (round game) will be even more exciting. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display productions A to C, before the jackpot game production (that is, at the time of reach production or special jackpot notification production), the variation number display XI6 representing the number of variations of the special symbol is performed, and at the time of the jackpot game production, Reset (erased). According to this configuration, the fluctuating number of times display XI6 is performed before the jackpot game production, so that the more addicted the player becomes, the more the anticipation for the jackpot can be gradually increased, and the reset gives relief when the player wins. This makes it possible to further enhance the subsequent jackpot game performance (round game). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above jackpot game count display productions A to C, in the jackpot game production, after changing the count display XI2 according to the change in the acquired game ball number display XI1, at the end of the jackpot game, in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, a jackpot A super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 that suggests that the subsequent gaming state is a variable probability state is displayed, and in the case of a 2R latent probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is a time-saving state (low probability high base state). A loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed. According to this configuration, during the jackpot game, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed, and at the end of the jackpot game, the super-bakusou mode suggestion image XI4 or the mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed, so that the game The player can recognize the next mode before the player's excitement has cooled down due to the number of acquired game balls display XI1 and the count display XI2, and can greatly enjoy the performance during a relatively boring jackpot game. can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a number of acquired game media representing the number of game media acquired through the jackpot game and a count display representing a count during the jackpot game,
The second display performance is performed after the first display performance, and is a performance that changes the count display in accordance with a change in the display of the number of acquired game media.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-1,
The acquired game media display in the second display effect does not change depending on the game media acquired by entering a prize hole other than the big prize hole during the jackpot game, and is based on the game media won in the big prize hole. changes depending on the acquisition of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is performed before the first display performance, and is a performance that displays the number of fluctuations representing the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-3,
The variable number display in the third display effect is erased before the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-4,
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine selects one jackpot from a plurality of jackpots including a first jackpot and a second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that is performed after the second display performance and performs the first display when the jackpot is the first jackpot,
The fifth display performance is a performance that is performed after the second display performance and performs a second display different from the first display when the jackpot is a second jackpot,
The second display suggests that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the first display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the gaming state management process of FIG. ), the system shifts to play time (low-accuracy time-saving state). This play time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The double timer display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 105 to 107. This double timer display performance is executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols in a normal gaming state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a double timer display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Double timer display effect A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining double timer display effect A. Double timer display performance A in FIG. 105 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In double timer display effect A, as shown in FIG. 105(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a hold icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. At this time, the color of the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C is white. The pending icon 9A or the fluctuating icon 9C indicates the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the icon. In this case, if the icon color is white, it is the lowest expectation for a jackpot, if it is yellow, it is the third highest expectation for a jackpot, if it is green, it is the second highest expectation for a jackpot, and if it is red, it is the highest expectation for a jackpot. It has a high composition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display representing a count-up (timer operation) at a longer time interval than a second timer display XJ2, which will be described later. Specifically, it is a display representing a count-up every 15 seconds. In the first timer display XJ1, a timer value is displayed in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "00:00" indicating that the timer value is 0 seconds, and the color of the frame is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed when counting up. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display that indicates count-up at intervals longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is extinguished. This second timer display XJ2 is a display representing count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the above-described first timer display XJ1, and specifically, it is a display representing count-up every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "0" indicating that the timer value is 0 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display that indicates count-up at intervals of one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts up every second and the timer value is "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts up every 15 seconds and the timer value is "15:00". It becomes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and enlarges the surface of the display screen 7a, and the color of the frame changes from blue to green to red, etc. Note that the first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the front side to the back side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or the first timer display XJ1 may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a first timer extinction effect is performed. In this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), time-up effect A is performed. In this time-up effect A, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is re-displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes its appearance as in the first timer appearance change effect described above. Further, in this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "30:00" (30 seconds) and the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change. Further, at this time, the second timer display XJ2 indicates that the timer value is "25" (25 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed when the first timer display XJ1 times up, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed at the position where the first timer display XJ1 was displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A changes from blue to green (hatched area in the figure). This indicates that the change in hold improves the jackpot expectation in the change corresponding to the change in hold icon 9A. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation level has increased, and is written as "chance" in FIG. 105(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), time-up effect B is performed. In this time-up effect B, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. In this case, the timer value of the second timer display XJ2 becomes "30" (30 seconds) and the time is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(J), chance-up effect B is performed. This chance-up effect B is performed when the second timer display XJ2 times up, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A changes from green to red (see Fig. cross-hatched part). This change in hold indicates that the jackpot expectation level in the change corresponding to the change in hold icon 9A has further increased compared to the chance-up performance A. In FIG. 105(J), the chance-up image XJ3 is written as "super hot", suggesting that the expectation level of jackpot has increased even more than in the chance-up production A.

[Double timer display effect B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining double timer display effect B. Double timer display performance B in FIG. 106 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In double timer display effect B, as shown in FIG. 106(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a hold icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. At this time, the color of the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C is white. The pending icon 9A or the fluctuating icon 9C indicates the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the icon. In this case, if the icon color is white, it is the lowest expectation for a jackpot, if it is yellow, it is the third highest expectation for a jackpot, if it is green, it is the second highest expectation for a jackpot, and if it is red, it is the highest expectation for a jackpot. It has a high composition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display that represents a countdown (timer operation) at a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described later, and specifically, it is a display that represents a countdown in which the timer value is every 20 seconds. . In the first timer display XJ1, a timer value is displayed in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "40:00" indicating that the timer value is 40 seconds, and the color of the frame is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed at the time of countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals longer than one second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is extinguished. This second timer display XJ2 is a display representing a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the above-described first timer display XJ1, and specifically, a display representing a countdown every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the second timer display XJ2 displays "20" indicating that the timer value is 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals of one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second and the timer value is "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts down every 20 seconds and the timer value is "20:00". ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and enlarges the surface of the display screen 7a, and the color of the frame changes from blue to green to red, etc. Note that the first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the front side to the back side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or the first timer display XJ1 may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), a first timer extinction effect is performed. In this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), time-up effect A is performed. In this time-up effect A, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the timer value becomes "0" (0 seconds) and the timer is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed when the second timer display XJ2 times up, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A changes from blue to green (see Fig. (hatched part). This indicates that the change in hold improves the jackpot expectation in the change corresponding to the change in hold icon 9A. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation level has increased, and is written as "chance" in FIG. 106(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(I), time-up effect B is performed. In this time-up effect B, the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed approximately at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes its appearance as in the first timer appearance change effect described above. Further, in this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "00:00" (0 seconds) and the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(J), chance-up effect B is performed. This chance-up effect B is performed when the first timer display XJ1 times up, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A changes from green to red (see Fig. cross-hatched part). This change in hold indicates that the jackpot expectation level in the change corresponding to the change in hold icon 9A has further increased compared to the chance-up performance A. In FIG. 106(J), chance-up image XJ3 is written as "super hot", suggesting that the expectation level of jackpot has increased even more than in chance-up effect A.

[Double timer display effect C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display effect C. Double timer display performance C in FIG. 107 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In double timer display effect C, as shown in FIG. 107(A), first, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a hold icon 9A and a change icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. At this time, the color of the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C is white. The pending icon 9A or the fluctuating icon 9C indicates the expected jackpot by the color of the icon. In this case, if the icon color is white, it is the lowest expectation for a jackpot, if it is yellow, it is the third highest expectation for a jackpot, if it is green, it is the second highest expectation for a jackpot, and if it is red, it is the highest expectation for a jackpot. It has a high composition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), a first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This first timer display XJ1 is a display representing a countdown (timer operation) at a longer time interval than a second timer display XJ2, which will be described later. Specifically, it is a display representing a countdown every 10 seconds. In the first timer display XJ1, a timer value is displayed in a rectangular frame. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the first timer display XJ1 displays "20:00" representing 20 seconds, and the color of the frame is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed during countdown. Note that the first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals longer than one second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, a second timer display XJ2 is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. During this second timer display performance, the first timer display XJ1 is extinguished. This second timer display XJ2 is a display representing a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the above-described first timer display XJ1, and specifically, a display representing a countdown every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107(C), the second timer display XJ2 is displaying "20" representing 20 seconds. This second timer display XJ2 continues to be displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. Note that the second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals of one second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), a first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second and shows "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts down every 10 seconds and shows "10:00". That is, the timer values of the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the first timer display XJ1 rotates and enlarges the surface of the display screen 7a, and the color of the frame changes from blue to green to red, etc. Note that the first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the front side to the back side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or the first timer display XJ1 may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), a first timer extinction effect is performed. In this first timer disappearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a time-up effect is performed. In this time-up effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is displayed approximately at the center. In this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "00:00" (0 seconds) and time is up, and the timer value of the second timer display XJ2 becomes "0" (0 seconds). The timer will go up. At this time, the first timer display XJ1 changes its appearance as in the first timer appearance change effect described above. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a chance-up effect is performed. This chance-up effect is performed when the first timer display XJ1 and second timer display XJ2 time up, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and the pending icon 9A changes from blue to red. (cross-hatched area in the figure). This indicates that due to the change in hold, the jackpot expectation level in the change corresponding to the change in hold icon 9A increases significantly. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot has increased, and in FIG. 107(H), it is written as "super hot", suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot has increased significantly.

In the above-mentioned double timer display effects A to C, the aspect of the second timer display XJ2 does not change. However, a configuration in which the aspect of the second timer display XJ2 changes may also be used. For example, the second timer display XJ2 may be enlarged or reduced, its color may change, it may rotate, or an effect may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 performs a timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display) at a relatively long time interval (20 seconds in double timer display effect B) in the same fluctuation; A second timer display XJ2 is performed at relatively short time intervals (0.01 seconds). According to this configuration, it is possible to experience two timer displays on different time axes, it is possible to give a sense of thrill and surprise to the timer display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the timer performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at the timing of the timer operation display (count-up display or countdown display) in the first timer mode change effect, and the second timer display XJ2 displayed larger than. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the first timer display XJ1 on the player, that is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the timer displays having two different time axes, and it is possible to make the first timer display It can attract players' interest. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 changes in a predetermined manner at the timing of timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, the first timer display XJ1 can impress the player by changing the aspect of the first timer display XJ1, that is, the timer displays having two different time axes can be easily recognized by the player. The player's interest can be drawn to two different timer displays. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 rotates at the timing of timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, by rotating the first timer display XJ1, it is possible to impress the first timer display XJ1 on the player, that is, it is easy for the player to recognize the timer displays having two different time axes. The player's interest can be drawn to two different timer displays. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 changes color at the timing of timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, by changing the color of the first timer display XJ1, it is possible to impress the first timer display XJ1 on the player, that is, the player can recognize the timer displays having two different time axes. The player's interest can be drawn to two different timer displays. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XJ-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that performs a first timer display that performs a timer operation display at relatively long time intervals,
The second display performance is a performance that performs a second timer display that displays a timer operation at relatively short time intervals,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed in the same variation.
[Aspect XJ-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-1,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect is displayed larger than the second timer display at a timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-2,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect changes a predetermined aspect at the timing of displaying the timer operation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-3,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect rotates as the predetermined aspect change at a timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XJ-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XJ-3 or aspect XJ-4,
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect changes color as the predetermined mode change at a timing when the timer operation display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when a jackpot is hit, the gaming state after the jackpot is a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state) and a time saving gaming state (low probability high base state). However, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 in both the probability variable game state or the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state.
Here, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the following three jackpots may be provided.
1. After the jackpot, the gaming state changes to the variable probability gaming state, and when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number of times, the jackpot K1 shifts to the normal gaming state.
2. After the jackpot, the gaming state changes to the variable probability gaming state, and when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times, the jackpot K2 shifts to the normal gaming state.
3. After hitting the jackpot, the gaming state changes to the variable probability gaming state, and when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number, the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, and further, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number, the normal gaming state Jackpot K3 moving to.
The jackpots K1 to K3 are selected with a predetermined probability of a jackpot.

The final screen display effect A described below represents the display effect after the jackpot game based on the jackpot K1, the final screen display effect B represents the display effect after the jackpot game based on the jackpot K2, and the final screen display effect C is the display effect after the jackpot game based on the jackpot K2. , represents the display performance after the jackpot game based on the jackpot K3.
Further, in this embodiment, the first specified number of times is 100 times, and the second specified number of times is 200 times. However, the first specified number of times is not limited to this, and may be any number as long as it is smaller than the second specified number of times. The second prescribed number of times may be any number as long as it is greater than the first prescribed number of times.
Note that the normal gaming state is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, so it is also called a disadvantageous gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state are gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player. These are also collectively referred to as advantageous gaming states.

The final screen display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 108 to 110. This final screen display performance is executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols in the normal gaming state, time saving state (low probability low base state), or variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the final screen display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Final screen display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect A. This final screen display performance A includes a variable probability game performance, a result information display performance, and a normal game performance. The variable probability game effect is a display effect of the variation when the number of variations of the special symbol is 5 remaining until the first specified number of times in the variable probability game state (high probability high base state) that enters after the jackpot K1, and the result information display The performance is a display performance in the variation when the first prescribed number of times (100 times) is reached, and the normal game performance is the display performance in the variation when the state shifts to the normal game state. In this result information display effect A, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In the final screen display effect A, a variable probability game effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108(A) in a variable probability game state after the jackpot K1. In this variable probability game production, on the display screen 7a, a right-handed hit suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, a probability variable suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, a probability variable remaining count display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and a decorative symbol 8L is displayed approximately in the center. , 8C, and 8R are performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is a display that urges the player to play right-handed. The probability variation suggestion display XK2 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. The variable probability remaining count display XK3 is a display indicating how many more times the variable probability gaming state will continue. This number represents the number of changes in the special symbol. In FIG. 108(A), since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 5 times until the first specified number of times, the remaining probability variation display XK3 is displayed as "5 times left".

Next, after the jackpot K1, when the first prescribed number of times (100 times) is reached, a result information display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108(B). In this result information display effect, a result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the gaming state during the current consecutive games. "Continuously playing" refers to the period after hitting a jackpot in the normal gaming state (also called the first jackpot), changing to the variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state, and then returning to the normal gaming state (excluding when playing a jackpot) means. For example, "6 consecutive wins" means that after the first jackpot hit, the player hit the jackpot six times, including the first jackpot, before returning to the normal gaming state (excluding when playing a jackpot game). In addition, the information representing the result of the gaming state during a consecutive game includes the acquired ball information (expressed as "acquisition" in the result information display XK4) that represents the acquired balls acquired during a consecutive game, and the successive game information that represents the number of consecutive games. Information on the number of attempts (in the result information display XK4, it is expressed as "number of consecutive attempts"), and average time information (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4), which represents the average time it takes to win the jackpot during consecutive attempts. , rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as "rank" in result information display XK4). For example, if the number of consecutive wins is 6 and the time spent to win the jackpot 6 times is 15 minutes, the average time information is 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Also, the rank information will increase in rank in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of consecutive attempts. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 108(B), the acquired ball information is "Obtained: 5312 balls", the number of consecutive attempts information is "Number of consecutive attempts: 6 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds" ”, and the rank information is “Rank: A”. In the result information display performance, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state is entered, a normal game performance is performed as shown in FIG. 108(C). In this normal game performance, the right-hand hit suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating.

[Final screen display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect B. This final screen display performance B includes a variable probability game performance A, a result information display performance A, an advantageous gaming state continuation performance, a variable probability game performance B, a result information display performance B, and a normal game performance. Probability variable game production A is a display production when the number of variations of the special symbol is 5 times remaining up to the first specified number in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) that enters after the jackpot K2, and is a result information display production. A is the display performance for the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the advantageous gaming state continuation performance is the display performance for the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) has been reached. This is a display performance that is performed after the result information display performance A, and the variable probability game performance B is a display performance in the variation when the number of variations of the special symbol is 3 times remaining until the second specified number of times in the variable probability game state. , Result information display performance B is a display performance in a variation when the second specified number of times is reached in a variable probability gaming state, and a normal game performance is a display performance in a variation when the game shifts to a normal gaming state. In this final screen display effect B, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

In the final screen display effect B, in the variable probability game state after the jackpot K2, the variable probability game effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 109(A). In this variable probability game production A, on the display screen 7a, a right-handed hit suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, a probability variable suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, a probability variable remaining number of times display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and a decorative symbol is displayed approximately in the center. Variation effects of 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is a display that urges the player to play right-handed. The probability variation suggestion display XK2 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. The variable probability remaining count display XK3 is a display indicating how many more times the variable probability gaming state will continue. This number represents the number of changes in the special symbol. In FIG. 109(A), since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 5 times until the first prescribed number, the remaining probability variation display XK3 is displayed as "5 times left".

Next, after the jackpot K2, when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, result information display effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 109(B). In this result information display effect A, result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the game in the current series of games. "Continuously playing" refers to the period after hitting a jackpot in the normal gaming state (also called the first jackpot), changing to the variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state, and then returning to the normal gaming state (excluding when playing a jackpot) means. For example, "6 consecutive wins" means that after the first jackpot hit, the player hit the jackpot six times, including the first jackpot, before returning to the normal gaming state (excluding when playing a jackpot game). In addition, the information representing the results of the games during the consecutive games includes the acquired ball output information (written as "acquisition" in the result information display XK4) that represents the acquired balls obtained during the consecutive games, and the number of consecutive games that represents the number of consecutive games. Number of times information (expressed as "Number of consecutive matches" in the result information display XK4), average time information (expressed as "average time" in the result information display XK4) representing the average time until winning the jackpot during consecutive matches, Rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as "rank" in result information display XK4) is included. For example, if the number of consecutive wins is 6 and the time spent to win the jackpot 6 times is 15 minutes, the average time information is 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Also, the rank information will increase in rank in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of consecutive attempts. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 109(B), the acquired ball information is "Obtained: 5312 balls", the number of consecutive attempts information is "Number of consecutive attempts: 6 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds" ”, and the rank information is “Rank: A”. In the result information display performance, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, after the result information display effect A is completed with a first prescribed number of changes (100 times) in the variable probability gaming state, an advantageous gaming state continuation effect is performed as shown in FIG. 109(C). In this advantageous gaming state continuation performance, a state suggestion display XK5 indicating that an advantageous gaming state (here, a variable probability gaming state) will be displayed is displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 109(C), the state suggestion display XK5 is written as "Continue advantageous gaming state!". In addition, in the advantageous gaming state continuation display performance, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, the variable probability gaming state is continued, and as shown in FIG. 109(D), variable probability gaming state performance B is performed. In this variable probability game performance B, on the display screen 7a, a right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed in the upper left, a probability variable suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, a probability variable remaining number of times display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and a decoration is displayed approximately in the center. A variation effect of symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, and an ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. In FIG. 109(D), since the number of variations of the special symbol remains three times until the second specified number of times, the remaining probability variation display XK3 is displayed as "3 more times".

Next, when the variation reaches the second specified number of times in the variable probability gaming state, result information display effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 109(E). In this result information display performance B, a result information display XK6 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK6 includes information representing the result of the game in the current series of games. Also, in the result information display XK6, the information representing the results of games during consecutive matches is the same as the result information display XK4. ''), information on the number of consecutive matches (represented as "number of consecutive matches" on the result information display XK4), and average time information (results) indicating the average time it takes to win the jackpot during consecutive matches In the information display XK4, it is written as "average time"), and rank information indicating a predetermined rank (in the result information display XK4, it is written as "rank"). In the result information display XK6 of FIG. 109(E), the acquired ball information is "Obtained: 10,000 balls", the number of consecutive attempts information is "Number of consecutive attempts: 12 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds". ”, and the rank information is “Rank: S”. In the result information display performance, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, a normal game performance is performed as shown in FIG. 109(F). In this normal game performance, the right-hand hit suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating.

[Final screen display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect C. This final screen display performance C includes a variable probability game performance, a result information display performance A, an advantageous gaming state continuation performance, a time saving game performance, a result information display performance B, and a normal game performance. The probability change game performance is a display performance when there are only 5 variations of the special symbol remaining up to the first specified number in the probability variation game state (high probability high base state) that enters after the jackpot K3, and result information display performance A is the display effect for the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the advantageous gaming state continuation effect is the display effect for the change when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached. This is a display performance that is performed after the result information display performance A, and the time-saving game performance is a display performance that is performed when the number of changes of the special symbol is 10 times remaining until the second specified number of times in the time-saving game state that shifts after the first specified number of times. Result information display performance B is a display performance during fluctuations when the second specified number of times is reached in the time-saving gaming state, and normal game performance is a display performance during fluctuations when transitioning to the normal gaming state. It is a display performance. In this final screen display performance C, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In the final screen display effect C, a variable probability game effect is performed as shown in FIG. 110(A) in the variable probability game state after the jackpot K3. In this variable probability game production, on the display screen 7a, a right hit suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, a probability variable suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, a probability variable remaining number of times display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and a decorative symbol 8L is displayed approximately in the center. , 8C, and 8R are performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. The right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is a display that urges the player to play right-handed. The probability variation suggestion display XK2 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. The variable probability remaining number of times display XK3 is a display indicating how many more times the variable probability gaming state will continue. This number represents the number of changes in the special symbol. In FIG. 110(A), since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 5 times until the first specified number of times, the remaining number of probability variations display XK3 is displayed as "5 times left".

Next, after the jackpot K3, when the first prescribed number of times (100 times) is reached, result information display effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 110(B). In this result information display effect A, result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the gaming state during the current consecutive games. "Continuously playing" refers to the period after hitting a jackpot in the normal gaming state (also called the first jackpot), changing to the variable probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state, and then returning to the normal gaming state (excluding when playing a jackpot) means. For example, "6 consecutive wins" means that after the first jackpot hit, the player hit the jackpot six times, including the first jackpot, before returning to the normal gaming state (excluding when playing a jackpot game). In addition, the information representing the result of the gaming state during a consecutive game includes the acquired ball information (expressed as "acquisition" in the result information display XK4) that represents the acquired balls acquired during a consecutive game, and the successive game information that represents the number of consecutive games. Information on the number of attempts (in the result information display XK4, it is expressed as "number of consecutive attempts"), and average time information (indicated as "average time" in the result information display XK4), which represents the average time it takes to win the jackpot during consecutive attempts. , rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as "rank" in result information display XK4). For example, if the number of consecutive wins is 6 and the time spent to win the jackpot 6 times is 15 minutes, the average time information is 2 minutes and 30 seconds. Also, the rank information increases in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of consecutive attempts. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 110(B), the acquired ball information is "Obtained: 5312 balls", the number of consecutive attempts information is "Number of consecutive attempts: 6 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds" ”, and the rank information is “Rank: A”. In the result information display performance, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, after the result information display effect A has been changed by the first prescribed number of times (100 times), an advantageous gaming state continuation effect is performed as shown in FIG. 110(C). In this advantageous gaming state continuation performance, a state suggestion display XK7 indicating that an advantageous gaming state (here, a time-saving gaming state) will be displayed is displayed at approximately the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 110(C), the state suggestion display XK7 is written as "Continue advantageous gaming state! Enter time-saving gaming state." In addition, in the advantageous gaming state continuation display performance, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the time-saving game state is entered and there are 10 changes remaining until the second specified number of times, a time-saving game performance is performed as shown in FIG. 110(D). In this time-saving game production, on the display screen 7a, a right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed in the upper left, a time-saving suggestion display XK8 is displayed in the upper right, a remaining time-saving number display XK9 is displayed in the lower right, and a decorative symbol is displayed approximately in the center. Variation effects of 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the bottom. In FIG. 110(D), since the number of variations of the special symbol remains 10 times until the second specified number of times, the time saving remaining number display XK9 is displayed as "10 times left".

Next, when the variation reaches the second specified number of times in the variable probability gaming state, result information display effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 110(E). In this result information display performance B, a result information display XK10 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This result information display XK10 includes information representing the result of the game in the current series of games. Also, in the result information display XK10, the information representing the results of the games during the consecutive matches is the same as the result information display XK4. ''), information on the number of consecutive matches (represented as "number of consecutive matches" on the result information display XK4), and average time information (results) indicating the average time it takes to win the jackpot during consecutive matches In the information display XK4, it is written as "average time"), and rank information indicating a predetermined rank (in the result information display XK4, it is written as "rank"). In the result information display XK6 of FIG. 110(E), the acquired ball information is "Obtained: 10,000 balls", the number of consecutive attempts information is "Number of consecutive attempts: 12 times", and the average time information is "Average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds". ”, and the rank information is “Rank: S”. In the result information display performance, the right-handed hitting suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, a normal game performance is performed as shown in FIG. 110(F). In this normal game performance, the right-hand hit suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating.

In the final screen display performances B to C, although the result information display performance A is performed and the result information display XK4 is displayed, the advantageous gaming state is continued without returning to the normal gaming state. Game information such as jackpots and acquired balls in the advantageous gaming state after the result information display XK4 is included in the information representing the results of the games during the series of results information display XK6 and result information display XK10. For example, in the above-mentioned final screen display performance B, the acquired balls represented by the acquired ball information on the result information display XK4 is 6000 balls, and in the advantageous gaming state after the display of the result information display XK4, you hit the jackpot and receive an additional 1000 balls. , and after playing a jackpot game, if the special symbols are changed to display result information display XK4 or result information display XK6, the acquisition represented by the acquired ball information on result information display XK4 or result information display XK6 The number of balls that will be rolled out will be 7000 balls.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned final screen display effects A to C, when entering the normal game effect (normal game state) and reaching the third specified number of times, a configuration may be adopted in which the state shifts to the time-saving game state. In this case, game information such as jackpots, acquired balls, etc. in this time-saving game state may be included in the information representing the results of the games during the consecutive games in the result information display that is displayed thereafter.

[Effect example]
In the above final screen display effects B to C, when the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player (variable probability gaming state, time saving gaming state), the number of changes of the special symbol is set to the first specified value (for example, This is a display that suggests that the advantageous gaming state will end and the gaming state will shift to a disadvantageous gaming state (normal gaming state) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player based on the fact that the number of consecutive games is reached (100 times). A result information display XK4 representing the result of the jackpot game is performed, and then a display suggesting an advantageous gaming state (state suggestion display XK5 and probability change suggestion display XK2, or state suggestion display XK7 and time-saving gaming state suggestion display XK8) is performed. ). According to this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a shift to an unfavorable gaming state is displayed, the advantageous gaming state can continue even after that, so the player can avoid the result information display XK4 being displayed. Even when the player is playing the game, the user can maintain the desire to continue the advantageous gaming state, and the player can be highly interested in the progress of the display effects until the game actually shifts to the normal gaming state. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned final screen display effect C, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, the variable probability gaming state ends and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs based on the number of variations of the special symbol reaching the first specified value. A result information display XK4 indicating the result of the jackpot game in the series is performed, and thereafter a state suggestion display XK7 indicating that the game is in a time-saving game state is performed. According to this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a transition to the normal gaming state is displayed, the time-saving gaming state may continue after that, so the player can , it is possible to maintain the desire to continue the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to give high interest to the progress of the display performance until the actual transition to the normal gaming state. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned final screen display performance C, the state suggestion display XK7 is performed even though the result information display XK4 is performed, and after that, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol changes to the second Based on the fact that the specified value (for example, 200) has been reached, result information display XK10 representing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive games is performed. In other words, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a transition to the normal gaming state is displayed, the state suggestion display XK7 is displayed and the time-saving gaming state continues after that, and from there the number of changes in the special symbol changes. When the specified value of 2 is reached, result information display XK10 is performed. According to this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can maintain his desire for the time-saving gaming state until the second result information display XK10 is displayed, and during that time, It is possible to give players a high level of interest in display effects. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the final screen display performance C, the state suggestion display XK7 is performed even though the result information display XK4 is performed, and after that, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, and the number of changes in the special symbol changes to the second Based on the fact that the specified value (for example, 200) has been reached, result information display XK10 representing the result of the jackpot game in the series is performed, and the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. That is, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting a transition to the normal gaming state is displayed, the state suggestion display XK7 is displayed and the time-saving gaming state continues after that, and from there the number of changes in the special symbol changes to the second When the specified value is reached, result information display XK10 is performed, and the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. According to this configuration, even if the first result information display It is possible to add a high level of interest to the performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the final screen display performances B to C, the result information display XK4 and the status suggestion display XK7 each include information representing the number of consecutive games and information representing the number of acquired balls. According to this configuration, the number of consecutive matches and the number of acquired balls can be notified to the player at the same time, and it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment in the consecutive matches. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XK-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The gaming machine allows a game to be played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player;
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is such that when the gaming state is the second gaming state, the second gaming state ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching a first specified value. The display is a display suggesting a transition to the first gaming state, and is an effect of displaying first result information representing the result of a jackpot game during a series of matches;
The second display performance is a performance that performs a state suggestion display that suggests the second gaming state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-1,
The second gaming state is either a variable probability gaming state or a time saving gaming state,
In the combination performance, in the first display performance, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, the variable probability gaming state ends based on the number of variations of the special symbol reaching the first specified value. Then, in the second display effect, a first result information display is performed, which is a display suggesting that the game state is to be shifted to the first game state, and is a display indicating the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive games. Displays a status indication indicating that the game is in a gaming status.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-2,
In the combination performance, after the state suggestion display is performed in the second display performance, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving game state, and thereafter, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a second specified value. Displaying second result information representing the results of the jackpot game during the consecutive games based on the
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-3,
In the combination performance, after the second result information is displayed, the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the first gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XK-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XK-4,
The first result information display and the second result information display each include information representing the number of consecutive matches and information representing the number of acquired gaming media;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, promotion suspension continuous effects A to C will be explained using FIGS. 111 to 113. The characteristic performance of this promotion pending performance is the promotion performance (with a pending continuous performance) that is executed after a win is announced. In this embodiment, the performance during the jackpot will be included in the promotion pending performance and will be explained. In addition, the promotion performance (with reservation series) is characterized by notifying that there is a winning reservation among the first special symbol reservations (hereinafter also referred to as "hold series").

[Promotion pending performance A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining promotion suspension continuous effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a winning notification effect is executed. The hit notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won by using the modes of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass V." Note that the stage of the hit notification performance is different from the confirmed stop performance, in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed here that there is a reservation that is the first special figure reservation corresponding to the reservation icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), a sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the operation of the sword member 65. Here, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push in" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the next performance is executed. Note that even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next performance is executed when the valid time for operating the sword member 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), a promotion effect (with a pending series) is executed. In the promotion performance (with hold series), the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) from the retreat position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stops at the advance position in the front center of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into two by the first movable accessory 14 into a left screen and a right screen. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as "7" on the left screen. This means that what was announced as a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" has been upgraded to "a jackpot that is scheduled to pass through 16RV." Furthermore, a message image MG "V" is displayed on the right screen. This is to notify you of a pending connection. Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(E), jackpot performance A is executed. The jackpot performance A is a performance that digests the jackpot in the previous fluctuation (hereinafter also referred to as "the jackpot"). Also here, the first movable accessory 14 remains stationary at the forward center position in front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on the upper left of the left screen. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is being performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed. Here again, the message image MG "V" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(F), a movable body movement effect is executed. The movable body movement effect is a effect in which the first movable accessory 14, which has been stationary at an advanced position in the front center of the display screen 7a, slowly moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown by arrow Y. be. As the first movable accessory 14 moves, the area of the right screen expands. On this right side screen, instead of the message display MG "V", production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7". This means that the pending group has hit the jackpot due to passing 16 RVs. Note that the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed at the time when the first movable accessory 14 starts moving, and when the first movable accessory 14 moves to a position close to the left end of the display screen 7a, the performance symbols 8L, 8R, 8C and 8R may be displayed to give the player expectations regarding the type of jackpot. The first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position and remains stationary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(G), jackpot performance B is executed. The jackpot performance performance B is a performance that eliminates the pending series. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left corner. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is being performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(H), a status notification effect is executed. The status notification performance is for notifying the gaming status. Here, a message image MG saying "It's still going on!" is displayed. This means that the next fluctuation will lead to a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

[Promotion pending performance B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining promotion suspension continuous performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a winning notification effect is executed. The hit notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won by using the modes of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass V." Note that the stage of the hit notification performance is different from the confirmed stop performance, in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed here that there is a reservation that is the first special figure reservation corresponding to the reservation icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the operation of the sword member 65. Here, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push in" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the next performance is executed. Note that even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next performance is executed when the valid time for operating the sword member 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(D), a promotion effect (with a pending series) is executed. In the promotion performance (with hold series), the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) from the retreat position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stops at the advance position in the front center of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into two by the first movable accessory 14 into a left screen and a right screen. Here, a message image MG1 saying "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the left screen. This means that what was announced as a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" has been upgraded to "a jackpot that is scheduled to pass through 16RV." Furthermore, a message image MG2 saying "MAX jackpot" is also displayed on the right screen. This is to notify you of a pending match, and also to notify you of a "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot." Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (not shown) are fixed and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), jackpot performance A is executed. The jackpot performance performance A is a performance to digest the jackpot. Also here, the first movable accessory 14 remains stationary at the forward center position in front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on the upper left of the left screen. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is being performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed. Here again, the message image MG2 "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(F), a movable body movement effect is executed. The movable body movement effect is a effect in which the first movable accessory 14, which has been stationary at an advanced position in the front center of the display screen 7a, slowly moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown by arrow Y. be. As the first movable accessory 14 moves, the area of the right screen expands. As the right screen is enlarged, the message image MG2 "MAX jackpot" is enlarged and displayed. The first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position and remains stationary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(G), jackpot performance B is executed. The jackpot performance performance B is a performance that eliminates the pending series. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left corner. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is being performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display reaches 16R and the jackpot is completed, the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(H), a status notification effect is executed. The status notification performance is for notifying the gaming status. Here, a message image MG saying "It's still going on!" is displayed. This means that the next fluctuation will lead to a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

[Promotion pending performance C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining promotion suspension continuous effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a winning notification effect is executed. The hit notification performance is a performance that notifies you of the fact that you have won by using the modes of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass V." Note that the stage of the hit notification performance is different from the confirmed stop performance, in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, it is assumed here that there is a reservation that is the first special figure reservation corresponding to the reservation icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a sword operation promotion effect is performed. The sword operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the operation of the sword member 65. Here, a sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "push in" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the next performance is executed. Note that even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next performance is executed when the valid time for operating the sword member 65 has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), a promotion effect (with a pending series) is executed. In the promotion performance (with pending series), performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". This means that what was announced as a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" has been upgraded to "a jackpot that is scheduled to pass through 16RV." Furthermore, a message image MG saying "Next time too 777" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. This is to notify you of a pending match, and also to notify you of a "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot." Here, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), jackpot performance A (first half) is executed. The jackpot performance performance A (first half) is the first half of the performance for digesting the jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and round balls RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game are displayed on both sides of the ally character CRA. Specifically, 16 round balls RB are displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the jackpot is 16 rounds. Furthermore, 16 round balls RB are displayed on the right side of the ally character CRA. This shows that there are 16 rounds of winnings in the first special figure pending.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), jackpot performance A (second half) is executed. The jackpot performance performance A (second half) is the second half of the performance for digesting the jackpot. Also here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and round balls RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game are displayed on both the left and right sides of the ally character CRA. In the jackpot performance A, a cross mark is placed on the round ball RB on the left side of the ally character CRA every time a round is completed. When all 16 round balls RB on the left side of the ally character CRA are marked with a cross, the jackpot is digested and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), jackpot performance B is executed. The jackpot performance performance B is a performance that eliminates the pending series. The jackpot performance B is executed continuously with the same screen as the jackpot performance A. In the jackpot performance B, a cross mark is placed on the round ball RB on the right side of the ally character CRA every time a round is completed. When all 16 round balls RB on the right side of the ally character CRA are marked with a cross, the winnings in the first special symbol pending are exhausted and the next performance is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a status notification effect is executed. The status notification performance is for notifying the gaming status. Here, a message image MG saying "It's still going on!" is displayed. This means that the next fluctuation will lead to a variable probability gaming state (high probability high base state).

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effects of character string decomposition.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when winning the "16RV jackpot scheduled to pass", it pretends to have won the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and then announces the winning of the "16RV jackpot" It is possible to perform a promotion effect. Furthermore, in the promotion performance, if the group is on hold, it is notified that the group is on hold (FIG. 111(D), FIG. 112(D), FIG. 113(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise and delight the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass V" corresponds to the "first advantageous game", the "jackpot expected to pass 16RV" corresponds to the "second advantageous game", and the promotion effect (with hold) is equivalent to the "first advantageous game". This corresponds to a "promotion performance," the first special symbol reservation corresponds to a "pending memory," and the information notified in the promotion performance (with a series of reservations) corresponds to "winning information."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, only the fact that the game is on hold is notified in the promotion performance (with a game on hold) (FIG. 111(D)). According to this configuration, since the type of jackpot is unknown at the stage of the promotion performance (with pending series), it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the promotion performance (with a pending series), it is notified that the series is on hold, and also when it is a "16RV jackpot expected to pass" or a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing jackpot". Notify whether there is one (FIG. 112(D), FIG. 113(D)). According to this configuration, since the type of jackpot can be known at the stage of the promotion performance (with a pending series), it is possible to make the player feel happy and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword operation promotion effect is executed, and when the sword member 65 is pushed in by the player, the promotion effect (with hold series) is executed (FIGS. 111(C), (D), FIG. 112 (C) (D), Figure 113 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will have high expectations for the operation of pushing the sword member 65, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the promotion to "16 RV expected jackpot" is performed on the left screen of the display screen 7a, and the fact that it is a pending series is performed on the right screen of the display screen 7a (FIG. 111(D), 112(D)). Further, the promotion to "16 RV Pass Scheduled Jackpot" is performed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the fact that it is a pending series is performed at the lower center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 113(D)). According to this configuration, promotion and suspension notifications are performed in parallel on the display screen 7a, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the promotion pending continuous performances A and B, the left side area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area", and the right side area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area". In addition, in the promotion pending continuous performance C, the central part of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area", and the central lower part of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left side screen and right side screen of the display screen 7a are separated by the first movable accessory 14 (FIGS. 111(D)(E)(F), FIGS. 112(D)(E)) (F)). According to this configuration, the information on the display screen 7a is organized, and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can surprise the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the first movable accessory 14 corresponds to a "movable accessory".

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the promotion pending continuous performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the above configuration is such that the promotion effect (with a pending series) is executed before the jackpot game, the promotion effect (with a pending series) may be executed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the sword member 65 is operated by executing the sword operation promotion effect, but the effect button 63 may be operated.

[Modification 3]
The above example was based on the assumption that there is a pending group in the promotion performance, but if there is no pending group, in FIGS. 111(D) and 112(D), " It is conceivable to display a message image such as "I'm sorry". The same applies to FIG. 113(D).
Alternatively, if the group is not on hold, it is conceivable that the existence or non-existence of the group on hold is not displayed, and, for example, only a promotion effect is performed in the center of the display screen 7a without moving the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification 4]
Although the above was an example of the reservation series of the first special symbol reservation, it can be implemented in the same way with the reservation series of the second special symbol reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
It is possible to store a holding memory that suspends a winning lottery that is triggered by a ball entering a predetermined ball entrance, and when the lottery is held, if the lottery is won, an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine that
The advantageous game includes a first advantageous game and a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game,
If the second advantageous game is won, it is possible to perform a promotion effect that announces the winning of the second advantageous game after pretending that the first advantageous game has been won;
In the promotion performance, if there is a pending memory in which the lottery has been won in the suspended memory when the promotion performance is executed, it is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies winning information based on the winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The winning information is information that there is a winning pending memory among the pending memories;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The winning information is information indicating that there is a winning pending memory among the pending memories, and which of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game was won.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
It further includes an operation section that can be operated by the player,
In the promotion performance, the promotion to the second advantageous game is notified at the timing of the operation of the operation unit, and the winning information is also notified.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
Further equipped with a display device capable of displaying images,
In the promotion performance, the promotion to the second advantageous game is announced in a first area of the display screen of the display device, and the winning information is notified in a second area of the display screen of the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
It further includes a movable accessory that is movably provided,
In the promotion performance, the first area and the second area are separated by the movable accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation instruction display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 114 to 116. This operation instruction display performance is executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an operation instruction display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Operation instruction display performance A]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect A. The operation instruction display performance displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and then, when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation promotion image disappears, and the operation of the operation means is stopped (cancelled). This is an effect that displays the operation promotion image again. In the operation instruction display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a, and then the ready-to-reach mode is entered. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R each temporarily stop at "3", resulting in "3↓3". After that, a special performance start image BKH is displayed to notify that a battle performance as a special reach performance is to be started. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 114(B), when the special reach effect is started, the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L is reduced in size and moved toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display. Temporarily stop at the position. "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, an ally character CRA, an enemy character CRB, a button image BTN, and an operation promotion image RND are displayed. The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the production button 63. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image representing the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "continuously press", and urges the player to operate (continuously press) the production button 63. . Here, an image of a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed in response to the player's operation (repeated hits) of the performance button 63.

When the player operates (repeatly hits) the production button 63, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears, as shown in FIG. 114(C). In other words, since the player is performing the operation, there is no need for an image to prompt the operation. This allows more battle footage to be shown.

When the player stops operating (repeatly hitting) the performance button 63 while the battle video is being displayed, the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND are displayed again, as shown in FIG. 114(D). be done. This prompts the player to operate (continuously press) the performance button 63 again. At this time, the progress of the video of the battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB may be interrupted, or may continue as is.

When the player operates (repeatly hits) the production button 63 again, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears again, as shown in FIG. 114(E). At this time, the interrupted progress of the battle video may be resumed.

FIG. 114(F) shows the climax part of the battle performance that will be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. At this time, the operation invalidation image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalidation image SMK is an image that notifies the player that the operation of the production button 63 is invalidated. An "x" image is displayed overlapping the button image BTN to notify that the operation is invalid. In this state, the climax portion of the battle performance proceeds.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(G), selected images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" is maintained. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images that include a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by operating the operating means, and here, the first selection image STG1 is expressed as "punch"; It includes a second selection image STG2 expressed as "long press (kick)". At this time, since the operation of the performance button 63 is disabled, even if the player operates it, no corresponding change in performance will occur on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(H), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display of the invalid operation image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappears. When these displays disappear, the operation of the effect button 63 becomes valid, and by operating the effect button 63, it becomes possible to select one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2. Here, the first selection image STG1 is selected, and the display color of the first selection image STG1 is changing.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 114(I), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 among the selection images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 disappears. remains. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(J), a button image BTN, a validity period image TBI, and an operation promotion image RND are displayed. The validity period image TBI is a meter image that represents the validity period of the operation of the production button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that represents the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image representing the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "repeat hit", and urges the player to operate (repeat hit) the performance button 63. This operation promotion image RND corresponds to the content selected from among the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, since the first selection image STG1 expressed as "repeated punch (punch)" has been selected, "repeated punch" is displayed. When the second selection image STG2 representing "long press (kick)" is selected, the operation promotion image RND is displayed as "long press". That is, the operation promotion image RND is a selection result image representing a selected option among the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(K), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA wins against the enemy character CRB. This performance is executed regardless of whether or not the player repeatedly presses the performance button 63. This will notify you of a jackpot. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode of "333".

[Operation instruction display performance B]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect B. The operation instruction display performance displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means, then when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation promotion image disappears, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the operation promotion image is displayed again. This is a performance that displays images. 115(A) to (D) of operation instruction display performance B are similar to FIGS. 114(B) to (E) of operation instruction display performance A. That is, FIG. 115(A) is executed after the operation instruction display effect A shown in FIG. 114(A).

In FIG. 115(E), the climax portion of the battle performance is displayed. At this time, when the performance button 63 is operated (for example, repeatedly pressed) by the player, an operation invalidation image SMK and a button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalidation image SMK is an image that notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 63 is invalidated. An "x" image is displayed overlappingly on the button image BTN to notify that the operation is invalid. In this state, the climax portion of the battle performance proceeds.

When the player stops operating the performance button 63 (for example, repeatedly hitting it), the operation invalidation image SMK and the button image BTN marked with an "x" disappear from display, as shown in FIG. 115(F). In other words, since the player is not operating, there is no need for an image to notify that the operation is invalid. This allows more of the climax part of the battle video to be shown.

When the player operates the production button 63 again (for example, by hitting it repeatedly), the operation invalidation image SMK and the button image BTN with an "x" are displayed again, as shown in FIG. 115(G). . In this state, the climax portion of the battle performance proceeds.

When the player's operation (for example, repeated hits) of the production button 63 is canceled again, the operation invalidation image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappear, as shown in FIG. 115(H). . That is, when the player operates the effect button 63, an operation invalid image SMK and a button image BTN with an "x" are displayed, and when the player stops operating the effect button 63, these displays disappear.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 115(I), selected images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with an "x" are not displayed. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images that include a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by operating the operating means, and here, the first selection image STG1 is represented as "punch"; It includes a second selection image STG2 expressed as "long press (kick)". By operating the effect button 63, it becomes possible to select one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2. Here, the selected display color changes.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an operation invalidation image SMK and a button image BTN with an "x" are displayed, as shown in FIG. 115(J). As a result, the operation of the effect button 63 becomes invalid, and the selection of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 cannot be changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 115(K), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 among the selection images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 remains. After that, as shown in FIG. 115(L), a button image BTN, a validity period image TBI, and an operation promotion image RND are displayed. The validity period image TBI is a meter image that represents the validity period of the operation of the production button 63, and is a so-called timer bar that represents the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image representing the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "repeat hit", and urges the player to operate (repeat hit) the performance button 63. This operation promotion image RND corresponds to the content selected from the selection images STG1 and STG2. Here, since the first selection image STG1 expressed as "repeated punch (punch)" has been selected, "repeated punch" is displayed. When the second selection image STG2 indicated as "long press (kick)" is selected, "long press" is displayed. That is, the operation promotion image RND is a selection result image representing a selected option among the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

FIG. 115(L) is similar to FIG. 114(J) of operation instruction display effect A. After FIG. 115(L), effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 114(K) and (L) of operation instruction display effect A are executed.

[Operation instruction display performance C]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect C. The operation instruction display effect displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means, then when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation promotion image disappears, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the operation promotion image is displayed again. This is a performance that displays images. 116(A) of the operation instruction display effect C is similar to FIG. 114(A) of the operation instruction display effect A. That is, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a, the ready-to-reach mode is entered. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R each temporarily stop at "3", resulting in "3↓3". After that, a special performance start image BKH is displayed to notify that a battle performance as a special reach performance is to be started.

As shown in FIG. 116(B), when the special reach effect is started, the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L is reduced in size and moved toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display. Temporarily stop at the position. The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining its display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, an ally character CRA, an enemy character CRB, a meter image MG, a button image BTN, and an operation promotion image RND are displayed. The meter image MG shows the amount of energy required for the ally character CRA to perform a special move. Note that an arbitrary object can be set as the object represented by the meter image MG. The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a portion of the appearance of the select button 68. The operation promotion image RND includes a text image of "Long press to charge", and urges the player to operate (long press) the select button 68. Here, among the four buttons of the select button 68 represented by the button image BTN, the color of the upper button is changing, and the player is notified that the upper button is to be pressed. In response to a long press of the upper button of the select button 68 by the player, an effect is performed in which the meter of the meter image MG is charged.

When the player presses and holds the upper button of the select button 68, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears, as shown in FIG. 116(C). In other words, since the player is performing the operation, there is no need for an image to prompt the operation. This allows more battle footage to be shown. Further, by pressing and holding the upper button of the rect button 68, an effect is executed in which the energy of the meter image MG is charged.

When the player stops pressing the upper button of the select button 68 while the battle video is being displayed, the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND are displayed again as shown in FIG. 116(D). Ru. This prompts the player to press and hold the upper button of the select button 68 again. At this time, an effect may be performed in which the energy of the meter image MG decreases.

When the player presses and holds the upper button of the select button 68 again, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears again, as shown in FIG. 116(E). At this time, an effect is performed in which the energy of the meter image MG increases (charges) again.

In FIG. 116(F), the climax portion of the battle performance that is executed after a predetermined time has passed is displayed. At this time, when the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed for a long time, an operation invalidation image SMK and a button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalidation image SMK is an image that notifies the player that the operation of the select button 68 is invalidated. An "x" image is displayed overlapping the button image BTN to notify that the operation is invalid. In this state, the climax portion of the battle performance proceeds.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(G), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the operation invalidation image SMK and the button image BTN with an "x" disappear from display, and the selection images ST1 and ST2 and the button image BTN, A selection promotion image NTK is displayed. The selection images STG1 and STG2 are images that include a plurality of options that can be selected by the player. )" and a second selected image STG2.

The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68, as described above, and here, among the four buttons of the select button 68 represented by the button image BTN, the left and right buttons are The color of the button is changing to alert the player to press the left or right button. The selection promotion image NTK includes a character image of "Select" and prompts the player to select one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 by operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68. I'm encouraging you to do that. By operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68, it is possible to select one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2. Here, the first selection image STG1 is selected, and the display color of the second selection image STG2 is changing.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the display of the unselected second selection image STG2 among the selection images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selection image STG1 disappears. remains. The display of the button image BTN and the selection promotion image NTK is maintained. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(I), the display of the button image BTN and the selection promotion image NTK disappears. In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, an operation invalidation image SMK and a button image BTN with an "x" are displayed, as shown in FIG. 116(J). This notifies the player that the operation of the select button 68 is invalid.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(K), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is defeated by the enemy character CRB. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner of "323".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation instruction display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114(B) to (E), after displaying the operation promotion image RND that prompts the player to operate the operation means, when the operation means is operated, the operation promotion image RND is displayed. When the display of the image is turned off and the operation of the operating means is stopped, the first effect of displaying the operation promotion image RND again can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114(F) and 114(G), when the operating means is being operated after the first performance, at least one of the operations of the operating means is invalidated. It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying an operation invalidation image SMK indicating that the operation is disabled. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114(G), in the second effect, the player is given a plurality of options that can be selected by operating the operating means while the operation invalidation image SMK is displayed. It is possible to execute a third effect of displaying selected images STG1 and STG2 including . According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114(J), in the second effect, when the selection images STG1 and STG2 are displayed, the player selects the images included in the selection images STG1 and STG2. When one of the plurality of options is selected, a selection result image (operation promotion image RND) representing the selected option is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 115.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114(B) and 114(D), in the first effect, an operating means image BTN that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the operating means is displayed together with the operation promotion image RND. be done. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the operation instruction display performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation instruction display performance A, the operation invalidation image SMK is displayed in the climax portion of the battle performance shown in FIGS. 114(F) and (G) regardless of whether the performance button 63 is operated or not. However, the operation invalid image SMK may be configured to be displayed when the effect button 63 is operated, and not displayed when the effect button 63 is not operated.

[Modification 2]
In operation instruction display effects A and B, when the operation invalidation image SMK is displayed, all operations of the effect button 63 may be disabled, or only a specific operation (for example, repeated hits) may be disabled, and other operations may be disabled. An operation (for example, a long press) may be effective. Similarly, in the operation instruction display performance C, when the operation invalidation image SMK is displayed, the operation of all four buttons of the select button 68 may be disabled, or the operation of a specific button (for example, the up and down buttons) may be disabled. It may also be possible that only the left and right buttons are disabled and other operations (for example, left and right buttons) are enabled.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A22-1]
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means,
After displaying the operation promotion image, when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation promotion image is erased, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, a first effect is executed in which the operation promotion image is displayed again. Possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is an invalid operation image indicating that at least one of the operations of the operation means is invalid;
After the first effect, a second effect of displaying the operation invalidation image while the operation means is being operated is executable;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a selection image including a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by operating the operation means,
In the second effect, a third effect can be executed in which the selected image is displayed while the operation invalidation image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-3,
In the second effect, when one of the plurality of options included in the selection image is selected by the player while the selection image is being displayed, a selection result image representing the selected option is displayed. is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A22-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A22-1 to A22-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operating means image that imitates at least a part of the external appearance of the operating means,
In the first effect, the operation means image is displayed together with the operation promotion image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The button special display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 117 to 119. This button special display effect is executed in a standby state (when the demo screen is displayed when the player is not playing) or during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special button display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a select button 68. The select button 68 is a cross-shaped button having buttons on the upper, lower, left and right sides, and the upper, lower, left and right buttons of the select button 68 can each independently receive operations by the player. That is, the sub-control board 90 can independently detect the player's operations (presses) of the upper, lower, left, and right buttons of the select button 68 via the select button detection switch 68a.

[Button special display effect A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining button special display effect A. The button special display effect A in FIG. 117 includes a standby effect, a decorative symbol variation effect, a mode change effect, and an unchangeable effect. The decorative symbol variation performance, mode change performance, and non-changeable performance other than the standby performance are performances in the same variation. In these presentations in the same variation other than the standby presentation, a hold icon 9A and a variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but these are omitted in the figure.

In button special display effect A, first, a standby effect is performed as shown in FIG. 117(A). This standby effect is performed when the player does not play the game by operating the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is a predetermined demonstration screen, the player presses the select button 68 or the effect. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63. In the standby presentation, a mode suggestion image XL1, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a presentation button image XL5, and a presentation button corresponding image XL5A are displayed.

Mode suggestion image XL1 is an image that suggests one display mode. The select button image XL4 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the user to operate the select button 68. The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is expressed as "select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that the display mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The production button image XL5 is an image imitating the production button 63, and is an image that prompts the production button 63 to be operated. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5, and is expressed as "determined". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode is determined by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 117(A), "mode B" is selected for the mode suggestion image XL1.

When the player shoots a game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol changes, and as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In this decorative pattern variation performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. In addition, in the decorative pattern variation performance, a mode suggestion image XL1 and a select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed in association with select button image XL4. Specifically, mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above select button image XL4, that is, mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the upper button of the cross button of select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1 continues to be associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the mode change effect, when the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68, the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance that In the example of FIG. 117(C), the mode suggestion image XL1 has been changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in mode suggestion image XL1, the display mode on display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), an unchangeable effect is executed. In this non-changeable effect, a mode non-changeable image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4. The mode change not allowed image XL6 is represented by a square with an x mark in a slightly dark shape, suggesting that the mode suggestion image XL1 cannot be changed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, until the change ends). In other words, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).
Thereafter, a reach effect is performed, a losing symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed, and a jackpot game effect is performed.

In addition, although the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed in each of the above-mentioned standby effects, decorative symbol variation effects, mode change effects, and non-changeable effects, even if the mode is different for each effect. good. For example, the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby presentation and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative symbol variation presentation may be different in size, color, shape, etc.

[Button special display effect B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining button special display effect B. The button special display performance B in FIG. 118 includes a standby performance, a decorative symbol variation performance, a mode change performance, a language change performance, an auto button change performance, and an unchangeable performance. Decorative symbol variation effects other than standby effects, mode change effects, language change effects, auto button change effects, and unchangeable effects are effects in the same variation. In these presentations in the same variation other than the standby presentation, a hold icon 9A and a variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but these are omitted in the figure.

In button special display effect B, first, a standby effect is performed as shown in FIG. 118(A). This standby effect is performed when the player does not play the game by operating the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is a predetermined demonstration screen, the player presses the select button 68 or the effect. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63. In the standby effect, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a production button image XL5, and a production button corresponding image XL5A are included. Is displayed.

Mode suggestion image XL1 is an image that suggests one display mode. The button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 indicates whether the button auto mode, which is automatically pressed without pressing the production button 63, is ON or OFF when a button image prompting the press of the production button 63 appears on the display screen 7a. This is an image that represents The language suggestion image XL3 is an image that suggests the language used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, in the language suggestion image XL3, when the language is written as "English", the language mode is English, and English is used partially or entirely in the display effect on the display screen 7a. The select button image XL4 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the user to operate the select button 68. The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is expressed as "select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that by operating the select button 68, the display mode, presence or absence of button auto mode, and language mode can be selected. The production button image XL5 is an image imitating the production button 63, and is an image that prompts the production button 63 to be operated. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5, and is expressed as "determined". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, presence or absence of button auto mode, and language mode are determined by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 118(A), "Mode B" is selected for the mode suggestion image XL1, "Auto ON" is selected for the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and "Japanese" is selected for the language suggestion image XL3. Selected.

When the player shoots a game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol changes, and as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In this decorative pattern variation performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. In addition, in the decorative pattern variation performance, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed in association with the select button image XL4. Specifically, mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above select button image XL4, that is, mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the upper button of the cross button of select button image XL4. Further, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed on the left side of the select button image XL4, that is, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed so as to be associated with the left button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. Language suggestion image XL3 is displayed below select button image XL4, that is, language suggestion image XL3 is displayed so as to be associated with the lower button of the cross button of select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the mode change effect, when the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68, the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance that In the example of FIG. 118(C), the mode suggestion image XL1 has been changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in mode suggestion image XL1, the display mode on display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(D), a language change effect is performed. In this language change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the language change effect, when the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68, the language mode in the language suggestion image XL3 is changed even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance that In the example of FIG. 118(D), the language mode of the language suggestion image XL3 has been changed to "Chinese". When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestion image XL3, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), an automatic button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the auto button change effect, when the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, the button in the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. This is an effect that turns auto mode ON or OFF. In the example of FIG. 118(E), the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 has the button auto mode changed from ON to OFF, and is now "auto OFF." When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, it is assumed that the production button 63 has been operated without operating the production button 63, and the operation of the production button 63 becomes valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), an unchangeable effect is executed. In this non-changeable effect, the mode non-changeable image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode change-unable to change image XL6 is represented by a rectangle with an x mark in a light shade, and the mode suggestion image XL1, button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, or language suggestion image XL3 cannot be changed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, until the change in question ends). ) suggests that it is not possible. In other words, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).
Thereafter, a reach effect is performed, a losing symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed, and a jackpot game effect is performed.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned standby effects, decorative symbol variation effects, mode change effects, language change effects, auto button change effects, and unchangeable effects, mode suggestion image XL1, button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and language suggestion image XL3 are displayed. , select button image XL4 is displayed, but the mode may be different for each effect. For example, the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby presentation and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative symbol variation presentation may be different in size, color, shape, etc.

[Button special display effect C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining button special display effect C. The button special display effects C in FIG. 119 include a standby effect, a decorative symbol variation effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an auto button change effect, an unchangeable effect, and a super reach effect A to D. Decorative symbol variation effects other than standby effects, mode change effects, language change effects, auto button change effects, unchangeable effects, and super reach effects A to D are effects in the same variation. In these presentations in the same variation other than the standby presentation, a hold icon 9A and a variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but these are omitted in the figure.

In button special display effect C, first, a standby effect is performed as shown in FIG. 119(A). This standby effect is performed when the player does not play the game by operating the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time, that is, when the display screen 7a is a predetermined demonstration screen, the player presses the select button 68 or the effect. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63. In the standby effect, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, a select button image XL4, a select button corresponding image XL4A, a production button image XL5, and a production button corresponding image XL5A are included. Is displayed.

Mode suggestion image XL1 is an image that suggests one display mode. The button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 indicates whether the button auto mode, which is automatically pressed without pressing the production button 63, is ON or OFF when a button image prompting the press of the production button 63 appears on the display screen 7a. This is an image that represents The language suggestion image XL3 is an image that suggests the language used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, in the language suggestion image XL3, when the language is written as "English", the language mode is English, and English is used partially or entirely in the display effect on the display screen 7a. The select button image XL4 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the user to operate the select button 68. The select button corresponding image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is expressed as "select". The select button corresponding image XL4A suggests that by operating the select button 68, the display mode, presence or absence of button auto mode, and language mode can be selected. The production button image XL5 is an image imitating the production button 63, and is an image that prompts the production button 63 to be operated. The effect button corresponding image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5, and is expressed as "determined". The effect button corresponding image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, presence or absence of button auto mode, and language mode are determined by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 119(A), "Mode B" is selected for the mode suggestion image XL1, "Auto ON" is selected for the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and "Japanese" is selected for the language suggestion image XL3. Selected.

When the player shoots a game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol changes, and as shown in FIG. It is carried out. In this decorative pattern variation performance, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. In addition, in the decorative pattern variation performance, a mode suggestion image XL1, a button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, a language suggestion image XL3, and a select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed in association with the select button image XL4. Specifically, mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above select button image XL4, that is, mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the upper button of the cross button of select button image XL4. Further, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed on the left side of the select button image XL4, that is, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed so as to be associated with the left button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. Language suggestion image XL3 is displayed below select button image XL4, that is, language suggestion image XL3 is displayed so as to be associated with the lower button of the cross button of select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the mode change effect, when the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68, the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance that In the example of FIG. 119(C), the mode suggestion image XL1 has been changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in mode suggestion image XL1, the display mode on display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), a language change effect is performed. In this language change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the language change effect, when the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68, the language mode in the language suggestion image XL3 is changed even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a performance that In the example of FIG. 119(D), the language mode of the language suggestion image XL3 has been changed to "Chinese". When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestion image XL3, the language displayed on the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), an automatic button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. In addition, in the auto button change effect, when the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, the button in the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed even though the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. This is an effect that turns auto mode ON or OFF. In the example of FIG. 119(E), the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 has the button auto mode changed from ON to OFF, and has become "auto OFF." When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, it is assumed that the production button 63 has been operated without operating the production button 63, and the operation of the production button 63 becomes valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), an unchangeable effect is executed. In this non-changeable effect, the mode non-changeable image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode change-unable to change image XL6 is represented by a rectangle with an x mark in a light shade, and the mode suggestion image XL1, button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, or language suggestion image XL3 cannot be changed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, until the change in question ends). ) suggests that it is not possible. In other words, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is disabled for a predetermined period (in this embodiment, until the change ends).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach effect A, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopping at 7 symbols and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuating at high speed while the mode changeable image XL6 is continuously displayed. A production button image XL7 is displayed. This performance button image XL7 is an image imitating the performance button 63, and is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(H), super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach performance B, the display of the mode-unchangeable image XL6 and the reach state with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continued, and when the player presses the performance button 63, the chance-up image XL8 is displayed. Ru. This chance-up image XL8 is an image that suggests that the expectation level of jackpot has increased, and is written as "super hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach performance C, the display of the mode-unchangeable image XL6 and the reach state by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continued, and the select button image XL9 is displayed. This select button image XL9 is an image imitating the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the select button 68.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(J), super reach effect D is performed. In this super reach effect D, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, By 8R, 7 jackpot symbols are displayed.
After that, a jackpot game performance is performed.

In addition, in each of the above standby effects, decorative symbol variation effects, mode change effects, language change effects, auto button change effects, unchangeable effects, and super reach effects A to D, mode suggestion image XL1, button auto presence/absence suggestion Although the image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are displayed, the mode may be different for each effect. For example, the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby presentation and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative symbol variation presentation may be different in size, color, shape, etc.

[Modified example]
In the above button special display effects B to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R sometimes overlap with the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode change impossible image XL6. There may be. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be arranged behind the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode-unchangeable image XL6.
In the above-mentioned button special display effects B to C, the result of displaying the reservation display indicating the number of reservations and the special symbol in association with the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The lottery results may be displayed. This pending display may be composed only of numbers representing the number of pending items. Further, this lottery result display may be displayed in the same arrangement as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "777", the lottery result display will also be displayed as "777".

[Effect example]
In the above button special display effects A to C, in the mode change effect, when changing the display mode in a state where the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed in correspondence, the corresponding display mode mode suggestion image XL1. According to this configuration, even when changing the display mode, the mode suggestion image XL1 is associated with the select button image XL4. It can be easily recognized that XL4 should be used, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable display mode. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects A to C, as shown in the non-changeable effect, after the display mode is changed, there is a display mode change prohibition period during which the display mode cannot be changed. According to this configuration, after changing the display mode, a period in which the display mode cannot be changed is provided, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by changing the display mode, and the display effects on the display screen 7a can be suppressed. The player can concentrate on the As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects A to C, a non-changeable effect is performed after the mode change effect, and in the non-changeable effect, the mode changeable image XL6 is displayed so as to overlap the mode suggestion image XL1. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize that the display mode cannot be changed, and the player concentrates on the display effect on the display screen 7a without trying to change the display mode. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects B to C, when the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed in association with the selection button image XL4, the language suggestion image XL3 is displayed in association with the selection button image XL4. According to this configuration, even when changing the language suggestion image XL3, the language suggestion image XL3 is associated with the select button image XL4. It can be easily recognized that the button image XL4 should be used, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable display mode. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above button special display effects B to C, when the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4. . According to this configuration, even when changing the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2, the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2 is associated with the select button image XL4, so the player can change the button auto presence/absence suggestion image XL2. It can be easily recognized that the select button image XL4 can be used to change the display mode, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable display mode. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XL-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means operable,
The display means can execute one display mode among a plurality of display modes,
The display mode can be changed by operating the operation unit,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a display mode suggestion image suggesting one display mode and an operation means image representing the operation unit in association with each other,
When changing the display mode from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second display effect changes the second display from the display mode suggestion image that suggests the first display mode. The effect is to change to the display mode suggestion image that suggests the mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed while the special symbols are changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-1,
After the second display effect in the combination effect is performed, there is a display mode change disabled period during which the display mode cannot be changed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance that displays a display mode change not possible image indicating that the display mode cannot be changed during the display mode change not possible period,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the display mode unchangeable image of the third display effect is displayed to overlap with the display mode suggestion image. Ru,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that displays a language suggestion image suggesting a language used in the display and the operation means image in association with each other,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XL-5”
The gaming machine according to aspect XL-3 or aspect XL-4,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that displays an operation means automatic image suggesting that the operation of the operation means is automatic and the operation means image in association with each other,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect button valid/invalid display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 120 to 122. In FIGS. 120 to 122, some of the various movable accessories placed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This performance button valid/invalid display performance is performed during a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the effect button enable/disable display effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, first, the effect button valid/invalid display effect A will be explained, then the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and then the effect button valid/invalid display effect C will be explained in order.

[Production button enable/disable display production A]
The effect button valid/invalid display effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect A. The effect button valid/invalid display effect A is performed during a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), a vertically long rectangular shape is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a variable display area (also referred to as a "decorative pattern variable area") for three decorative patterns (not shown). There are three areas (that is, three areas in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row): a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. By the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area to the lower side of the display screen 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. Ru.

Specifically, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L rotate from the top of the left fluctuating display area to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area 8, and The decorative symbol 8C starts a fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of the medium fluctuation display area to the bottom of the medium fluctuation display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a right fluctuation display. A fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of the area toward the bottom of the right fluctuating display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area The lateral distance dimension of , and the lateral distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable display (variable display) of each decorative pattern, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is provided in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

Among the numbers "1" to "9", except for the number "7", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" have bright red color, and even numbers The symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' have a bright blue color, and the number ``7'' has a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the sizes of numbers "1" to "9" each have a vertical distance dimension that is approximately one third of the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). However, each of them has a normal size in which the lateral distance dimension is about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers ``1'' to ``9'' are special typefaces (independently created) that are different from existing typefaces (commonly distributed typefaces) such as regular typefaces, Gothic typefaces, and Mincho typefaces. It is formed by a special font).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Multiple types of background images are available, and the background images can be switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner ( A sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided (variable display). The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variation display area which is the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but it is arranged so that the sub variation area KSZ is the closest to you. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ. The sub-variable area KSZ is placed behind the variable area KSZ and is not obstructed by other performance images.In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. It is designed so that it will not happen.

The small decorative pattern is a numerical pattern, and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and is different from the font of the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-fluctuation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when fluctuation is started, it does not become translucent and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and is the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable display (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small The variable performance (fluctuating display) with the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are Although it overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the medium decoration pattern 8C, the medium decoration pattern 8C is placed behind the said fluctuation display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the medium decoration pattern 8C Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image will be placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if another effect image is placed in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad, the other effect images will block the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are the same as the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although the left decorative symbol 8L overlaps with the left variable display area, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L allows the left decorative symbol 8L to move from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad is not obstructed. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Although the 4th hold display position 9Ad is not blocked, if other effect images are placed in front of the 2nd hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position will be blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, among the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first pending display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area that is the variable area of the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad is A hold display area as a special figure hold is arranged astride the middle fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Cd. The hold icon 9A is not displayed in 9Ad. In other words, there are three pending icons that have not been consumed and have been stocked. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 during the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-fluctuation area KSZ (lining up on the same horizontal line), there is a first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each provided with a reservation number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape, in which the number of reservations (numbers) is displayed. The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ are as follows. have the same distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reservation number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same.

The background image of the pending number display area HS is different from the background image of the sub variable area KSZ, and is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending number display area HS is located at the frontmost side. By being arranged so that the left decorative pattern 8L is placed behind the reserved number display area HS, the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the reserved number display area HS, and other effect images do not appear. Also, other performance images are arranged behind the reservation number display area HS, and the reservation number display area HS is not obstructed by other performance images.

The number of 1st special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) and the number of 2nd special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) are in a font (for example, Gothic) that is different from the font of the small decorative pattern. The background image of the reserved number display area HS is set to another single color that has a high contrast to the single color of the background image, and does not change to another color. The number of first special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) and the number on second special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of holding display area HS and are always opaque. Therefore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is displayed in blue numbers. The number of second special drawings reserved based on the number is always displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reserved number display area HS so as to be spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by other effect images. In addition, the blue color indicating the number of the first special drawings reserved is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' (same color). Although it is not a color, it is a similar color. The red color of the number on hold for the second special drawing is different from the bright red of the odd numbers except for the number 7, such as number 1, number 3, number 5, and number 9. Although they are not the same color, they are similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high chance of winning)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all start variable presentation (fluctuating display) at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. 120(A), the left decorative pattern 8L displays the left decorative pattern 8L. A fluctuating display (fluctuating display) starts from the top to the bottom of the area, and a fluctuating display (fluctuating display) starts from the top to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area, and the middle decorative symbol 8C starts fluctuating from the top to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area. The variable performance (fluctuating display) starts from the upper side to the lower side of the left variable display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, which is displayed in a variable manner in the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1" in the center of the left variable display area, and is displayed in the vertical direction. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed in a variable manner from the top to the bottom in the right variable display area, is temporarily stopped at the number "1" in the center of the right variable display area, and then the upper and lower The display mode is such that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (the number "1" here) to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to be displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side of the medium variable display area.

When a reach is formed and the effect button valid/invalid display effect A is started as shown in FIG. 7a, passes toward the right side of the display screen 7a, jumps out to the outside of the right side of the display screen 7a, jumps into the display screen 7a again from the outside of the upper side of the display screen 7a, and stops near the center of the display screen 7a. The display mode becomes explosive. Note that although the above-mentioned sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, since the sub-variation area KSZ is placed furthest to the front, a part of the flash FL does not cross the sub-variation area KSZ. Even if the flash light FL passes through, a part of the flash light FL remains covered by the sub-variation region KSZ.

When the flash FL stops near the center of the display screen 7a and explodes, as shown in FIG. is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a mismatched image)). Even if the player presses the performance button 63 during the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed as this unclear image (out-of-focus image), the image will not be displayed on the display screen 7a. It doesn't reflect anything on the performance. In other words, the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (out-of-focus image) is a period in which the pressing operation of the production button 63 is disabled, and the production is disabled. The button image BTN is displayed in an inactive display mode as an unclear image (out-of-focus image). In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (a blurred image (out of focus image)) is referred to as an "operation invalid display mode". ”.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(E), the performance button image BTN, which was in the operation-invalid display mode, is switched to a clear image (a focused image). If the player presses the performance button 63 during the period when the performance button image BTN is displayed as this clear image (in-focus image), the jackpot expectation level is set high in advance. An ally character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, suggesting the development of a battle performance that is currently being played, and the performance displayed on the display screen 7a may be affected by the player's pressing of the performance button 63. It may be reflected. In other words, the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (in-focus image) is the period in which the pressing operation of the production button 63 is enabled. The effect button image BTN is displayed in an active display mode in which it becomes a clear image (a focused image). In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (a focused image (in-focus image)) is referred to as the "operation effective display mode". ”.

Thereafter, the effect button image BTN is displayed while the operation valid display mode remains, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, although the medium decorative pattern 8C during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, in the sub-fluctuation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively correspond to the left decorative pattern 8C. The variable effects (fluctuating displays) of the decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are each continued without being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the performance button image BTN, and the lower part of the performance button image BTN is visible. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the production button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the production button image BTN, the production button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation effective display mode (that is, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the active display mode of the performance button image BTN is continued). Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN is still displayed in the operation-enabled display mode. Pressing the button 63 may have an effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. 120(G), the production button image BTN is displayed in the operation valid display mode. continue. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), the production button image BTN is still displayed in the operation valid display mode. The player's pressing operation of the performance button 63 may have an effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a.

This is a case where the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is displayed in the operation valid display mode, and the second movable accessory 15 changes from the advanced position to the retreat position ( When the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed again, the production button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a and the variable production (variable display) is in progress. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(H), when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium variable display area), the battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 120(I). Begins. In the battle performance, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a performance that has high expectations set in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. disappear. In the battle performance, in the sub-variable area KSZ, a variable performance (variable display) continues without being temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, in the reservation number display area HS, the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation are each displayed as a reservation number (number).

When the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "1" and is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (in this case, the number "1") and are not aligned. , it will be out of place. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. (Fluctuating display) will start.

In addition, when the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses in the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, and it becomes a jackpot, and then the jackpot game is played. (Jackpot performance) starts. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation.

In addition, in FIG. 120(H), the ally character CRA was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area), but the ally character CRA was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area). If it is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 120(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "1", which are the same numbers. It is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the timing of , and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and a loss is displayed as a win/loss result. That will happen. In other words, if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area) in FIG. 120(H), a loss is displayed as a win or loss result without progressing to a battle performance. It looks like this.

In addition, in FIGS. 120(E) to (G), the production button image BTN was a clear image (in-focus image (in-focus image)), but at this time, the production button image BTN was clear. It may also be in a state where it emits colored light (for example, white light). The bright color luminescence may indicate the expectation of winning in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of effects based on the bright color emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Production button enable/disable display production B]
Next, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect B. The effect button valid/invalid display effect B is performed during a variable effect (variable display) of decorative symbols.

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a vertically elongated rectangular shape is displayed as a variable display area (also referred to as a "decorative pattern variable area") for three decorative patterns (not shown). There are three areas (that is, three areas in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row): a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. By the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area to the lower side of the display screen 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. Ru.

Specifically, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L rotate from the top of the left fluctuating display area to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area 8, and The decorative symbol 8C starts a fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of the medium fluctuation display area to the bottom of the medium fluctuation display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a right fluctuation display. A fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of the area toward the bottom of the right fluctuating display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area The lateral distance dimension of , and the lateral distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable display (variable display) of each decorative pattern, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is provided in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

Among the numbers "1" to "9", except for the number "7", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" have bright red color, and even numbers The symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' have a bright blue color, and the number ``7'' has a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the sizes of numbers "1" to "9" each have a vertical distance dimension that is approximately one third of the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). However, each of them has a normal size in which the lateral distance dimension is about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers ``1'' to ``9'' are special typefaces (originally created) that are different from existing typefaces (commonly distributed typefaces) such as block fonts, Gothic fonts, and Mincho fonts. It is formed by a special font).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Multiple types of background images are available, and the background images can be switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner ( A sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided (variable display). The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variation display area which is the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but it is arranged so that the sub variation area KSZ is the closest to you. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ. The sub-variable area KSZ is placed behind the variable area KSZ and is not obstructed by other performance images.In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. It is designed so that it will not happen.

The small decorative pattern is a numeric pattern, and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified to other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when variation starts, it does not become translucent and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and is the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable display (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small The variable performance (fluctuating display) using the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", or the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are Although it overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the medium decoration pattern 8C, the medium decoration pattern 8C is placed behind the said fluctuation display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the medium decoration pattern 8C Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image will be placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if another effect image is placed in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad, the other effect images will block the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are arranged at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are the same as the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although the left decorative symbol 8L overlaps with the left variable display area, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L allows the left decorative symbol 8L to move from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad is not obstructed. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Although the 4th hold display position 9Ad is not blocked, if other effect images are placed in front of the 2nd hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position will be blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, among the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first pending display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area that is the variable area of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad is A hold display area as a special figure hold is arranged astride the middle fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Cd. The hold icon 9A is not displayed in 9Ad. In other words, there are three pending icons that have not been consumed and have been stocked. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 during the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-fluctuation area KSZ (lining up on the same horizontal line), there is a first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. and a second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are provided with a reservation number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the number of reservations (numbers) is displayed. The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ are as follows. have the same distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reservation number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same.

The background image of the pending number display area HS is different from the background image of the sub variable area KSZ, and is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending number display area HS is located at the frontmost side. By being arranged so that the left decorative pattern 8L is placed behind the reserved number display area HS, the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the reserved number display area HS, and other effect images do not appear. Also, other performance images are arranged behind the reservation number display area HS, and the reservation number display area HS is not obstructed by other performance images.

The number of 1st special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) and the number of 2nd special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) are in a font (for example, Gothic) that is different from the font of the small decorative pattern. The background image of the reserved number display area HS is set to another single color that has a high contrast to the single color of the background image, and does not change to another color. The number of first special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) and the number on second special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of holding display area HS and are always opaque. Therefore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is displayed in blue numbers. The number of second special drawings reserved based on the number is always displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reserved number display area HS so as to be spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by other effect images. In addition, the blue color indicating the number of the first special drawings reserved is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' (same color). Although it is not a color, it is a similar color. The red color of the number on hold for the second special drawing is different from the bright red of the odd numbers except for the number 7, such as number 1, number 3, number 5, and number 9. Although they are not the same color, they are similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high chance of winning)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all start variable presentation (fluctuating display) at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. 121(A), the left decorative pattern 8L displays the left decorative pattern 8L. A fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started from the top to the bottom of the area, and a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started from the top to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area, and the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to fluctuate from the top to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area, and the right decorative pattern 8R The variable performance (fluctuating display) starts from the upper side to the lower side of the left variable display area.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the white spherical variation icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C, and the left variation display area is displayed in a variable manner from the top to the bottom. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5" in the center of the left variable display area, and the display mode moves gradually in the vertical direction, and then the right variable display area is displayed in a variable manner from the top to the bottom. The right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5" in the center of the right variable display area, and the display mode is such that it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern ( In this case, the number "5") forms a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to be displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side of the medium variable display area.

When a reach is formed and the effect button valid/invalid display effect B is started as shown in FIG. It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTN is arranged and displayed on the front side of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and furthermore, the continuous hit image MG that informs the player that the effect button 63 is to be repeatedly pressed is placed on the near side of the medium decorative pattern 8C. is displayed at the upper right of the production button image BTN. If the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is being displayed as an active display mode that emits light in bright color, it will suggest the development of a battle performance in which the expectation of a jackpot is set high in advance. The ally character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, and the performance displayed on the display screen 7a may be influenced by the player's pressing operation of the performance button 63. In other words, the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode that emits light in bright color is a period in which the pressing operation of the production button 63 is enabled. In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, a display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which bright light is emitted is referred to as an "operation effective display mode."

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the performance button image BTN, which has been in the operation-enabled display mode, is switched to an inactive display mode in which it emits dark light (for example, dark gray). Even if the player presses the performance button 63 during the period in which the performance button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode emitting dark light, no effect is reflected on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode that emits dark light is a period in which the pressing operation of the production button 63 is disabled. In the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, a display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode in which dark color light is emitted is referred to as an "operation invalid display mode."

Thereafter, the production button image BTN is displayed while the operation invalidation display mode remains, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, although the medium decorative pattern 8C during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, in the sub-fluctuation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively correspond to the left decorative pattern 8C. The variable effects (fluctuating displays) of the decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are each continued without being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(E), an image whose background image has seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is retracted above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) from a stationary state at a position (home position) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and for a predetermined period of time (for example, (about 5 seconds). When the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the performance button image BTN, and the lower part of the performance button image BTN is visible. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the production button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation disabled display mode. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN is still displayed in the operation disabled display mode, so the player cannot perform the performance. The pressing operation of the button 63 has no effect on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a jackpot is confirmed.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. 121(F), the production button image BTN is displayed in the operation disabled display mode. continue. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), the production button image BTN is still displayed in the operation disabled display mode. The performance displayed on the display screen 7a is not affected in any way by the pressing operation of the performance button 63 by the player.

This is a case where the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is displayed in the operation valid display mode, and the second movable accessory 15 changes from the advanced position to the retreat position ( When the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed again, the production button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a and the variable production (variable display) is in progress. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(G), when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium variable display area), the battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 121(H). Begins. In the battle performance, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a performance that has high expectations in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. disappear. In the battle performance, in the sub-variable area KSZ, a variable performance (variable display) continues without being temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, in the reservation number display area HS, the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation are each displayed as a reservation number (number).

In the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 121(I), when the winged ally character CRA is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, and as shown in FIG. 121(J). ), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (in this case, the number "5"), resulting in a jackpot, and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect). Begins. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation. Although the above-mentioned sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, in FIG. 121(I), a part of the wing of the wingman form ally character CRA overlaps with the sub-variation area KSZ. However, since the sub-fluctuation area KSZ is placed closest to the viewer, a portion of the wings of the winged ally character CRA are covered by the sub-fluctuation area KSZ. Furthermore, although the above-mentioned pending number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the ally character CRA in wingman form moves and a part of the wing overlaps with the pending number display area HS. , since the pending number display area HS is placed at the frontmost side, a part of the wings of the ally character CRA in wingman form are covered by the pending number display area HS.

In addition, in the battle performance, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (determined display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (in this case, the number "5") and are not aligned and are out of alignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is performed. (Fluctuating display) will start.

Further, in FIG. 121(E), the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. 121(G), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium variable display area). If not, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern. (Here, the number "5") is not aligned, and a loss is displayed as a win or loss result. In other words, in FIG. 121(E), the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. 121(G), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium variable display area). If it is not displayed, a loss is displayed as a win or loss result without progressing to a battle performance.

In addition, in FIG. 121(C), the performance button image BTN is white as bright color emission, but the expectation level of winning may be indicated in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of effects based on the bright color emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Production button enable/disable display production C]
Next, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the effect button valid/invalid display effect C. The effect button valid/invalid display effect C is performed based on a change in the pending icon due to a pre-read effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a vertically elongated rectangular shape is displayed as a variable display area (also referred to as a "decorative pattern variable area") for three decorative patterns (not shown). There are three areas (that is, three areas in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row): a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. By the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side of each variable display area to the lower side of the display screen 7a, a variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. Ru.

Specifically, the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the left decorative symbols 8L rotate from the top of the left fluctuating display area to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area 8, and The decorative symbol 8C starts a fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of the medium fluctuation display area to the bottom of the medium fluctuation display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as a right fluctuation display. A fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative symbols is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top of the area toward the bottom of the right fluctuating display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area, the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the left variable display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the middle variable display area The lateral distance dimension of , and the lateral distance dimension of the right variable display area are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable display (variable display) of each decorative pattern, number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is provided in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

Among the numbers "1" to "9", except for the number "7", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" have bright red color, and even numbers The symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' have a bright blue color, and the number ``7'' has a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the sizes of numbers "1" to "9" each have a vertical distance dimension that is approximately one third of the vertical distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). However, each of them has a normal size in which the lateral distance dimension is about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variable display area (middle variable display area, right variable display area). The numbers ``1'' to ``9'' are special typefaces (independently created) that are different from existing typefaces (commonly distributed typefaces) such as regular typefaces, Gothic typefaces, and Mincho typefaces. It is formed by a special font).

When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, the statically displayed decorative pattern gradually increases its speed from a low speed and changes from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. . Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Multiple types of background images are available, and the background images can be switched as appropriate.

In addition, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner ( A sub-variable area KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided (variable display). The background image of the sub-variation area KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green), and does not change to another color.Sub-variation area KSZ is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the right variation display area which is the variation area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but it is arranged so that the sub variation area KSZ is the closest side. By doing so, the right decorative pattern 8R is placed behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is The sub-variable area KSZ is placed behind the variable area KSZ and is not obstructed by other performance images.In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R and other performance images. It is designed so that it will not happen.

The small decorative pattern is a numeric pattern, and has a font (for example, Mincho font) that is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and it is different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified to other single colors (for example, bright colors (yellow and white)) with high contrast to the single color, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variation area KSZ and is always in an opaque state, and even when variation starts, it does not become translucent and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reels are rotated, and is the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed by a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable display (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is started, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small The variable performance (fluctuating display) with the right decorative pattern starts, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, All the small right decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed.

A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the small left decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small left decorative pattern fluctuates (fluctuated display), and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small right decorative pattern continues to be displayed. The fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) continues, and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, a small left decorative pattern, a small medium decorative pattern, and a small right decorative pattern are displayed. All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the small left decorative pattern, the small The medium decorative pattern and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different designs. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the medium decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", the small left decorative pattern The number "1", the small medium decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "2", the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "3", and the small left decorative pattern may be the number "5", the small medium decoration The pattern may be stopped at the number "6" and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped at the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is hit, the small left decorative pattern, The small-sized medium decorative pattern and the small-sized right decorative pattern are aligned to the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

The fluctuation icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special symbol pending are displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the relevant variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Since the variable display position 9Cd is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are Although it overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the medium decoration pattern 8C, the medium decoration pattern 8C is placed behind the said fluctuation display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the medium decoration pattern 8C Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image will be placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, if another effect image is placed in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad, the other effect images will block the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad are the same as the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although the left decorative symbol 8L overlaps with the left variable display area, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L allows the left decorative symbol 8L to move from the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. The pending display position 9Ad is not obstructed. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Although the 4th hold display position 9Ad is not blocked, if other effect images are placed in front of the 2nd hold display position 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position will be blocked by the other effect images. 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, among the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the first pending display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area that is the variable area of the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the second pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, so the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad is A hold display area as a special figure hold is arranged astride the middle fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A is not displayed in 9Ad. In other words, there are three pending icons that have not been consumed and have been stocked. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 during the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the decorative symbols.

In addition, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, facing the above-mentioned sub-fluctuation area KSZ (lining up on the same horizontal line), there is a first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. and a second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are provided with a reservation number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the number of reservations (numbers) is displayed. The vertical distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the reserved number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub variable area KSZ are as follows. have the same distance dimension. In other words, the shape of the reservation number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variable area KSZ are the same.

The background image of the pending number display area HS is different from the background image of the sub variable area KSZ, and is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the pending number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending number display area HS is located at the frontmost side. By being arranged so that the left decorative pattern 8L is placed behind the reserved number display area HS, the left decorative pattern 8L does not block the reserved number display area HS, and other effect images do not appear. Also, other performance images are arranged behind the reservation number display area HS, and the reservation number display area HS is not obstructed by other performance images.

The number of 1st special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) and the number of 2nd special drawings reserved (reserved number (number)) are in a font (for example, Gothic) that is different from the font of the small decorative pattern. The background image of the reserved number display area HS is set to another single color that has a high contrast to the single color of the background image, and does not change to another color. The number of first special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) and the number on second special drawings on hold (number on hold (number)) are placed in front of the background image of the number of holding display area HS and are always opaque. Therefore, it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of first special symbols reserved based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 is displayed in blue numbers on the left side of the reservation number display area HS, and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 21 is displayed in blue numbers. The number of second special drawings reserved based on the number is always displayed in red numbers on the right side of the reserved number display area HS so as to be spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be easily understood intuitively. In other words, the visibility of the contents displayed in the pending number display area HS is not obstructed by other effect images. In addition, the blue color indicating the number of the first special drawings reserved is a different color from the bright blue color of the even numbered symbols ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' (same color). Although it is not a color, it is a similar color. The red color of the number on hold for the second special drawing is different from the bright red of the odd numbers except for the number 7, such as number 1, number 3, number 5, and number 9. Although they are not the same color, they are similar colors.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), due to the difference in shape and color, the expectation level of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon differs. represents. For example, out of four icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest probability of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling sphere icon is further set with a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high chance of winning)).

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all start variable presentation (fluctuating display) at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. 122(A), the left decorative pattern 8L displays the left decorative pattern 8L. A fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started from the top to the bottom of the area, and a fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) is started from the top to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area, and the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to fluctuate from the top to the bottom of the left fluctuating display area, and the right decorative pattern 8R The variable performance (fluctuating display) starts from the upper side to the lower side of the left variable display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(B), the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A, and the effect button enable/disable display effect. When C is started, a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an inactive display mode that emits dark light (for example, dark gray). In other words, based on the fact that the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A due to the look-ahead effect, the effect button enable/disable display effect C is started. Although the effect button image BTN displayed in this inactive display mode is placed behind the medium decorative pattern 8C, the effect button image BTN is visible through the semi-transparent medium decorative pattern 8C during the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display). It is now possible to do so. The performance button 63 is used to display (appear) on the display screen 7a an ally character CRA that suggests the development of a battle performance for which the expectation level of jackpot is set high in advance. Even if the player presses the performance button 63 during the period in which the performance button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode emitting dark light, no effect is reflected on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode that emits dark light is a period in which the pressing operation of the production button 63 is disabled. In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C, a display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode in which dark color light is emitted is referred to as an "operation invalid display mode".

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, which is displayed in a variable manner in the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1" in the center of the left variable display area, and is displayed in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed in a variable manner in the right variable display area from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped at the number "3" in the center of the right variable display area, and then the display mode moves slowly in small increments. After that, the medium decorative pattern 8C, which is displayed in a variable manner from the top to the bottom of the medium fluctuation display area, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2" in the center of the medium fluctuation display area. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed (determined display) at the same timing and do not line up as the same pattern, resulting in a loss. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the completion of the variation. Note that here as well, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation disabled display mode.

Thereafter, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C (at this time, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad.) As shown in FIG. 122(D), the left decorative pattern 8L , when a variable effect (fluctuating display) using the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R is started, the display screen is displayed in an active display mode in which a effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 emits bright color (e.g., white light). It is displayed in the center of 7a. If the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is being displayed as an active display mode that emits light in bright color, it will suggest the development of a battle performance in which the expectation of a jackpot is set high in advance. The ally character CRA may be displayed (appear) on the display screen 7a, and the performance displayed on the display screen 7a may be influenced by the player's pressing operation of the performance button 63. In other words, the period in which the production button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode that emits light in bright color is a period in which the pressing operation of the production button 63 is enabled. In addition, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C, a display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which bright color light is emitted is referred to as an "operation effective display mode."

Even if the production button image BTN switches from the operation disabled display mode to the operation enabled display mode, the production button image BTN continues to be placed behind the medium decorative pattern 8C, but the variation production (variation display) ) The effect button image BTN can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent medium decorative pattern 8C.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, which is displayed in a variable manner in the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7" in the center of the left variable display area, and becomes a display mode that slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed in a variable manner in the right variable display area from the top to the bottom, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7" in the center of the right variable display area, and the display mode is changed to slowly move vertically in small increments. , the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (number "7" here) to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to be displayed in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side of the medium variable display area. Note that here as well, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation-enabled display mode.

When a reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 122(E), the effect button image BTN is displayed in front of the medium decorative pattern 8C, and further informs the player that the effect button 63 is to be repeatedly pressed. The continuous hit image MG is placed in front of the medium decorative pattern 8C and displayed on the upper right side of the production button image BTN.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(F), the production button image BTN that had been in the operation-enabled display mode is switched again to the operation-invalid display mode. Thereafter, the production button image BTN is displayed while the operation invalidation display mode remains, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, although the medium decorative pattern 8C during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, in the sub-fluctuation area KSZ, the small left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R respectively correspond to the left decorative pattern 8C. The variable effects (fluctuating displays) of the decorative pattern, the small medium decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern are each continued without being temporarily stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(G), an image whose background image has seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is retracted above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) from a stationary state at a position (home position) toward a central position (advance position) that is in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and for a predetermined period of time (for example, (about 5 seconds). When the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the performance button image BTN, and the lower part of the performance button image BTN is visible. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the production button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation disabled display mode. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN is still displayed in the operation disabled display mode, so the player can perform the performance. The pressing operation of the button 63 has no effect on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) to the player that a jackpot is confirmed.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. 122(H), the production button image BTN is displayed in the operation disabled display mode. continue. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), the production button image BTN is still displayed in the operation disabled display mode. No influence is reflected on the performance displayed on the display screen 7a by the pressing operation of the performance button 63 by the player.

This is a case where the player presses the performance button 63 while the performance button image BTN is being displayed in the operation valid display mode, and the second movable accessory 15 changes from the advanced position to the retracted position ( When the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed again, the production button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a and the variable production (variable display) is in progress. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(I), an ally character CRA in the form of a wingman, unlike the normal ally character CRA, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a (in the center of the medium variable display area) and appears in a large size. When displayed, as shown in FIG. 122 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), resulting in a jackpot. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started. That is, unlike the normal ally character CRA, when the winged ally character CRA is suddenly displayed, a jackpot is displayed as a winning result without starting a battle performance.

When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation. Although the above-mentioned sub-variation area KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, in FIG. 122(I), a part of the wing of the winged ally character CRA overlaps with the sub-variation area KSZ. However, since the sub-fluctuation area KSZ is placed closest to the viewer, a portion of the wings of the winged ally character CRA are covered by the sub-fluctuation area KSZ. Furthermore, although the above-mentioned pending number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the ally character CRA in wingman form moves and a part of the wing overlaps with the pending number display area HS. , since the pending number display area HS is placed at the frontmost side, a part of the wings of the ally character CRA in wingman form are covered by the pending number display area HS.

In addition, in FIG. 122(I), the ally character CRA in wingman form suddenly appears on the display screen 7a and is not displayed in a large size, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium variable display area). After that, the battle performance will start. In the battle performance, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a performance that has high expectations in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, variable icon 9C, and pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. disappear. In the battle performance, in the sub-variable area KSZ, a variable performance (variable display) continues without being temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, in the reservation number display area HS, the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation are each displayed as a reservation number (number).

In the battle performance, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), resulting in a jackpot. After that, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation. On the other hand, in the battle performance, when the friendly character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (determined display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (in this case, the number "7") and are not aligned and are out of alignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable effect by the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is performed. (Fluctuating display) will start.

Further, in FIG. 122(G), the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in FIG. 122(I), the wingman form ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a and is not displayed in a large size. In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern ( Here, the numbers "7") are not aligned, and a loss is displayed as a win or loss result. In other words, if the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 122(G), and furthermore, the wingman form ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 122(I), Instead of developing into a battle performance, the winning and losing results are displayed.

In addition, in FIGS. 122(D) and (E), the performance button image BTN was white as a bright color emitting light, but even if the effect button image BTN was changed to white → blue → red → yellow to indicate the expectation of winning. good. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of effects based on the bright color emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the effect button valid/invalid display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the player can operate the effect button valid/invalid display effect A shown in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/ineffective display effect B shown in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/ineffective display effect C shown in FIG. a production button 63 (operation means), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a second movable accessory that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the image display device 7 (display means). 15 (movable body), and the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) advances from the retracted position with a production button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the production button 63 (operation means) being displayed. When moved to the position, the first effect (FIG. 120 (F) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A, where the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) overlap in the front and back direction, In the effect button valid/invalid display effect B, FIG. 121(E) can be executed, and in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C, FIG. 122(G)) can be executed. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position while the performance button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the performance button 63 (operation means) is displayed, , the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the performance button image BTN (operation means image), and the performance button image BTN (operation means image) prompts the player to operate the performance button 63 (operation means). Since it is possible to give the player the sense of discomfort of being purposely covered by the second movable accessory 15 (movable object), it is possible to provide the player with a performance that gives such a sense of discomfort as a novel performance that has not been seen before. . Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (effect) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 120(F) for button valid/invalid display effect A, FIG. 121(E) for effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and FIG. 122(G) for effect button valid/invalid display effect C). When the movable body) moves from the retreat position to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the production button image BTN (operation means image). According to this configuration, although the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the production button image BTN (operation means image), the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) covers the entire production button image BTN (operation means image). Because a part of the production button image BTN (operation means image) can be visually recognized without being covered by This can contribute to making players look forward to the development of performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (effect) in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 120(G) for button valid/invalid display effect A, FIG. 121(F) for effect button valid/invalid display effect B, and FIG. 122(H) for effect button valid/invalid display effect C). Even when the movable body moves from the advanced position to the retracted position, the presentation button image BTN (operating means image) can continue to be displayed. According to this configuration, even when the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the advance position to the retreat position, the presentation button image BTN (operation means image) continues to be displayed, so that the presentation button image The presence of the BTN (operation means image) can be made to feel more strange.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. The display means) is capable of variably displaying a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) among a plurality of types of images. In A, the effect button is enabled/disabled in the middle of the effect progressing from FIG. 120(F) to FIG. 120(G).In the effect B, the effect button is enabled/disabled during the effect progressing from FIG. 121(D) to FIG. 121(E). In display performance C, during the performance progressing from FIG. 122(F) to FIG. 122(G)), before the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) starts moving from the retreat position to the advance position, the variable performance ( The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) in the variable display) can be hidden. According to this configuration, by the time the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) starts moving from the retreat position to the advance position, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right While the decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) is hidden, the production button image BTN (operation means image) continues to be displayed, so the player's line of sight is naturally drawn to the production button image BTN (operation means image). By directing the user to the effect button image BTN (operation means image), it is possible to draw attention to the effect button image BTN (operation means image). As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of decorative patterns) in the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) become absent, while the performance button image BTN (operating means image) It is possible to create a performance that makes the presence of the performance button image BTN (operation means image) stand out and gives a sense of discomfort.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns), the variable icon 9C and the yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad are displayed variablely (multiple times). (variable display) According to this configuration, since the production button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed across multiple variable displays, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the existence of the production button image BTN (operation means image). can.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121 and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. ), effect button valid/invalid display In effect C, FIG. 122(F)) shows the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operating means image) before the time for the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) to start moving. from an operation-enabled display mode that suggests that the operation of the production button 63 (operation means) is enabled to an operation-invalid display mode that suggests that the operation of the production button 63 (operation means) is disabled. It is now possible to switch. According to this configuration, by the time the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) starts moving from the retreat position to the advance position, the display mode of the production button image BTN (operation means image) changes from the operation enabled display mode to the operation disabled display mode. Since the mode is switched and the performance button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a sense of expectation that other performances will develop.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the effect button valid/invalid display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. It was to be done. In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/ineffective display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. When the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves to , the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the performance button image BTN (operation means image). In other words, a part of the performance button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the performance button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is covered by the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) that has advanced to the advanced position. was. However, the effect button 63 may be replaced with a select button 68. In this case, a select button image (operating means image) imitating the select button 68 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and corresponds to at least one of the upper button, right button, lower button, and left button of the select button 68. The select button image (operation means image) may be covered by the second movable accessory 15 (movable object) that has advanced to the advanced position.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. was displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the means). However, if a part of the production button image BTN is visible due to the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable object), it may be moved to another position different from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). It may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/ineffective display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. The effect button image BTN may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) so that a part of the effect button image BTN is covered by an arm member that reciprocates.

[Modification 5]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid/ineffective display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. By the time the movement is started, the display mode of the performance button image BTN (operation means image) has already been switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops, the display mode of the production button image BTN (operation means image) is made to switch from the operation enabled display mode to the operation disabled display mode. Good too. At this time, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same timing, the display mode of the production button image BTN (operation means image) changes from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode at the time of temporary stop. The mode may be changed. At this time, the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues.

[Modification 6]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/ineffective display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. The game is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) as it is, and when the player presses the performance button 63, it is possible to develop a battle performance in which the expectation level of jackpot is set high in advance. In some cases, the suggested ally character CRA was displayed (appeared) on the display screen 7a. However, when the player presses the production button 63, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is moved to the retracted position (home position), advances (moves) from a stationary state to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds). ) may be stopped. In this case, when the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the performance button image BTN, making it difficult to visually recognize the lower part of the performance button image BTN. It becomes possible. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the production button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the performance button image BTN, the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation effective display mode. Thereafter, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position) again, and the performance button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation valid display mode.

[Modification 7]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, based on the fact that the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad has changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A due to the look-ahead effect. In addition, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the decorative pattern fluctuates. (Fluctuating display) is based on the assumption that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. However, instead of this, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable performance (variable display) by the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. Based on the fact that the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C may be performed. In this case, if the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started during the current variable effect (fluctuating display) using the variable icon 9C, then the hold icon 9A at the fourth hold display position 9Ad becomes the variable icon 9C. Even during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display), the performance button valid/invalid display performance C continues to be performed. In this manner, the effect button valid/invalid display effect C can be performed over a plurality of variable displays using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern (a plurality of decorative patterns). Note that when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started, the effect button image BTN is displayed as the medium decoration until the medium decoration pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. 122(B) to (E). Although the state where it is arranged behind the symbol 8C is maintained, the performance button image BTN can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent medium decorative symbol 8C which is being fluctuated (variable display).

[Modification 8]
In the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. 122, based on the fact that the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad has changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A due to the look-ahead effect. It was done. However, regardless of the look-ahead effect, during the variable effect (fluctuating display) by any of the variable icons 9C, for example, the sub-control board 90 itself determines to start the effect button valid/invalid display effect C by lottery processing, and The effect button valid/invalid display effect C may be performed across variable display times (for example, 2 to 10 times). At this time, when the effect button valid/invalid display effect C is started, the effect button image BTN is displayed until the medium decorative pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. Although the state of being arranged behind the decorative pattern 8C is maintained, the performance button image BTN can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent medium decorative pattern 8C which is being fluctuated (variable display).

[Modification 9]
The effect button valid/invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid/invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid/invalid display effect C in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising an operation means that can be operated by a player, a display means that can display a plurality of types of images, and a movable body that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means,
When the movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position while an operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed, a first effect can be performed in which the movable body and the operation means image overlap in the front-rear direction. be,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
The first effect is that when the movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, the movable body covers a part of the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
The first effect is to continue displaying the operating means image even when the movable body has moved from the advanced position to the retreated position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3,
The display means is capable of variably displaying a plurality of decorative patterns among the plurality of types of images,
The first effect is to hide the plurality of decorative patterns that are being displayed in a variable manner before the movable body starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-4,
The first performance is executable across a plurality of variable displays of the plurality of decorative patterns;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5,
The first effect is to change the display mode of the operation means image from an operation effective display mode indicating that the operation of the operation means is valid before the time for the movable body to start moving arrives. Switching to an operation invalid display mode that suggests that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation automation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 123 to 125. This operation automation performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an automated operation effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation automation performance A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining operation automation effect A.
In the operation automation performance A, even if the player does not press the performance button 63, a predetermined performance is performed as if the performance button 63 had been pressed.

First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63. Here, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed. Further, here, the pressed surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is white (normal color). Note that this button image BG is an image in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged). If the player operates the performance button 63 in this state, the operation of the performance button 63 becomes invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), an animation image display effect (initial stage) is executed. In the animation screen display effect (initial stage), the game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressed surface (top surface) shown in the button image BG, as shown by the arrow Y. do. At this time as well, the message image MG "Press" is displayed. Note that the game ball image KG is white (normal color).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), an animation image display effect (middle period) is executed. In the animation screen display (middle stage), the game ball image KG collides with the pressed surface (top surface) shown in the button image BG, and then, as shown by arrow Y, the game ball image KG collides with the pressed surface (top surface) shown in the button image BG. , and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which the production button 63 is pressed down (the protruding portion is reduced in size) due to the collision of the game ball images KG. At this time as well, the message image MG "Press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), the animation image display effect (second half) is executed. In the animation image display performance (later stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a and goes out of the frame. At this time, the button image BG is an image in which the production button 63 is not pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged). At this time as well, the message image MG "Press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(G), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the confirmation of a win. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow-colored effect is displayed around it. As a result, the player knows that he has won before the performance symbols are displayed as a zero.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (hit) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and come to a definite stop. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

Note that whether or not to execute the animation image display effects (FIGS. 123 (D) to (F)) after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 123 (C)) is stored as setting information in the sub RAM 94 of the gaming machine 1. has been done. This setting information is configured to be set using, for example, a select button 68. Of course, the settings may be configured using the performance button 63, the sword member 65, or the like. Specifically, by pressing a predetermined key of the select button 68, the animation image display effect is switched on and off. That is, when the animation image display effect is on, the animation image display effects shown in FIGS. 123(D) to (F) are executed. The operation automation effect A is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on. On the other hand, when the animation image display effect is off, the winning confirmation effect shown in FIG. 123(G) is executed after the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 123(C). In this case, the player's press of the performance button 63 in the operation promotion performance shown in FIG. 123(C) becomes effective.

[Operation automation performance B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining operation automation effect B.
In operation automation performance B, even if the player does not press the performance button 63, a predetermined performance is performed as if the performance button 63 had been pressed. Similar to the operation automation effect A described above, this is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on.

First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, respectively. In particular, an image T1 labeled "Automatic" is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animation image display effect will be executed (the same applies to (B) to (H) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63. Here, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed. Here, the pressed surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is red. Note that this button image BG is an image in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged). If the player operates the performance button 63 in this state, the operation of the performance button 63 becomes invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), an animation image display effect (initial stage) is executed. In the animation screen display effect (initial stage), the game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressed surface (top surface) shown on the button image BG, as shown by arrow Y. do. At this time as well, the message image MG "Press" is displayed. Note that the game ball image KG is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), an animation image display effect (middle period) is executed. In the animation screen display (middle stage), the game ball image KG collides with the pressed surface (top surface) shown in the button image BG, and then, as shown by arrow Y, the game ball image KG collides with the pressed surface (top surface) shown in the button image BG. , and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a. Here, the button image BG is an image in a state where the production button 63 is pressed down (the protruding portion is reduced in size) due to the collision of the game ball images KG. At this time as well, the message image MG "Press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(F), the animation image display effect (second half) is executed. In the animation image display performance (later stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a and goes out of the frame. At this time, the button image BG is an image in which the production button 63 is not pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(G), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the confirmation of a win. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow-colored effect is displayed around it. As a result, the player knows that he has won before the performance symbols are displayed as a zero.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The definite stop performance (hit) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become doubles and come to a definite stop. Here, it is shown that all of the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are fixed and stopped at "5".

In the operation automation effect B, an image T1 "automatic" is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand that the animation image display effect is being executed. Further, the pressed surface (upper surface) of the button shown in the button image BG and the game ball image KG were "red". The display color of the pressed surface of the button and the game ball image is set based on the expected winning degree. For example, the expectation of winning increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold. Therefore, the automated operation performance B is a performance that has a higher expectation of winning than the automated operation performance A.

[Operation automation production C]
FIGS. 125A to 125D are diagrams for explaining the operation automation effect C.
Operation automation performance C is an example where the animation image display performance is turned on according to the setting information, but there is a right-handed instruction. When there is a right-handed instruction (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state), the animation image display effect is not executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown that the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed. The three reservation icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. In particular, an image T2 labeled "Manual" is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animation image display effect is not executed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below). In the lower left part of the display screen 7a, "Right-handed batting" is displayed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same numerical value. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". In addition, the medium effect pattern 8C is changing at high speed. Also here, three pending icons 9B corresponding to the first special symbol pending and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), an operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63. Here, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 is displayed, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed. Here, the pressed surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is white. Note that this button image BG is an image in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (the protruding portion is enlarged).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The definite stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R become a loss and the game is definitely stopped. Here, it is shown that the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are determined to stop at "5", and the middle performance symbol 8C is determined to be stopped at "6".

In the operation automation effect C, an image T2 "manual" is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand that the animation image display effect will not be executed.

In the animation image display effect described above, the game ball image KG collides with the button image BG to operate the button shown on the button image BG only once. On the other hand, animation image display effects corresponding to operations of various effect buttons 63 may be executed.

FIGS. 125(E) and 125(F) show animation image display effects corresponding to the “long press” of the effect button 63.
As shown in FIG. 125(E), an animation image display effect (long press 1) is executed. In the animation image display effect (long press 1), a large game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper center of the display screen 7a, and moves toward the pressed surface (top surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG, as shown by the arrow Y. This is a moving performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(F), an animation image display effect (long press 2) is executed. The animation image display performance (long press 2) is a performance in which the large game ball image KG comes into contact with the pressed surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG and stops. At this time, the game ball image KG presses down the button image BG, so that the button image BG is in a pressed state (the protruding portion is small).

FIGS. 125(G) and 125(H) show animation image display effects corresponding to "repeated hits" of the effect button 63.
As shown in FIG. 125(G), an animation image display effect (sequential hit 1) is executed. In the animation image display effect (sequential hits 1), the game ball image KG enters the frame from the upper center of the display screen, and moves toward the pressed surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG, as shown by the arrow Y. It's a performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), an animation image display effect (sequential hit 2) is executed. The animation image display performance (repeated hits 2) is a performance in which the game ball image KG collides with the pressed surface (upper surface) of the button indicated by the button image BG and bounces back. At this time, due to the collision of the game ball images KG, the button image BG becomes a state in which the production button 63 is pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is reduced).

After this, by alternately executing the animation image display effect (sequence 1) in FIG. 125(G) and the animation image display effect (sequence 2) in FIG. 125(H), the pressed surface shown in the button image BG ( The collision of the game ball image KG with the upper surface) is repeated.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of operation automation performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and an operation promotion performance is executed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 63 (Fig. 123(C), FIG. 124(C), FIG. 125(C)). Thereafter, after displaying an animation image showing how the button image BG has been operated on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a winning confirmation effect is executed assuming that the effect button 63 has been operated (FIG. 123(D)) E) (F) (G), Figure 124 (D) (E) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the operation of the performance button 63 can be automated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that the production button 63 corresponds to the "operation part", the button image BG corresponds to the "operation part image", the operation promotion production corresponds to the "first production", and the animation image display production corresponds to the "second production". , and the hit confirmation performance corresponds to the "predetermined performance".
The operation section may be the sword member 65 or the select button 68 as long as it can be operated by the player.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an animation image display effect is executed based on setting information set from the outside. According to this configuration, when the player sets setting information using, for example, the select button 68, the operation of the performance button 63 can be automated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, even if the animation image display effect is turned on according to the setting information, the animation image display effect is executed when there is a right hit instruction (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state). Not done. According to this configuration, in a specific case, the player can operate the performance button 63, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation image display effect is executed, an "automatic" image T1 is displayed at the upper right of the display screen (FIGS. 124(A) to 124(H)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the animation image display effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "automatic" image T1 corresponds to the "first mode of display indicating that it is the permission period".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation image display effect is not executed, the "manual" image T2 is displayed at the upper right of the display screen (FIGS. 125(A) to 125(D)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the animation image display effect will not be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the "manual" image T2 corresponds to the "second form of display indicating that it is a prohibited period".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation image display effect is executed, the player's operation on the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect is invalidated. According to this configuration, the animation image display effect is executed regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 63, and the predetermined effect is executed as if the effect button 63 had been operated, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the operation automation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display colors of both the button image BG and the game ball image KG were changed based on the expectation level of winning.
On the other hand, the display color of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the degree of expectation for winning. Moreover, not only the display color but also the display mode of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the degree of expectation for winning. For example, it is conceivable to display a more luxurious button image BG than the normal button image BG.

[Modification 2]
In the above, even if the animation image display effect is turned on according to the setting information, the animation image display effect will not be executed if there is a right-handed instruction (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state). .
The conditions for not performing the animation image display effect are not limited to these. For example, in one change, the animation image display effect is executed for the operation of the effect button 63 during the chance-up effect in the middle, and the animation image display effect is not executed for the operation of the effect button 63 during the final decision effect. It is.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, images T1 and T2 indicating "automatic" and "manual" are displayed for execution/non-execution of the animation image display effect. Any image may be used to represent execution/non-execution of such an animation image display effect. It may be set to "auto" or "manual", or symbols corresponding to "automatic" or "manual" may be used. In addition, since it is only necessary to know whether the animation image display effect is executed or not, an image is displayed only when the animation image display effect is executed, and that image is not displayed when the animation image display effect is not executed. You can do it like this.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D4-1]
a display device that displays an image;
An operation section that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the operation section,
a first effect that displays an operation unit image imitating the operation unit on the display device to prompt the player to operate the operation unit;
After the first performance, a second performance is performed, in which the operation unit image indicating the operated mode is displayed on the display device, and then the predetermined performance is performed as if the operation unit had been operated. It is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
Whether or not to execute the second effect is determined based on setting information set from the outside.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-2,
Regardless of the setting information, execution of the second effect is prohibited during a specific period;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
During a permission period in which execution of the second effect is permitted, a first mode of display is performed on the display device indicating that it is the permission period;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-4,
During a prohibition period in which execution of the second effect is prohibited, a second mode of display is performed on the display device to indicate that it is the prohibition period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-5,
During the permission period during which execution of the second performance is permitted, the operation of the operation unit by the player during the first performance is disabled;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After waiting for a predetermined period of time for the player to operate the operation unit in the first performance, if the player does not operate the operation unit, the second performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 will be explained below using FIG. 126, and the double accessory effects A to B will be explained using FIGS. 127 to 128. In FIGS. 127 and 128, the display effect on the display screen 7a is shown on the left side, and the relationship between the frame movable accessory 69 and the handle 60 is shown on the right side. This double accessory presentation is performed during the variation presentation of decorative symbols in the normal gaming state, time saving state (low probability low base state), or variable probability state (high probability high base state). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a double role performance, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69. In FIG. 126(A), the first movable accessory 14 will be explained, and in FIG. 126(B), the frame movable accessory 69 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 126(A), when the first movable accessory 14 is movable, it moves from the retracted position located on the left side of the display screen 7a to the advanced position in the right direction (in the direction of the arrow in the figure). Moving.
The first movable accessory 14 is arranged in a frame space formed by the gaming machine frame 50 and the gaming board 2 (see FIG. 1).

The handle 60 of the gaming machine 1 includes a button XMM. This button XMM has a button detection switch (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 80 via the firing control circuit 111 and the payout control board 110. When button XMM is operated, main control board 80 transmits button operation information to sub-control board 90 side. Thereby, a button image imitating the button XMM can be displayed on the display screen 7a, and a button effect can be performed in which a predetermined display effect is performed when the button XMM is operated. In the handle 60, the button XMM is operated, for example, by the player pushing the button XMM in the right direction with the thumb of the right hand. Therefore, the operating direction of button XMM is to the right, as shown in the figure.
As shown in FIG. 126(B), the frame movable accessory 69 is composed of a left side member and a right side member, and when the frame movable accessory 69 is located in the retracted position, the left side member of the frame movable accessory 69 The right side member of the frame movable accessory 69 is arranged so as to sandwich the handle 60 therebetween. That is, the left side member of the frame movable accessory 69 is arranged on the extension line of the button XMM in the opposite direction (left direction) to the operation direction (right direction) of the button XMM, and the right side member of the frame movable accessory 69 is , are arranged on an extension line of the button XMM in the operating direction (rightward) of the button XMM.
When the frame movable accessory 69 moves to the advanced position, it moves in the direction toward the handle 60 as shown in FIG. 126(B). Specifically, the frame movable accessory 69 placed on the left side of the handle 60 moves to the right, and the frame movable accessory 69 placed on the right side of the handle 60 moves to the left. In FIG. 49, the state when the frame movable accessory 69 is movable and moved to the advanced position is shown.
When the player holds the handle 60 and touches the button XMM, when the frame movable accessory 69 moves to the advanced position, the frame movable accessory 69 comes into contact with the player's hand. .
In addition, when the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 perform a movable performance, the operating direction of the button XMM, the moving direction of the first movable accessory 14, and the frame movable accessory 69 on the left side of the handle 60 are The direction of movement is the same.

[Double role performance A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the double role performance A. Double role performance A in FIG. 127 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In double accessory performance A, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 127(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol variation performance, as shown in the right-hand diagram of FIG. 127(A), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player. In addition, in the decorative pattern special variation performance, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted from the figure.

Next, as shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 127(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes rapidly is formed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. Displayed large. Furthermore, in the ready-to-win performance, as shown on the right side of FIG. 127(B), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. When the player is in a ready-to-reach state, he or she may frequently operate the button XMM in the operating direction (to the right) in anticipation of the appearance of a chance-up performance. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 127(C), a moving effect of the accessory is performed. In this accessory movable performance, the first movable accessory 14 moves on the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position. In the role movable performance, as shown in the diagram on the right side of FIG. 127(C), the player is holding the handle 60 or the player is holding the handle 60 and operating the button XMM. , the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, that is, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member moves to the right, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member moves to the left. As a result, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left side member comes into contact with the thumb of the player's hand, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right side member comes into contact with the little finger of the player's hand.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 127(D), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance, while the first movable accessory 14 moves from the advance position to the retreat position (while the first movable accessory 14 moves to the left), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in conjunction with each other. Then, seven jackpot symbols appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and are displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This interlocking effect is similar to the accessory interlocking effects A to C as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68. Further, in the jackpot symbol display performance, as shown in the right-hand diagram of FIG. 127(D), the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the advancing position to the retreating position and is released from contact with the player.
After that, a jackpot game performance is performed.

[Double role performance B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining double role performance B. Double role performance B in FIG. 128 is a performance with the same variation of special symbols. In the double accessory performance B, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(A), first, a decorative symbol variation performance is performed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move vertically at approximately the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative symbol variation performance, as shown in the right-hand diagram of FIG. 128(A), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player. In addition, in the decorative pattern special variation performance, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 128(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C changes rapidly is formed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed near the approximate center of the display screen 7a. Displayed large. Furthermore, in the ready-to-win performance, as shown on the right side of FIG. 128(B), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. When the player is in a ready-to-reach state, he or she may frequently operate the button XMM in the operating direction (to the right) in anticipation of the appearance of a chance-up effect. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 128(C), button operation explanation performance A is performed. In this button operation explanation performance A, a button operation explanation image XM1 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanation image XM1 is an image that represents the entire gaming machine 1 and also suggests the positional relationship of the button XMM with respect to the gaming machine 1. Specifically, in the button operation explanation image XM1, it is suggested that the button XMM is located at the tip of the arrow (the position indicated as "here"). Moreover, the button operation explanation image XM1 suggests the positional relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the button XMM. The button operation explanation image XM1 may be a diagram representing the entire actual gaming machine 1. Further, in button operation explanation performance A, as shown in the right-hand diagram of FIG. 128(C), the player is grasping the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(D), button operation explanation performance B is performed. In this button operation explanation performance B, a button operation explanation image XM2 is displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanation image XM2 is an image that represents the vicinity of the handle 60 and the movable frame accessory 69, and also suggests the positional relationship between the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69. Furthermore, the button operation explanation image XM2 includes the words "PUSH the arrow" and an arrow, indicating the position of the button XMM on the handle 60 and prompting the player to press (operate) the button XMM. This is an image for. In other words, the button operation explanation image XM2 is a diagram showing a zoom-up of the actual button XMM. Further, in the button operation explanation presentation B, as shown in the right-hand diagram of FIG. 128(D), the player is holding the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. The player presses the button XMM while gripping the handle 60 by viewing the button operation explanation image XM2. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the diagram on the left side of FIG. 128(E), a moving effect of the accessory is performed. In this accessory movable performance, the first movable accessory 14 moves on the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position. In the role movable performance, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 128(E), the player is holding the handle 60, or the player is holding the handle 60 and operating the button XMM. , the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, that is, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member moves to the right, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member moves to the left. As a result, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left side member comes into contact with the thumb of the player's hand, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right side member comes into contact with the little finger of the player's hand.

Next, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 128(F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display performance, while the first movable accessory 14 moves from the advance position to the retreat position (while the first movable accessory 14 moves to the left), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in conjunction with each other. Then, seven jackpot symbols appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and are displayed approximately in the center of the display screen 7a. This interlocking effect is similar to the accessory interlocking effects A to C as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68. Further, in the jackpot symbol display performance, as shown in the right-hand diagram of FIG. 128(F), the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the advancing position to the retreating position and is released from contact with the player.
After that, a jackpot game performance is performed.

[Modified example]
In the above-mentioned double accessory performances A to B, the frame movable accessory 69 is used as a movable accessory outside the frame in the accessory movable performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left side member and the right side member of the frame movable accessory 69 may be arranged to sandwich the performance button 63.
In the above-mentioned double character performances A to B, in the character movement performance, the movement of the first movable character 14 and the frame movable character 69 was performed regardless of the player's operation of the button XMM. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 may be moved based on the player operating the button XMM.

[Effect example]
In the double accessory productions A to B, the frame movable accessory 69 placed outside the frame is movable while the first movable accessory 14 placed within the frame is movable. According to this configuration, by using the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69, it is possible to instantaneously create an accessory with a sense of depth, and efficiently surprise the player in a short time. can be granted. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned double accessory productions A to B, the movement of the first movable accessory 14 placed within the frame and the movement of the frame movable accessory 69 placed outside the frame each suggest a jackpot, and the first movement After the accessory movable performance in which the accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 move is performed, a jackpot symbol display performance is performed. According to this configuration, the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 are used to momentarily create an accessory effect that gives a sense of depth, and then the jackpot symbol display performance that the player has been waiting for is performed. It can give people a great sense of bliss. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the double accessory performances A to B, the first movable accessory 14 placed within the frame and the frame movable accessory 69 placed outside the frame are both directed in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment) in the accessory movable performance. Now, move to the right). According to this configuration, the two movable accessories can create a sense of unity in addition to a sense of depth. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button XMM provided on the handle 60 is used for display effects and effects using movable accessories, and can be operated by the player applying force in the operating direction (rightward). be. Further, the frame movable accessory 69 (left side member) is arranged on an extension line of the button XMM in the opposite direction (left direction) to the operating direction (right direction). In the above-mentioned double accessory performances A to B, when the accessory movable performance is performed while the player is touching the button XMM to apply force in the operation direction, the frame movable accessory 69 is movable in the movement direction. By doing so, the frame movable accessory 69 touches the player. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the performance not only visually but also physically, and can make the moving role performance the most exciting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned double accessory performances A to B, the frame movable accessory 69 is formed of a softer material than the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, injury to the player can be prevented and the player can be encouraged to enjoy the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect XM-1]
A gaming machine comprising a gaming machine frame, a gaming board, a first movable member, and a second movable member, and capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The first movable member is arranged in a frame space formed by the game machine frame and the game board,
The second movable member is arranged in an extra-frame space outside the intra-frame space,
A first performance may be performed as one of the plurality of performances,
A second performance may be performed as one of the multiple performances,
The first performance is a performance that moves the first movable member,
The second performance is a performance that moves the second movable member,
A combination performance including the first performance and the second performance may be performed,
In the combination production, when the first production is being performed, the second production is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-1,
Further comprising display means capable of performing display effects,
A third performance may be performed as one of the multiple performances,
The third performance is a performance that displays a jackpot symbol on the display means,
The combination effect may include the third effect,
In the combination effect, the movement of the first movable member in the first effect and the movement of the second movable member in the second effect each suggest a jackpot, and the third effect is , performed after the first performance and the second performance are performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-2,
In the combination performance, the first movable member in the first performance and the second movable member in the second performance are both movable in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-3,
The game player further includes an operation means that can be operated by the player applying force in a predetermined operation direction,
The second movable member is arranged on an extension line in a direction opposite to the operating direction with respect to the operating means,
In the combination effect, if the second effect is performed when the player is touching the operating means to apply force in the operating direction, the second movable member is movable in the predetermined direction. By doing so, the second movable member touches the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XM-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XM-4,
The second movable member in the second performance is formed of a softer material than the first movable member in the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The movable member contact effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 129 to 131. In FIGS. 129 to 131, various movable accessories arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This movable member contact effect can be executed during the fluctuation. That is, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable member contact effect, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, A command containing an instruction to execute a contact effect) is analyzed, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 are operated, and the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 is A protrusion 603 (described later) provided on the disposed handle 60 is operated, and a frame movable (described later) provided on the front frame 53 on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the handle 60 disposed at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 is operated. The body 69a to 69d may be operated. The lamp control board 107 controls an electric drive source (for example, a motor) that operates the first movable accessory 14 and an electric drive source (for example, a motor) that operates the second movable accessory 15, and controls the protrusion 603. The electric drive source (for example, a motor or solenoid) that operates the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is controlled.

Here, first, movable member contact effect A will be explained, then movable member contact effect B, and then movable member contact effect C will be explained in order.

[Movable member contact effect A]
The movable member contact effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining movable member contact effect A. The movable member contact effect A can be executed during the fluctuation. Note that in FIG. 129, the touch switch 114 that detects contact with the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, as described above. As shown in FIGS. 129(A) and 129(B), the handle 60 has an annular operation lever 601 made of resin that is connected to a cylindrical handle base made of resin (not shown) and a spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 made of resin. It is configured to be rotatably provided between the two. The operating lever 601 is formed to have an annular shape, and finger-rest projections 601a are integrally formed at three locations on the outer peripheral surface of the operating lever 601. By placing the player's fingers in the interval between these three finger hook projections 601a, when rotating the operation lever 601, the player's fingers are caught on the finger hook projections 601a, making it easier to rotate the operation lever 601. There is.

The handle base is made of colored opaque (e.g. white) resin, and the operating lever 601 is made of colored opaque (e.g. black, or may be the same color as the handle base (e.g. white)) resin. The front cover 602 is made of a colorless and transparent resin, and an inner lens is provided on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted behind the inner lens. is provided. In the inner lens and the decorative substrate, a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to a rib 602aa to be described later, which is larger than the outer circumference of the rib 602aa. In other words, the inner lens and the decorative substrate do not interfere with the protrusion 603, which will be described later.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. . Therefore, even when all of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are turned off, it is difficult to see the plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semitransparent.

When the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. Thereby, the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emission mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board.

To operate the handle 60, first, the player grips the handle 60 from the front so as to wrap it around the palm of the hand, and places the player's fingers between the three finger hook projections 601a. When the player rotates the operating lever 601 clockwise and the amount of rotation increases, the firing strength of the game ball increases, and the game ball is fired by the firing device 112 with the firing strength of the game ball commensurate with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. The ball is fired toward a game area 3 defined on the game board 2. When the player loosens the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, the handle 60 is rotated counterclockwise due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, and the firing strength of the game ball becomes weaker. Note that if the player continues to loosen the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, or if the player releases the palm of the hand from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 will return to its original position due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. , and the firing of game balls will be stopped.

A plurality of elongated holes 602a are provided radially on the same circumference on the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602, with the longitudinal direction facing toward the outer circumference (here, there are 12 elongated holes 602a). A rib 602aa is formed on the circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a and protrudes by a predetermined distance (approximately 10 mm in this embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602, so that the inner circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a is smooth. is formed.

In the internal space of the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601, a protrusion 603 that moves in the front-rear direction from the internal space of the front cover 602 along the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a is provided corresponding to each elongated hole 602a. Further, a back-and-forth moving mechanism 604 is provided that includes an electric drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) that moves the protrusion 603 back and forth along the inner circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a. In addition to an electric drive source, the back-and-forth movement mechanism 604 uses a reducer that decelerates the rotation of the motor or a rotational movement of the motor (rotational movement that decelerates the rotation of the motor), for example, when the electric drive source is a motor. A motion conversion mechanism for converting the linear motion of the protrusion 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the linear motion of the protrusion 603 when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and, in addition to these mechanisms, It is composed of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The protrusion 603 is capable of reciprocating between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and is formed of a colored, opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although a decorative substrate is provided, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emitting mode of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, the protrusion 603 may be colored and opaque (e.g. , red), so the light emitting mode of the protrusion 603 cannot be changed.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are displayed before the timing at which the protrusion 603 is actuated (timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 starts) (for example, at the timing at which the protrusion 603 is The light emission starts in a predetermined light emission mode from 5 seconds before the start of the operation mode (timing 5 seconds before the start of the operation mode), and continues to emit light over a period until the operation of the protrusion 603 ends. In other words, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board serve as an effect that foretells the operation of the protrusion 603. The predetermined lighting modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden color (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting → golden color (yellow). The expectation of winning increases in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (high chance of winning). In other words, the expected degree of winning due to the operation of the protrusion 603 can be indicated by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protrusion 603 is placed in the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the protrusion 603 is placed on the inner circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a, and specifically, the front surface of the protrusion 603 is placed on the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a, and specifically, the front surface of the protrusion 603 is placed on the inner circumferential surface of the elongated hole 602a. It is in a state where it is recessed in depth by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, it is half (5 mm) of the length of the rib 602aa) (FIG. 129(A)). In other words, even when the player grips the handle 60 with his/her palm so as to wrap it around the front of the handle 60 and places the player's fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is at the retracted position (home position). , so that the player's palm does not come into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603 at all. In addition, since the urging force of the return spring is acting on the protrusion 603, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when the power is cut off due to a power outage during a game, the urging force of the return spring is applied to the protrusion 603. This allows the protrusion 603 to be returned to the retracted position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protruding part 603 is placed in the advanced position, the protruding part 603 protrudes by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, about 10 mm at most) from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 through the elongated hole 602a. (FIG. 129(B)). In other words, when the player grips the handle 60 with his or her palm so as to wrap it around the front of the handle 60 and places the player's fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is placed in the advanced position. The player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603. Note that even if the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603, the tip of the protrusion 603 that is in contact with the player's palm does not move any further so that the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 is not overloaded ( An overload prevention mechanism (which prevents the player's palm from pulling away from the handle 60) is provided in the forward and backward movement mechanism 604. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The operation modes of the protrusions 603 include operation mode 1 in which all the protrusions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then return to the retracted position (home position) all at once; Operation mode 2: one protrusion 603 moves counterclockwise from the retreat position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retreat position (home position) again. Operation mode 3: Move to the advanced position and return to the retracted position (home position) 3. Move the protrusions 603 to the retracted position so that three to four protrusions 603 form a wave and the waves propagate clockwise in order. (home position) to the advanced position and back again to the retracted position (home position) Operation mode 4: Waves are formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the waves propagate counterclockwise in order. Examples include operation mode 5 in which the protruding portion 603 is moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is actuated (the timing at which the operating mode of the protrusion 603 is started) will be explained. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, showing a left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. In the display mode, a fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) in a floating display mode, and then (in other words) Then, as the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low speed toward the bottom, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. , resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Note that there are a plurality of background images for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol that are currently fluctuating as the end of the first special symbol reservation is a fluctuation display displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Ad. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad~ No pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only one white spherical pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from now on.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The icon with the icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

The fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, and then the left decorative pattern temporarily stops and displays at the number "2" and moves gradually in the vertical direction, and the right decorative pattern temporarily stops at the number "2". The display mode is such that the display stops and slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the same pattern (in this case, the number "2") to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated (fluctuated display).

Next, when the battle effect starts, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle between the ally character and the enemy character unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. It will be done. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation level of a jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In a battle performance, when an ally character wins and an enemy character loses, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (confirmed display), and it becomes a hit, and then a winning game (winning performance) is performed. ) is started. When the win is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the completion of the variation. On the other hand, in a battle performance, when an ally character is defeated and an enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same timing. The decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern do not line up with the same pattern and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the variation.

When an ally character and an enemy character are fighting in a battle production, when the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a production button is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. A button image imitating the button 63 is displayed, and a message image "Continuously hit!" urging the player to press the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image. The probability of winning the message image MG increases in the order of "Press!" → "Continuous Hit!" → "Long Press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and as this arrow image repeatedly moves back and forth in the up and down direction, the arrow image also reminds the player of the performance button 63. It is possible to prompt a pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation section of the production button 63 downward). The button image, message image, and arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the production button 63, or disappears from the display screen 7a when the player does not press the production button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the production button 63 is pressed or when a predetermined period of time passes without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called "first premium background image") having seven colors as a background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 129(C). 1 rainbow background image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is moved to a retracted position above the image display device 7. (home position), advance (move) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and move for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character becomes smaller as it recedes in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, causing an explosion. Become. Thereafter, a special win background image for conveying a win is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "2").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation mode of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 disposed at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advance position) of the front frame 53 1 will be started.

In other words, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In conjunction with the start of the action of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position), the protruding portion 603 starts the action of advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position; In conjunction with the second movable accessory 15 stopping at the advanced position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 stops at the advanced position for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable In conjunction with the start of the action of the accessory 15 returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the protrusion 603 starts the action of returning again from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 is operation mode 1, but of course, any operation mode from operation mode 2 to operation mode 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operating mode of the protrusion 603. In operation modes 2 to 5, the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation of the second movable object is performed continuously during the period when the second movable object moves forward (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a and then returns to the retreat position (home position). .

Specifically, in the operation mode 2 of the protrusions 603, one protrusion 603 sequentially moves clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and retracts again during the second movable accessory operation period. When the operation of returning to the position (home position) is continuously performed and the second movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in operation mode 3 of the protrusions 603, During the second movable accessory operation period, one protrusion 603 sequentially moves counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position) again. , When the second movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 4 of the protrusion 603, during the second movable accessory operation period, three to The protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returned to the retracted position (home position) so that the four protrusions 603 form a wave shape and the waves propagate clockwise in order. When the operation is performed continuously and the second movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 5 of the protrusion 603, , the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that a wave is formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the waves propagate counterclockwise in order, and then returned to the retracted position (home position). ) is performed continuously, and when the second movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

Note that, as shown in FIG. 129(C), when the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called , "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in conjunction with the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, a handle disposed at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 is displayed. Operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 provided at 60 had started. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as a background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 129(D). A second premium background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the above is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable role provided on the game board 2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The object 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a central position (advance position) that is in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (forward). The robot moves forward (moves), and repeatedly moves back and forth in small steps in the left and right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character becomes smaller as it recedes in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, causing an explosion. Become. Thereafter, a special win background image that conveys a win is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "2").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed. The protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 disposed at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 operates in conjunction with the start of the movement toward the center position (advance position) of the screen 7a. Aspect 1 will be started.

In other words, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The protruding portion 603 starts advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position in conjunction with the start of the advancing (moving) operation toward the center position (advancing position). In conjunction with the first movable accessory 14 repeatedly moving back and forth in the left and right direction in small increments at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 remains in the advanced position for a predetermined period of time. When the first movable accessory 14 stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the protrusion 603 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 to return from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). ).

Here, the operation mode of the protruding portion 603 is operation mode 1, but of course, any operation mode from operation mode 2 to operation mode 5 may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protrusion 603. In operation mode 2 to operation mode 5, the first movable accessory 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The movable object is continuously operated during the first movable object operation period in which it advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position). There is.

Specifically, in the operation mode 2 of the protrusions 603, one protrusion 603 sequentially moves clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and retracts again during the first movable accessory operation period. When the operation of returning to the position (home position) is continuously performed and the first movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in operation mode 3 of the protrusions 603, During the first movable accessory operation period, one protrusion 603 sequentially moves counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position) again. When the first movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in operation mode 4 of the protrusion 603, three to The protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and then returned to the retracted position (home position) so that the four protrusions 603 form a wave shape and the waves propagate clockwise in order. When the operation is performed continuously and the first movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in operation mode 5 of the protrusion 603, , the protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that a wave is formed from three to four protrusions 603 and the waves propagate counterclockwise in order, and then returned to the retracted position (home position). ) is performed continuously, and when the first movable accessory operation period has elapsed, all the protrusions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, as described above, the biasing force of the return spring is acting on the protrusion 603, so when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during a game and the power is turned off. is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring, and the timing at which the protrusion 603 is activated (the operating mode of the protrusion 603 is started) Otherwise, the protruding portion 603 will not protrude to the advanced position. Therefore, even if a player who is about to start playing a game or an employee such as a clerk at a game parlor disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the protrusion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the demonstration performance for waiting for customers is being performed, the protrusion 603 is in a state of protruding to the advanced position, and when the demonstration performance for waiting for customers is completed, the protrusion 603 is moved to the retreat position (home position). position). When a player or an employee such as a clerk at the game parlor touches the handle 60 while a demonstration performance for waiting for a customer is being performed and the protruding portion 603 is protruding to the advanced position, the handle 60 is After a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds during which the protrusion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol) has elapsed since the staff member touched it, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position). There is.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during a game and the power is turned off. When the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring, but if the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during the game. When the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a staff member such as a clerk at a game parlor can detect a state where the power of the game machine 1 is not turned on (a state where the power of the game machine 1 is cut off) before starting business or after business ends. As a result, the protruding portion 603 can be moved to the advanced position and placed in a protruding state, so that the protruding portion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol.

[Movable member contact effect B]
Next, movable member contact effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining movable member contact effect B. The movable member contact effect B can be executed during the fluctuation. Note that in FIG. 130, the touch switch 114 that detects contact with the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, as described above. As shown in FIGS. 130(A) and 130(B), the handle 60 has an annular operation lever 601 made of resin that is connected to a cylindrical handle base made of resin (not shown) and a spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 made of resin. It is configured to be rotatably provided between the two. The operation lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and finger-rest projections 601a are integrally formed at three locations on the outer peripheral surface of the operation lever 601. By placing the player's fingers in the interval between these three finger hook projections 601a, when rotating the operation lever 601, the player's fingers are caught on the finger hook projections 601a, making it easier to rotate the operation lever 601. There is.

The handle base is made of colored opaque (e.g. white) resin, and the operating lever 601 is made of colored opaque (e.g. black, or may be the same color as the handle base (e.g. white)) resin. The front cover 602 is made of a colorless and transparent resin, and an inner lens is provided on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted behind the inner lens. is provided. In the inner lens and the decorative substrate, a through hole that is larger than the outer circumference of the rib 602aa is formed in a portion corresponding to a rib 602aa, which will be described later. In other words, the inner lens and the decorative substrate do not interfere with the protrusion 603, which will be described later.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. . Therefore, even when all of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are turned off, it is difficult to see the plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semitransparent.

When the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. Thereby, the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emission mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board.

To operate the handle 60, first, the player grips the handle 60 from the front so as to wrap it around the palm of the hand, and places the player's fingers between the three finger hook projections 601a. When the player rotates the control lever 601 clockwise and the amount of rotation increases, the firing strength of the game ball increases, and the game ball is fired by the firing device 112 with the firing strength of the game ball commensurate with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. The ball is fired toward a game area 3 defined on the game board 2. When the player loosens the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, the handle 60 is rotated counterclockwise due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, and the firing strength of the game ball becomes weaker. Note that if the player continues to loosen the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, or if the player releases the palm of the hand from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 will return to its original position due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. , and the firing of game balls will be stopped.

One large hole 602a is provided at the center of the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. A rib 602aa is formed on the circumferential surface of the hole 602a and protrudes by a predetermined distance (about 10 mm in this embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602, and the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a is formed smoothly. has been done.

A protrusion 603 that moves in the front-rear direction from the inner space of the front cover 602 along the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a is provided in the inner space of the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601. A back-and-forth movement mechanism 604 is provided that includes an electric drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) that moves the movement back and forth along the inner circumferential surface of the body. In addition to an electric drive source, the back-and-forth movement mechanism 604 uses a reducer that decelerates the rotation of the motor or a rotational movement of the motor (rotational movement that decelerates the rotation of the motor), for example, when the electric drive source is a motor. A motion conversion mechanism for converting the linear motion of the protrusion 603, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the linear motion of the protrusion 603 when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and, in addition to these mechanisms, It is composed of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The protrusion 603 is capable of reciprocating between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and is formed of a colored, opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although a decorative substrate is provided, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emitting mode of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, the protrusion 603 may be colored and opaque (e.g. , red), so the light emitting mode of the protrusion 603 cannot be changed.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are displayed before the timing at which the protrusion 603 is actuated (timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 starts) (for example, at the timing at which the protrusion 603 is The light emission starts in a predetermined light emission mode from 5 seconds before the start of the operation mode (timing 5 seconds before the start of the operation mode), and continues to emit light over a period until the operation of the protrusion 603 ends. In other words, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board serve as an effect that foretells the operation of the protrusion 603. The predetermined lighting modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden color (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting → golden color (yellow). The expectation of winning increases in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (high chance of winning). In other words, the expected degree of winning due to the operation of the protrusion 603 can be indicated by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protrusion 603 is placed in the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the protrusion 603 is placed on the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a, and specifically, the front surface of the protrusion 603 is placed on the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a, and specifically, the front surface of the protrusion 603 is placed on the inner circumferential surface of the hole 602a. 130 (A)). In other words, even when the player grips the handle 60 with his/her palm so as to wrap it around the front of the handle 60 and places the player's fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is at the retracted position (home position). , so that the player's palm does not come into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603 at all. In addition, since the urging force of the return spring is acting on the protrusion 603, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when the power is cut off due to a power outage during a game, the urging force of the return spring is applied to the protrusion 603. This allows the protrusion 603 to be returned to the retracted position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protruding part 603 is placed in the advanced position, the protruding part 603 passes through the hole 602a and protrudes from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, about 10 mm at most). state (FIG. 130(B)). In other words, when the player grips the handle 60 with his or her palm so as to wrap it around the front of the handle 60 and places the player's fingers between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is placed in the advanced position. The player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603. Note that even if the player's palm comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603, the tip of the protrusion 603 that is in contact with the player's palm does not move any further so that the forward/backward movement mechanism 604 is not overloaded ( An overload prevention mechanism (which prevents the player's palm from pulling away from the handle 60) is provided in the forward and backward movement mechanism 604. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The operation mode of the protrusion 603 includes an operation mode in which the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position) again. By utilizing this mode of operation, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the protruding portion 603 maintains a state in which it protrudes to the advanced position for a predetermined period of time, and it is possible to realize an operation in which the protruding portion 603 intermittently protrudes to the advanced position. In addition, it is possible to realize an operation in which the protruding portion 603 continuously protrudes to the advanced position and retracts to the retracted position (home position) like a piston movement.

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is actuated (the timing at which the operating mode of the protrusion 603 is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, showing a left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. In the display mode, a fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) in a floating display mode, and then (in other words) Then, as the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low speed toward the bottom, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. , resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Note that there are a plurality of background images for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol that are currently fluctuating as the end of the first special symbol reservation is a fluctuation display displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Ad. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad~ No pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only one white spherical pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from now on.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The icon with the icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

The fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, and then the left decorative pattern temporarily stops and displays at the number "3" and moves gradually in the vertical direction, and the right decorative pattern temporarily stops at the number "3". The display is stopped, and the display mode moves slowly in small increments in the vertical direction, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the same pattern (here, the number "3") to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated (fluctuated display).

Next, when the battle effect starts, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle between the ally character and the enemy character unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. It will be done. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation level of a jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In a battle performance, when an ally character wins and an enemy character loses, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (confirmed display), and it becomes a hit, and then a winning game (winning performance) is performed. ) is started. When the win is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the completion of the variation. On the other hand, in a battle performance, when an ally character is defeated and an enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same timing. The decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern do not line up with the same pattern and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the variation.

When an ally character and an enemy character are fighting in a battle production, when the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a production button is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. A button image imitating 63 is displayed, and a message image "Long press!" urging the player to press the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image. The probability of winning the message image MG increases in the order of "Press!" → "Continuous Hit!" → "Long Press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and as this arrow image repeatedly moves back and forth in the up and down direction, the arrow image also reminds the player of the performance button 63. It is possible to prompt a pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation section of the production button 63 downward). The button image, message image, and arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the production button 63, or disappears from the display screen 7a when the player does not press the production button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time passes without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called "first premium background image") having seven colors as a background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 130(C). 1 rainbow background image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is moved to a retreat position above the image display device 7. (home position), advances (moves) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character becomes smaller as it recedes in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, causing an explosion. Become. Thereafter, a special win background image that conveys a win is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (in this case, the number "3").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation mode of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 disposed at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advance position) of the front frame 53 will be started.

In other words, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In conjunction with the start of the action of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position), the protruding portion 603 starts the action of advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position; In conjunction with the second movable accessory 15 stopping at the advanced position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 stops at the advanced position for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the second movable In conjunction with the start of the action of the accessory 15 returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), the protrusion 603 starts the action of returning again from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is such that the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again. Of course, other operating modes may also be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operating mode of the protrusion 603. In another operation mode, the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable accessory is continuously operated during the second movable accessory operation period in which the second movable accessory moves forward (moves) toward the center position (advance position) and then returns to the retreat position (home position).

Specifically, during the second movable accessory operation period, the protrusion 603 intermittently protrudes to the advanced position (the protrusion 603 repeatedly moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position). When the second movable accessory operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), or during the second movable accessory operation period. An operation in which the protruding portion 603 continuously protrudes to the advanced position and retracts to the retracted position (home position) like a piston motion (an operation in which the protruding portion 603 repeatedly moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position) When the second movable accessory operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

Note that, as shown in FIG. 130(C), when the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called , "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in conjunction with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, a handle disposed at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 is displayed. The operation mode of the protrusion 603 provided at 60 (the operation in which the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position)) is started. was. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation mode of the protrusion 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as a background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 130(D). A second premium background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the above is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable role provided on the game board 2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The object 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a central position (advance position) that is in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (forward). The robot moves forward (moves), and repeatedly moves back and forth in small steps in the left and right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character becomes smaller as it recedes in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, causing an explosion. Become. Thereafter, a special win background image that conveys a win is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (in this case, the number "3").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed. In conjunction with the start of the movement toward the center position (advance position) of the screen 7a, the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 disposed at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 moves. The aspect will be started.

In other words, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The protruding portion 603 starts advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position in conjunction with the start of the advancing (moving) operation toward the center position (advancing position). In conjunction with the first movable accessory 14 repeatedly moving back and forth in the left and right direction in small increments at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protrusion 603 remains in the advanced position for a predetermined period of time. When the first movable accessory 14 stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the protrusion 603 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 to return from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). ).

Here, the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is such that the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again. Of course, other operating modes may also be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operating mode of the protrusion 603. In another operation mode, the first movable accessory 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory is continuously operated during the first movable accessory operation period in which it advances (moves) toward the central position (advance position) of 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the first movable accessory operation period, the protruding part 603 intermittently protrudes (the protruding part 603 continuously moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position). When the first movable object operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), and the piston movement is stopped during the first movable object operation period. The protrusion 603 continuously protrudes and retracts (the protrusion 603 continuously moves back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position), and the first movable body When the accessory operation period has elapsed, the protrusion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, as described above, the biasing force of the return spring is acting on the protrusion 603, so when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during a game and the power is turned off. is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring, and the timing at which the protrusion 603 is activated (the operating mode of the protrusion 603 is started) Otherwise, the protruding portion 603 will not protrude to the advanced position. Therefore, even if a player who is about to start playing a game or an employee such as a clerk at a game parlor disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the protrusion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the demonstration performance for waiting for customers is being performed, the protrusion 603 is in a state of protruding to the advanced position, and when the demonstration performance for waiting for customers is completed, the protrusion 603 is moved to the retreat position (home position). position). When a player or an employee such as a clerk at the game parlor touches the handle 60 while a demonstration performance for waiting for a customer is being performed and the protruding portion 603 is protruding to the advanced position, the handle 60 is After a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds during which the protrusion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol) has elapsed since the staff member touched it, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position). There is.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during a game and the power is turned off. When the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the biasing force of the return spring, but if the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during the game. When the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a staff member such as a clerk at a game parlor can detect a state where the power of the game machine 1 is not turned on (a state where the power of the game machine 1 is cut off) before starting business or after business ends. As a result, the protruding portion 603 can be moved to the advanced position and placed in a protruding state, so that the protruding portion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol.

[Movable member contact effect C]
Next, movable member contact effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact effect C. The movable member contact effect C can be executed during the fluctuation. Note that in FIG. 131, the touch switch 114 that detects contact with the handle 60, the firing volume 115 that detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, as described above. As shown in FIGS. 131(A) and 131(B), the handle 60 has an annular operating lever 601 made of resin that is connected to a cylindrical handle base made of resin (not shown) and a spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 made of resin. It is configured to be rotatably provided between the two. The operation lever 601 is formed in an annular shape, and finger-rest projections 601a are integrally formed at three locations on the outer peripheral surface of the operation lever 601. By placing the player's fingers in the interval between these three finger hook projections 601a, when rotating the operation lever 601, the player's fingers are caught on the finger hook projections 601a, making it easier to rotate the operation lever 601. There is.

The handle base is made of colored opaque (e.g. white) resin, and the operating lever 601 is made of colored opaque (e.g. black, or may be the same color as the handle base (e.g. white)) resin. The front cover 602 is made of a colorless and transparent resin, and an inner lens is provided on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted behind the inner lens. is provided.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. . Therefore, even when all of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are turned off, it is difficult to see the plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semitransparent.

When the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, causing the front cover 602 to emit light. Thereby, the light emission mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emission mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board.

To operate the handle 60, first, the player grips the handle 60 from the front so as to wrap it around the palm of the hand, and places the player's fingers between the three finger hook projections 601a. When the player rotates the control lever 601 clockwise and the amount of rotation increases, the firing strength of the game ball increases, and the game ball is fired by the firing device 112 with the firing strength of the game ball commensurate with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. The ball is fired toward a game area 3 defined on the game board 2. When the player loosens the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, the handle 60 is rotated counterclockwise due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, and the firing strength of the game ball becomes weaker. Note that if the player continues to loosen the clockwise rotation of the operating lever 601, or if the player releases the palm of the hand from the handle 60, the operating lever 601 will return to its original position due to the biasing force of a return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. , and the firing of game balls will be stopped.

Frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 at the top, bottom, right and left of the handle 60 (that is, around the handle 60). That is, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. On the right and left sides of the handle 60 shown in FIG. 1, frame movable bodies 69 (also referred to as frame movable accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks, were provided. is formed with a motif of flower petals surrounding the handle 60.

In addition to movable frame bodies 69a to 69d formed with flower petals as a motif, the front frame 53 includes an electric motor that rotates the movable frame bodies 69a to 69d to a bud state or a flowering state. A rotational movement mechanism 534 including a drive source (eg, a motor or a solenoid) is provided. In addition to an electric drive source, the rotational movement mechanism 534 may also include, for example, a speed reducer that decelerates the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, or a rotary motion of the motor (a rotary motion that decelerates the rotation of the motor). A motion conversion mechanism for converting the motion into rotational motion of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the rotational motion of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d when the electric drive source is a solenoid; In addition to these mechanisms, it is comprised of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are capable of reciprocating between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position, and are each made of a colored, opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the frontmost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although a decorative board is provided, the light emitting pattern of the front cover 602 can be changed due to the light emitting pattern of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board. Since the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided in the front frame 53 separately from the frame movable bodies 60 and are colored and opaque (for example, red), the light emission mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d cannot be changed. It looks like this.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are mounted on the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d before the timing when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are activated (timing when the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d starts). The period from when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d start emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode from the timing when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are activated (5 seconds before the timing when the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d starts) until the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d end their operation. Light emission continues throughout the period. In other words, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board serve as an effect that foretells the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. The predetermined lighting modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden color (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, where blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting → golden color (yellow). The expectation of winning increases in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (high chance of winning). In other words, the expectation of winning due to the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 is implemented on a decorative board housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60. This can be suggested by the light emission mode of a plurality of full-color LEDs.

When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in the retracted position (home position), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in the flowering state (the state shown in FIG. 131(A)). Even when the player grips the handle 60 with his/her palm so as to wrap it around the front of the handle 60, and the player's fingers are placed between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the open state. Therefore, the back of the player's hand and fingers do not come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d at all. Furthermore, since the urging force of the return spring is acting on the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or when a power outage occurs during a game and the power is cut off, the return spring is activated. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the flowering state by the urging force of.

On the other hand, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in the advanced position, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in a bud state (the state shown in FIG. 131(B)). When the player grips the handle 60 with his palm so as to wrap it around it from the front and places his fingers between the three finger hook projections 601a, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in a bud state. Therefore, the back of the player's hand and fingers are covered by the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d and come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. Note that even if the back of the player's hand or fingers come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the rotating movement mechanism 534 is not overloaded. The rotational movement mechanism 534 is provided with an overload prevention mechanism that prevents the inner circumferential surfaces of the bodies 69a to 69d from pressing the backs of the players' hands and fingers any further. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d operate in such a manner that the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and return to the retracted position (home position) again. By utilizing this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d protrude to the advanced position for a predetermined period of time to maintain the bud state, and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d intermittently advance to the advanced position. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to form a bud state, or retract to the retracted position (home position) to bloom. Among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, the right frame movable body 69d, and the lower frame movable body 69c can be realized. After the movable body 69b moves clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, it is possible to realize an operation in which all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once. , among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c, the lower frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a are moved counterclockwise to the retracted position ( After moving from the home position to the advanced position, all frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be returned to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

Next, the timing at which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are operated (the timing at which the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is started) will be explained. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, showing a left decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. In the display mode, a fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed moves slowly (at low speed) upwards for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) in a floating display mode, and then (in other words) Then, as the stop display of the decorative pattern is canceled, the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where it is about to move, and then gradually increases its speed from low speed toward the bottom, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state. , resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a manner in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction. Note that there are a plurality of background images for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol that are currently fluctuating as the end of the first special symbol reservation is a fluctuation display displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. is now possible. The four pending display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first pending display position 9Ad, a second pending display position 9Ad, a third pending display position 9Ad, and a fourth pending display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Ad.

Note that the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may have the same size or may have different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance) of the variable display position 9Cd is the same as the size (horizontal distance) of the pending display position 9Ad. (distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same for both dimensions). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad~ No pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only one white spherical pending icon remains in stock without being consumed. In addition, in the following explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 from now on.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the shape and color of the icon can indicate the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. represents. For example, among the six icons: yellow (gold) star icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon The icon with the icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest probability of winning.

The fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the decorative pattern starts, and then the left decorative pattern temporarily stops and displays at the number "8" and moves gradually in the vertical direction, and the right decorative pattern temporarily stops at the number "8". The display mode is such that the display stops and slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction, and the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the same pattern (here, the number "8") to form a reach. At this time, the medium decorative pattern continues to be fluctuated (fluctuated display).

Next, when the battle effect starts, an ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle between the ally character and the enemy character unfolds in the center of the display screen 7a. It will be done. The battle performance is a performance in which the expectation level of a jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern disappear from the display screen 7a.

In a battle performance, when an ally character wins and an enemy character loses, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (confirmed display), and it becomes a hit, and then a winning game (winning performance) is performed. ) is started. When the win is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the completion of the variation. On the other hand, in a battle performance, when an ally character is defeated and an enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same timing. The decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern do not line up with the same pattern and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a due to the end of the variation.

When an ally character and an enemy character are fighting in a battle production, when the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, a production button is displayed near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. A button image imitating the button 63 is displayed, and a message image "Continuously hit!" urging the player to press the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image. The probability of winning the message image MG increases in the order of "Press!" → "Continuous Hit!" → "Long Press!". Note that an arrow image pointing downward is also displayed on the display screen 7a between the button image and the message image, and as this arrow image repeatedly moves back and forth in the up and down direction, the arrow image also reminds the player of the performance button 63. It is possible to prompt a pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation section of the production button 63 downward). The button image, message image, and arrow image disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the production button 63, or disappears from the display screen 7a when the player does not press the production button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time passes without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called "first premium background image") having seven colors as a background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 131(C). 1 rainbow background image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly characters and enemy characters disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is moved to a retreat position above the image display device 7. (home position), advances (moves) toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and moves for a predetermined period of time (for example, approximately 5 seconds). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a special victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character becomes smaller as it recedes in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, causing an explosion. Become. Thereafter, a special win background image that conveys a win is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "8").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In conjunction with the start of the advancing (moving) operation toward the center position (advancing position) of the handle 7a, the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 is started. The Rukoto.

In other words, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided separately from the handle 60 on the front frame 53 start moving in conjunction with each other. That will happen.

Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In conjunction with the start of the advance (move) operation toward the center position (advance position), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d begin the advance (move) operation from the retreat position (home position) toward the advance position. When the second movable accessory 15 stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) at the advanced position, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d stop for a predetermined time at the advanced position and change to the bud state. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) in conjunction with the second movable accessory 15 starting to return from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). start the operation of returning to the home position).

Here, as the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period, and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. Of course, other modes of operation may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In another operation mode, the second movable accessory 15 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable accessory is continuously operated during the second movable accessory operation period in which the second movable accessory moves forward (moves) toward the center position (advance position) and then returns to the retreat position (home position).

Specifically, during the second movable body accessory operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advanced position to bring the frame into a bud state (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are in the retracted position (home position)). When the second movable body accessory operation period has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move to the retracted position (home position). , or during the second movable body accessory operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to form a bud state, or retreat to the retreat position (home position) to form a flowering state. When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d perform an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d repeatedly move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position and the second movable body accessory operation period has elapsed, the frame movable body When the bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) or during the second movable body accessory operation period, among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, first the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, and the right side frame movable body The lower frame movable body 69d and the lower frame movable body 69b move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and when the second movable body accessory operation period has elapsed, all When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once, or during the second movable body accessory operation period, among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, first the left frame movable body 69c, then the lower frame movable body 69c The frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in this order, and the second movable body accessory operation period When the period has elapsed, all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 131(C), when the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image (so-called , "first rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a frame provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2. The operation mode of the movable bodies 69a to 69d (the operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period, and then return to the retracted position (home position)) is started. was. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the production button 63 is pressed or a predetermined period of time elapses without the production button 63 being pressed, a first premium background image having seven colors as a background image is displayed as shown in FIG. 131(D). A second premium background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the above is displayed on the display screen 7a, the friendly character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable role provided on the game board 2 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The object 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a central position (advance position) that is in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (forward). The robot moves forward (moves), and repeatedly moves back and forth in small steps in the left and right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advance position to the retreat position (home position), and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image. An enemy character appears (is displayed) in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character becomes smaller as it recedes in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions, causing an explosion. Become. Thereafter, a special win background image that conveys a win is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "8").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is moved from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed. In conjunction with the start of the movement toward the center position (advance position) of the screen 7a, the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 starts. It will be done.

In other words, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 are linked and start moving. That will happen.

Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d advance (move) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position in conjunction with the start of the advanced (moved) operation toward the central position (advance position) of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move in conjunction with the first movable accessory 14 repeatedly moving back and forth in the left and right direction in small steps at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds). It stops for a predetermined time at the advanced position and enters the bud state, and when the predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 starts moving back from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position), and the frame is moved. The movable bodies 69a to 69d start returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position).

Here, as the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period, and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. Of course, other modes of operation may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In another operation mode, the first movable accessory 14 moves from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 to a position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory is continuously operated during the first movable accessory operation period in which it advances (moves) toward the central position (advance position) of 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the first movable body accessory operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advanced position to bring the frame into a bud state (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are in the retracted position (home position)). When the first movable body accessory operation period has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move to the retracted position (home position). , or during the first movable body accessory operation period, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to form a bud state, or retreat to the retreat position (home position) to form a flowering state. When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d perform an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d repeatedly move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position and the first movable body accessory operation period has elapsed, the frame movable body When the bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) or during the first movable body accessory operation period, among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, first the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, and the right side frame movable body The lower frame movable body 69d and the lower frame movable body 69b move clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and when the first movable body accessory operation period has elapsed, all When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once, or during the first movable body accessory operation period, among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, first the left frame movable body 69c, then the lower frame movable body 69c The frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a move counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in this order, and the first movable body accessory operation period When the period has elapsed, all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

In the above-described embodiment, as described above, the biasing force of the return spring is applied to the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, so when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during the game. When the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the flowering state by the biasing force of the return spring. Therefore, a player who is about to start playing a game or an attendant such as a clerk at a game parlor can disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol and also disinfect the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d with alcohol.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring is applied to the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d as described above, a power outage occurs during a game when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on. When the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the open state by the biasing force of the return spring, but if the gaming machine 1 is not powered on, a power outage occurs during a game. When this occurs and the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be moved to the advanced position by the biasing force of the return spring to be in the bud state. Even with this configuration, as described above, even if the back of the player's hand or fingers come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the rotational movement mechanism 534 is prevented from being overloaded. Since the rotary movement mechanism 534 is equipped with an overload prevention mechanism that prevents the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d that are in contact with the back of the player's hand and fingers from pressing any further on the back of the player's hand and fingers, The overload prevention mechanism is configured even if a player who is about to start a game or an employee of the game center inserts a finger into the contact area between the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d in an attempt to disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol. The inner peripheral surfaces of the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be disinfected with alcohol against the urging force of the contact spring.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the movable member contact effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B in FIG. It has a movable protrusion 603 (movable member) that is actuated by an electric drive source, and when the protrusion 603 (movable member) is actuated to start moving, the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) It is now possible to perform the first effect (FIG. 129(B) for movable member contact effect A, FIG. 130(B) for movable member contact effect B) in which the protruding portion 603 (movable member) can contact the ing. According to this configuration, even if movable members such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on a conventional game board start to move, these movable members will not touch the player. However, when the protrusion 603 (movable member) starts moving while the player grasps the handle 60 (operating means) with the palm of his hand from the front, the player suddenly Since the hand comes into contact with the protrusion 603, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and novel effect of contact between the protrusion 603 (movable member) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.
Furthermore, in the movable member contact effect C shown in FIG. 131, movable frame movable bodies 69a to 69d ( When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are activated to start moving, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are held in the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). The first touchable effect (FIG. 131(B) in movable member contact effect C) can be executed. According to this configuration, even if movable members such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on a conventional game board start to move, these movable members will not touch the player. However, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) start moving while the player is grasping the handle 60 (operating means) with the palm of his hand from the front, suddenly, Since the player's hands come into contact with the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members), an unprecedented and novel effect of contact between the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) and the player is created. It can be provided to players. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A shown in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B shown in FIG. The handle 60 (operating means) and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) in the movable member contact effect C are provided on the front frame 53 side of the gaming machine 1. According to this configuration, the movable member can be directly touched by the player, which can contribute to increasing the player's desire to play.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B in FIG. , it becomes difficult for the player to touch the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means) at the retreat position (home position) (first position), and the player operates the handle 60 (operating means) at the advanced position (second position). It is possible to come into contact with the player's hand. According to this configuration, since it is possible to control the state in which the protrusion 603 (movable member) contacts the player's hand and the state in which it does not contact, the protrusion 603 (movable member) ) by shifting the control from a non-contact state to a contact state, it is possible to surprise the player (impart a sense of tension) and realize an impactful performance.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect C in FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are provided outside the handle 60 (operating means), ) (first position) without covering the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means), and the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) at the advanced position (second position). It is designed to cover the According to this configuration, since it is possible to control the state in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are in contact with the player's hands and the state in which they are not in contact, the frame movable body By shifting the control from a state in which the movable members 69a to 69d (movable members) do not make contact to a state in which they make contact, it is possible to surprise the player (impart a sense of tension) and realize an impactful performance.

[Effect 5]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the game board 2 that is visible through the opening formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game board 2 includes the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member). For example, in the movable member contact effect A in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B in FIG. 130, the first effect is provided on the front frame 53 side. The operation of the provided protrusion 603 (movable member) is interlocked with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2. (FIGS. 129(C) and (D) for movable member contact effect A, and FIGS. 130(C) and (D) for movable member contact effect B). According to this configuration, even if the movable member on the game board side provided on a conventional game board operates, it can give a surprise to the player, but the protrusion provided on the front frame 53 side The operation of the movable member 603 and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2 are linked. In this way, compared to the conventional case in which only the movable members of the game board provided on the game board operate, it is possible to give the player more surprise (impart more sense of tension) and create an innovative performance. Can be done.
In the movable member contact effect C in FIG. 131, the first effect is the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) provided on the front frame 53 side and the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) can start moving in conjunction with the operation (in the case of movable member contact effect C, Fig. 131(C) , (D)). According to this configuration, even if the movable member on the game board side provided on the conventional game board operates, it could give a surprise to the player, but the frame movable member provided on the front frame 53 side The operation of the bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2 are By interlocking, compared to the case where only the movable parts on the game board installed on the conventional game board operate, the system gives the player more surprise (imparts more tension) and creates an innovative performance. It can be realized.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the movable member contact effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The movable member contact effect A in FIG. 129, the movable member contact effect B in FIG. 130, and the movable member contact effect C in FIG. 131 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20. . In other words, the game was played in a so-called left-handed game state. However, the process may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, the game may be played in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the movable member contact effect A shown in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B shown in FIG. 603 (movable member) could come into contact with it. In addition, in the movable member contact effect C shown in FIG. 131, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are activated to start moving, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). (movable member) could come into contact with each other. However, instead of such a movable member, it may be a member that is responsible for the world view of the performance that is played out in the gaming machine 1. For example, it may be an item or part of an item owned by the character, or a part of the character (for example, wings, fangs, claws, fingers, scales, etc.).

[Modification 3]
In the movable member contact effect A shown in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B shown in FIG. 603 (movable member) could come into contact with it. In addition, in the movable member contact effect C shown in FIG. 131, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are activated to start moving, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). (movable member) could come into contact with each other. However, instead of such a movable member, a capsule made of colorless transparent resin that covers the production button 63 and is divided into left and right parts is provided, and the left capsule and the right capsule, which are divided into left and right parts and are movable, are used as the movable members. You may.

Specifically, the left capsule and the right capsule are provided on the front frame 53 side, and when the left capsule and the right capsule are retracted to the retracted position (home position) covering the production button 63, the left capsule and the right capsule are in a state where the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule are in surface contact on a vertical line passing through the center of the production button 63 and are combined, and the left capsule and the right capsule release the production button 63. In the state in which the left capsule is advanced to the advanced position where the button 63 is moved, the right end of the left capsule is far away from the left end of the direction button 63 by moving horizontally to the left of the vertical line passing through the center of the direction button 63. Then, the right capsule moves horizontally to the right from the vertical line passing through the center of the performance button 63, so that the left end of the right capsule becomes far away from the right end of the performance button 63.

In addition to the left capsule, the right capsule, and the production button 63, the front frame 53 includes an electric drive source (for example, A rotational movement mechanism including a motor and a solenoid is provided. In addition to an electric drive source, the rotational movement mechanism also uses a reducer that decelerates the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, and a rotary movement of the motor (rotational movement that decelerates the rotation of the motor). a motion conversion mechanism for converting the capsule or the right side capsule into parallel movement; when the electric drive source is a solenoid, a mechanism for transmitting the linear movement of the plunger of the solenoid to the parallel movement of the left side capsule or the right side capsule; In addition to these mechanisms, it is comprised of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

When the left side capsule and the right side capsule are placed at the retreat position (home position), they are placed so as to cover the production button 63. Even if the player tries to press the production button 63, the player is blocked by the left capsule and the right capsule. Note that the biasing force of the return spring is acting on the left side capsule and the right side capsule, so if the gaming machine 1 is not powered on or the power is cut off due to a power outage during play, the return spring will not be activated. Due to the biasing force, the left side capsule and the right side capsule are placed in a retreat position (home position) so as to cover the production button 63.

On the other hand, when the left side capsule and the right side capsule are placed in the advanced position, the left side capsule and the right side capsule are placed in a state where the effect button 63 is released. In this state, the player can press the production button 63 without being blocked by the left capsule and the right capsule. In addition, when the player presses the production button 63, even if the player's hand comes into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule, the player's hand is The rotary movement mechanism is provided with an overload prevention mechanism that moves the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule in parallel so that they do not press the player's hand any further. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

The left capsule and the right capsule operate in such a manner that the left capsule and the right capsule move from a retracted position (home position) to an advanced position and return to the retracted position (home position) again. By using this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the left capsule and the right capsule move to the advanced position for a predetermined period of time and maintain the state in which the production button 63 is released, and the left capsule and the right capsule move intermittently. It is possible to realize an operation in which the left capsule and the right capsule continuously move to the advanced position and release the production button 63, or to continuously move the left capsule and the right capsule to the advanced position and release the production button 63. It is possible to realize an operation of retracting to a retreat position (home position) or closing the production button 63.

When the operation mode of the left side capsule and the right side capsule is started, the left side capsule and the right side capsule move to the retreat position (home position) while the player is pressing the production button 63 (repeatedly pressing, long pressing, etc.). As a result, the player's hand may come into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule. For this reason, even if the movable member on the game board side provided on a conventional game board starts moving (even if it operates), the movable member on the game board side will never come into contact with the player. On the other hand, after the left capsule and the right capsule move to the advance position and the production button 63 is released, the left capsule and the right capsule move to the retreat position (home position) while the player is pressing the production button 63. ), the player's hand suddenly comes into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule. It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and novel performance of contact between the player and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 4]
In the movable member contact effect A in FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B in FIG. 130, the protrusion 603 is formed of a colored, opaque (for example, red) flexible member. However, the protrusion 603 may be formed of a colored (single-colored or multi-colored) translucent flexible member or a colorless and transparent flexible member. In this case, a decorative substrate for a protrusion that causes the protrusion 603 to emit light is housed inside the handle 60. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the protrusion decorative substrate, and when the full-color LEDs emit light, the protrusion 603 emits light. In other words, the light emission mode of the protrusion 603 can be changed by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the protrusion decoration substrate. Note that an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided at the frontmost side of the handle 60 housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. ing. Therefore, the light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board for the protrusion and the light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602 are prevented from interfering (mutually). A diaphragm is formed inside the handle 60 so as not to interfere with each other. Further, a light guide member is provided at the lower end of the protrusion 603, and when the light emitted from the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the protrusion decoration substrate is incident on the lower end of the light guide member, the upper end of the light guide member The light enters the lower end of the protrusion 603 and is emitted from the upper end of the protrusion 603, so that the upper end of the protrusion 603 and the vicinity of its surrounding side surfaces (the front surface of the protrusion 603 and its surrounding side surfaces) emit light. becomes.
Furthermore, in the movable member contact effect C shown in FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are formed of colored, opaque (for example, red) flexible members. However, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be formed of a colored (monochrome or multicolor) translucent flexible member or a colorless transparent flexible member. In this case, a decorative substrate for a protrusion that causes the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d to emit light is housed inside the front frame 53. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion, and when the full-color LEDs emit light, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d emit light. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be changed by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion. Note that an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided at the frontmost side of the handle 60 housed inside the front cover 602, and a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. However, since the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60, light emission from the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board for the protrusion on the front frame 53 side and the handle The light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed inside the front cover 602 on the 60 side does not interfere with (do not affect each other).

[Modification 5]
In the movable member contact effect C in FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 in the upper, lower, left and right directions of the handle 60 (that is, around the handle 60). That is, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are formed with a motif of flower petals surrounding the handle 60. However, one or both of the so-called gimmick frame movable bodies 69 (also referred to as frame movable accessories 69) movable on the right and left sides of the handle 60 shown in FIG. 1 may be operated. . This allows the player's hand to suddenly come into contact with the frame movable body 69 (frame movable accessory 69) while the player's palm wraps around the handle 60 (operating means) from the front. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and novel performance of contact between the frame movable body 69 (frame movable accessory 69) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Modification 6]
The movable member contact effect A shown in FIG. 129, the movable member contact effect B shown in FIG. 130, and the movable member contact effect C shown in FIG. 131 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added. You can.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation means that can be operated by a player,
having a movable member actuated by an electrical drive source;
When the movable member is actuated to start moving, a first effect is executed in which the movable member can come into contact with the hand of a player who operates the operating means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
The operating means and the movable member are provided on the front frame side of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
The movable member is provided inside the operating means, and is difficult to contact with the hand of a player operating the operating means in the first position, and is difficult to contact with the hand of the player operating the operating means in the second position. become contactable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
The movable member is provided outside the operating means, and does not cover the hand of the player who operates the operating means in the first position, and does not cover the hand of the player who operates the operating means in the second position. cover your hands,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-2 to D6-4,
comprising a game board that is visible through an opening formed in the center of the front frame;
The game board is provided with a game board side movable member,
The first effect is such that the operation of the movable member and the operation of the game board side movable member start moving in conjunction with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as the operation parts to be operated by the player, but is not limited to these, and the operation parts to be operated by the player include a lever, , a trigger, etc. may also be used. Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, out of the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, although the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64, The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 5...Board lamp 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending image (pending icon)
9C...The relevant pending image (pending icon)
14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 17...Big winning opening opening starting opening 20...First starting opening (first ball entrance)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64...Sub display screen 69...Frame movable accessory 66...Frame lamp 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for performance control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In the gaming machine, a game is performed in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player. ,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is such that when the gaming state is the second gaming state, the second gaming state ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching a first specified value. The display is a display suggesting a transition to the first gaming state, and is an effect of displaying first result information representing the result of a jackpot game during a series of matches;
The first result information display includes average time information representing the average time until winning a jackpot during consecutive games,
The second display performance is a performance that performs a state suggestion display that suggests the second gaming state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images